eee ell

NOTES on true WEANING or a YOUNG KOALA

(PHASCOLARCTUS CINEREUS)

By A. KEITH MINCHIN, Koara Farm, AvELAIDE.

Plates i and ii.

In June, 1938, a member of my staff informed me that one of the female Koalas in

the Adelaide Koala Farm appeared ill with diarrhoea. This female had been

thriving and only five weeks before the baby she was carrying in her pouch had

been seen with its head out for the first time. Six months previously (January,

1933) a slight swelling in the mother’s pouch had first indicated the presence of

the juvenile (at birth the young is about the size of a man’s finger nail).

On inspection I discovered the Koala sitting back in the position illustrated

on pl. ii, fig. 1. Only the head and forelegs of the young Koala were protruding

from the mother’s pouch, and its face was covered with a yellowish-green slime.

The baby was forcing its nose into the mother’s anus, and as it nuzzled it attempted,

with its front claws, to enlarge the opening into which it was thrusting its snout.

The baby was energetically eating the substance from the mother’s rectum.

Although the parent appeared uncomfortable while this was going on, she re-

mained quiet and made no attempt to ‘‘claw’’ the baby or to stop its activities by

moving her position, as happened on other occasions when the young one became

annoying. The posterior areas of the mother and the fur up to the pouch opening

were saturated and stained with the yellowish-green material; at times the baby

would cease eating from the anus to suck and claw at the stained fur.

This particular meal took an hour to complete and during that time the baby

avidly and actively fed, giving the impression that it had at last discovered the

food for which it had been craving. The substance appeared to be peptonized gum

leaves, and in no way resembled faeces passed during diarrhoea.

On the ground immediately beneath the female was a mound of faeces some-

what like fresh cow manure. This mound was fresh, and on examination I found

beneath the soft shapeless manure, soft well-formed pellets, mixed with hard dark

pellets, such as are passed by any Koala under normal conditions. This seemed to

indicate that the mother’s lower bowel had been emptied so that the peptonized

gum leaf from her upper bowel might be hurried along to nourish a baby requiring

more than milk but yet still too young to digest such a coarse diet as gum leaves.

If a Koala becomes sick with diarrhoea its fur invariably remains matted and

2 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

stained for a long period; in the case described, within three hours both the

mother’s posterior and the face and fore limbs of the baby were dry and clean.

For almost a month the baby Koala took food in this manner every second or

third day, but always between 3 p.m. and 4 p.m. My observations point to the

probability that the mother Koala does not produce this food entirely voluntarily,

but that the young Koala brings about the operation by massaging her anus with

the nose and mouth. Before commencing this diet the baby had appeared weak and

undeveloped (pl. i, fig. 1) ; twenty-four hours after the first meal it had grown and

appeared so much stronger that it was difficult to believe that it was the same

animal. Within two weeks its body weight appeared to have doubled and it began

to take an interest in the tips of the youngest gum leaves. Within a month the baby

was definitely weaned and had transferred its attention from the mother’s anus to

gum leaves alone.

The writer has observed the same procedure in the case of each young Koala

reared in his park, although the length of the period during which the young con-

tinue to take food from the rectum varies according to seasonal or local conditions

affecting the young edible tips of the gum leaves. If plenty of tender tips are

available, the baby may be weaned in a month; on the other hand I have seen a

young Koala feed from the mother’s anus for as long as six weeks,

In June of this year I watched the fifteenth young Koala reared under obser-

vation take food from the mother’s anus as had all the others. The weaning of this

baby occupied five weeks, and during that period it took food from the mother

always between noon and 2 p.m.

It may be well to mention that the Koalas were not under surveillance at

night, and observations were made only between 9 a.m. and 6 p.m. It is possible

therefore that the young feed upon partly-digested gum leaves more frequently

than is thought, but I do not consider this probable as it would weaken the females

too much.

A cinematograph record in colour of this strange method of weaning has been

made by the writer. This film has been viewed by a number of interested persons,

including the Professor of Human Physiology and Pharmacology at the University

of Adelaide, Sir Stanton Hicks. The last-named has furnished the following

comment :

“‘T have witnessed a showing of Mr. Minchin’s film of the phenomenon re-

corded in the above notes, and have seen a specimen of the material passed by the

bowel of the parent Koala subsequent to the stimulation by the young animal. I

have no doubt that the phenomenon is a more extensive one than that generally

known as reflex colonic peristalsis following rectal dilation and stimulation. It

acquires greater interest in view of the fact that the dietary of the Koala is so

MINCHIN—WEANING OF A YOUNG KOALA 3

limited, and that the presence in it of poisonous essential oils involves special meta-

bolic processes to ensure detoxication. The subject is one deserving extended bio-

chemical and physiological investigation, and it is hoped that this may follow on

Mr. Minchin’s interesting and important observation.’’

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate i.

Fig. 1. Young Koala just prior to taking first meal of partly digested gum leaves.

Note undeveloped hind-quarters.

ty

a

Be}

iw)

Young Koala twenty-four hours after first meal.

Plate ii.

Fig. 1. Attitude of mother when feeding young on partly digested leaves; note

paw of the infant gripping its mother’s body.

in|

a

ge

i)

Young Koala one month after taking its last meal of partly digested gum

leaves.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE I.

WEANING OF A YOUNG KOALA.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM Vor. VI. PLATE IT.

WEANING A YOUNG KOALA.,

ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, ACTING ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

When examples of aboriginal art from various parts of Australia are examined, it is

noticeable that those originating from the Northern Coast and, to a lesser extent, from

the Eastern coastal fringe north of Sydney, are largely representations of various

animals, fish and human beings. Some of the cave paintings from Napier Broome Bay

(Mountford, 1937, pp. 30-40), Prince Regent River (Bradshaw, 1891, p. 100), and

adjacent localities are drawn with a freedom of style that is not known in any other

part of Australia.

ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS From THE

WARBURTON RANGES tn WESTERN AUSTRALIA

RELATING TO THE WANDERINGS OF TWO ANCESTRAL BEINGS

Tue Wati KuTyara

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, Hon. Assisrant 1n EtuHnoLocy, Sourn AusTraLian MusEeum.

Text fig. 1-27.

THIs paper places on record a series of aboriginal crayon drawings and the rele-

vant details, which concern incidents in the life of two mythical ancestors, the

Wati Kutjara, who belonged to the Ngadadjara tribe of the Warburton Ranges of

Western Australia.

Tindale has already published a summary and map of the wanderings of

these ancestral beings (Tindale, 1936, pp. 169-185). His paper deals with the

song's, ceremonies and wanderings, while the present paper describes the drawings,

the information gathered at the time that they were made, as well as an analysis

of the designs, the colours used, and the ages of the artists concerned.

The drawings were collected in August, 1935, during an expedition carried

out under the auspices of the Board for Anthropology at the University of Ade-

laide, assisted by funds from the Rockefeller foundation and administered by the

National Research Council. They form a small part of an extensive collection. A

general report on the Expedition appears in Oceania (Tindale, 1936, pp. 481-485,

map). :

The method of obtaining the drawings was as follows: Sheets of brown wrap-

ping paper, approximately 50 em. by 30 em., were distributed, together with

erayous of the only colours available to the natives, i.e. red, yellow, black and

white. The Australian aborigine is particularly susceptible to suggestion, and it

was especially desired that nothing external should influence the choice either of

the subject, the colours chosen or the method of drawing’; therefore no subject was

nominated, and the native was asked only to make marks (walka) on his paper.

Un the completion of the drawings, the meanings of the various designs, and if

possible, the mythological ideas associated with them, were obtained through an

interpreter and the details noted on the sheet concerned. The registration number

of the native and the date were also included. The registration symbol for the

Warburton Range Expedition is K, and this letter precedes the numbers of the

natives mentioned.

6 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Before the confidence of the natives had been gained (this being fully estab-

lished at the end of the first week) simple drawings of everyday things of abori-

ginal life were made, such as kangaroos, emus, trees, camps and waterholes. At

the end of that time, drawings relating to the travels and exploits of the abori-

ginal’s mythical ancestors began to be produced by the older men. From that

time onward, no difficulty was experienced in obtaining designs, in fact, if was

unfortunate that, as only a limited amount of time was available for the inter-

pretation of the detail, and the recording of the data, the distribution of the sheets

had to be curtailed.

Although no attempt was made to conceal the work from any member of the

expedition, drawings would be covered if a woman, child, or uninitiated youth

approached within 50 metres. In fact, in order to preserve further secrecy, the

old men insisted that the sheets should be carried into our tent in a folded position.

The drawings secured, particularly those of the aged men, are mostly cere-

monial in character, and refer to the exploits of such mythical beings as the kan-

garoo (malu), the wallaby (tawalpa), the snake (wanambr) who was responsible

for most of the permanent water holes, two separate groups of ancestral women,

and several human beings, including one called Jula, and the Wati Kutjara.

Other ancestors were mentioned, but this paper deals in detail only with

drawings relating to the Wati Kutjara (Wati = man, Kutjara = two).

In order to secure accurate copies, the drawings were photographed, the de-

signs outlined on the print and the photographic image bleached away. Thus

unintentional alterations are not introduced in the process of copying for re-

production.

The Wati Kutjara, according to our interpreter Pitawara (K.6), were good

looking and kindly young men, who made the best camping places for the natives,

and were generally held up as models to the young men of the tribe.

After many adventures, they climbed into the sky and can be seen on any

clear night, 8 Gemini representing Kurukadi, the elder, and a Gemini the younger,

Mumba.

Fig. 1 depicts an incident in the life of the Wati Kutjara at Njidibunga, an

unlocalized place some distance west of our base camp at Warupuju. The draw-

ing was made by a middle-aged native, Mungalu (K.14). The two designs on the

right hand side represent Kurukadi, the elder, while those on the left hand side

picture Mumba, the younger. The latter was a lazy individual, who sat about

most of his time, leaving his companion, Kurukadi, to do the greater share of

hunting and cooking.

Mumba, A, is depicted as seated upon a stone, B, with fires (shown as small

circles) on either side of him. The stone, B, is now a large hill at Njidibunga.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 7

Kurukadi, C, is shown without fires. The upper pair of figures depicts Kurukadi,

D, returned from the hunt and still carrying a kangaroo on his head. The upper

black line on the forehead of D represents the powdered charcoal and grease on his

forehead, while the lower line refers to the red ochre rubbed around the nose (1).

The fires are shown as adjacent to Kurukadi, and possibly represent cooking

hearths. Mumba, KE, is shown without legs, seated on some unspecified object. In

BLACK

AD

1

“—

FIG.2 YELLOW GJ RED

Cc

both A and E, Mumba is depicted as wearing a head-dress, whilst Kurukadi, at C,

has only a black line across the face, and at D, as previously mentioned, the face

was covered with powdered charcoal and ochre. Our informant, Mungalu, also

indicated that these ancestors made extensive journeys through the country,

creating many hills, waterholes and other natural features.

The placing of the figures, the choice of the colours, and the execution of this

drawing make it one of the most attractive obtained from the area.

Fig. 2 is of unusual character, and like fig. 1 forms one of the more decorative

sheets in the series. Tolaru (K.3) was responsible for this design. It refers to a

waterhole, Lelele (see fig. 15) some distance north-west of Warupuju, where one

(1) The custom of greasing the face and the body, and rubbing on crushed red ochre or

powdered charcoal was often witnessed during our stay.

8 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the Wati Kutjara threw a boomerang, its circuitous path being illustrated by

the incomplete ellipse A. He named the spot Lelele, picked up the boomerang, and

continued his journey ; the ancestor is pictured in the centre. B indicates his head

(kata), C and D the arms (ngaruka), F and G the feet (¢jena), and E the body

(jananggo). The footprints and chest scars are shown at K, L and M, N.

Fig. 3 was made by a middle-aged native, Windinja (K.51), and illustrates

the natural features made by the Wati Kutjara during their journeys in country

adjacent to two small water holes, A and B, known to the natives as Julduda and

Jalatja. These are situated in a creek lined with gum trees, The trees are indi-

cated by six series of concentric circles and spirals, D. E. F. G. H and J. The

creek, Warumba, C, is shown as a meandering line across the top of the drawing.

The only waterholes indicated are those at A and B, but Windinja when making

the drawing stated that other small water supplies could be found alone the

whole length of the creek.

The lower part of fig. 2 refers to the meeting of the two men with one of a

group of ancestral Kunkarunkara women. This woman made the creek, K, and

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 9

camped at Jabu Muluta, M (jabu = hill). The Wati Kutjara quarrelled about

the women, and one drove the other away, after which he rested at P, and slept

with the woman. The following morning, the two men made up their quarrel,

spirals N and O, indicating where they rested. (Although not specified by the

artist, these spirals doubtless represent natural features, probably hills). In this

place, the ancestral men laid down lines of bushes at Q, which, as time went on,

were transformed into a range of hills,

From their resting places at N and O, one of the men travelled to a locality,

R, near two hills called Jabu Njinga, where, in order to play a joke on his com-

panion, he impersonated a kangaroo. ‘The other man was about to spear the

supposed animal when the joker revealed himself. The above-mentioned hills,

Rand 8, were created from the two nose-bones (2) left behind by the ancestors at.

this place..

From these hills they travelled to a spot, T, where a waterhole, Kapi Jiljudi,

was created. Leaving this they camped or rested at U, Kapi Murara (kapi =

water, or waterhole), journeyed past an unnamed water to V, Muludumbi, rested

at W, and finally camped at X, Kapi Nealbari. At the latter place a number of

small waterholes, in addition to the larger ones shown at X, were made. ‘he lines

of spinifex at Y grew under the feet of the Wati Kutjara as they walked about.

An ancestral human beine, Wati Muluta, camped at Z. This individual is not

recorded in any other drawing, and is probably an unimportant mythical being.

M (Jabu Muluta) is associated with this ancestor.

An examination of fig. 3 will give some indication of how intimately these

ancestors (for the Wati Kutjara is only one of many) are associated with the

country, every natural feature being attrbiuted to the agency of one or the other

of them. The drawing also indicates the importance whieh natives of this arid

country attaeh to water supplies.

(2) A short piece of bone pushed through a hole in the nasal septum for purposes of decoration.

if

10 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 4 was drawn by Wanpiri (K.49) and deals with the wanderings of the

Wati Kutjara near Kapi Konapurul. The being or beings lay down and slept at

A and B. Where the buttocks rested, Kapi Kunpural, A, was formed, and the

depression made by the head became Kapi Kulpudjara, B. An unnamed creek,

which connects the two waterholes, was formed in the hollow made by the weight

of the body. The ancestors then travelled to C, where another waterhole appeared,

while a small unidentified waterhole to the right of C was made at the same time.

LOFIG.S

From here they went to D where a series of small waterholes named Kapi

Wangu now exist. Returning on the same track the Wati Kutjara passed through

C, camped at HE, forming Kapi Kanari (which is situated in a direction N.N.E.

from our base camp at Warupuju). Travelling through F, Kapi Kumbul, the

mythical beings camped at G, H.

Here again, as at A, B, two waters, Kapi Marltadara, G, and Kapi Kumpulta,

H, appeared where the buttocks and head had rested. As before a creek connect-

ing these two waters resulted from the gutter made by the weight of the body. No

explanation was given as to the maker of Kapi Wiwara, J.

On being asked why a square design (an unusual symbol) was used to repre-

sent J, Wanpiri stated that he drew both this water and Kapi Kumbul, F, in that

manner because that was their shape.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 11

The zig-zag line K represents a range of hills made by the ancestral kangaroo.

This he did by laying down bushes. On the same sheet were further drawings

relating to the wanderings of this ancestor, and also those of the mythical wallaby.

Ag these were not relevant to this series they are not reproduced.

Fig. 5 was drawn by Katabulka (K.1), the aged owner of Warupuju Spring

(our base camp). The drawing relates to a time when the Wati Kutjara left two

wanigt (3) at Kalkakutjara (Tindale, 1936, p. 179).

A and B represent the wanigt.

Although designs EK and F’ were marked on the sheet as representing two

additional wanig?, it is likely that Katabulka was misunderstood. Fig. 4 was one

of the first sheets of ceremonial drawings obtained, and considerable initial diffi-

culty was experienced, even with the help of the interpreter, in understanding the

explanations of the artist. The spiral designs at either end of E and F, and the

more or less parallel lines connecting them, resemble AB and GH in fig. 3. Further

as E and F are associated with the pubic tassels C and D, it is reasonable to suppose

that the former are symbolic of the Wati Kutjara.

It is also likely that G, H and J, which Katabulka explained were painted on

the backs and abdomen of the sub-initiates, represent the body decorations of the

ancestors themselves. This supposition is strengthened by the fact that Pitawara

(one of our interpreters) when referring to the Wati Kutjara ceremonies, at

Kanba, of which he was the owner, made the following statement: ‘‘We must do

the same as did Wati Kutjara. We sing the same songs, and have the one mark

(i.e. identical marks) on our bodies.’’

G, F and J, the designs painted on the bodies of sub-initiates, may be

representative of the marks on the bodies of the two ancestors. It is likely, then,

that E and F are the two men, B and C their pubic tassels, G and H the designs

painted on the back, and J that on the abdomen, while A and B stand for the two

wanigi lett behind at this locality.

The design at K was given the name of Merejawara. The transverse lines are

the marks on the chest, and the meandering lines a trail made by some being. For

the same reason as mentioned earlier, the meaning of the word, or the significance

of the symbol, could not be obtained. A rendering of Merejawara as mere = dead

or dying, and jawara = a mark made by a dragging object, would appear Literally

to mean ‘‘the trail made by a dying animal or man’’. his interpretation, how-

ever, may not be correct.

The two wanigi, A and B, were made at Turarurana (see fig. 8) and left at

Kalkakutjara (Tindale, 1936, p. 179).

(4) A saered object emblematic of some totemic animal or plant, Spencer and Gillen (1899,

page 231) give an excellent description. The Aranda name is Waninga.

12 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 6 was drawn by a fully initiated young man (K.8), and illustrates water-

holes and hills made by the Wati Kutjara. Reading from A across the centre of

the figure the names of the waters are as follow: A, Wanatara; B, Parlka-parlka ;

C, Walbawati; D, Kindingara; E, Kalitara; F and G, Kalianda; H, Lutja; J,

Muri.

2-90-68 © © <«. :

Si inal 7 rs

r* q ee e©€6

H | i]

ore: e. a = ©:

. _ Sa =“S4

¢3 ° * -

e >

F1G.6 ® © @ 6 =e

The remainder of the circles, O, P and Q, and similar designs, are hills, while

the parallel lines are the game pads made by present-day curos as they travel

between the waterholes and the hills.

On fig. 7 the Wati Kutjara are depicted as carrying a sacred object between

them at Kanba (Ghanda, P.B.197 (4) ). Tindale (1936, p. 174) gives the following

description of the making of a sacred anma board at this place. ‘‘The Wati

Kutjara cut off a slab of wood from the solid trunk of a large mulga tree, and made

an inma (or large wooden object of the type called tywrunga in Central Australia).

Two parallel marks were made up the trunk of the tree, and for three ‘‘nights”’

they hacked along the marks until they had cut out two deep grooves; a kandt or

adze stone, mounted on the end of a spear-thrower, was used for the work. On

the third night the slab of wood came off in their hands. . . . The long line of

dark patches in the Milky Way, between a Centauri and a Cygnus, called pula

pulinu, represents the inma (totem board) which the Wati Kutjara made, and

then left at Kanba. It remains there in the sky always, notwithstanding that the

material inme board still exists on earth. . . . They left the arma in a cave near

Kanba.”’ ,

The saered object being carried by the ancestors is the same as that described

in the above legend. The attempt to show some peculiar form of head-dress on

each of the men is of interest.

Fig. 8 relates to the doings of the Wati Kutjara at an unloealized place, Tura-

(4) P.B. 197 is one of a series of official bench marks made in 1932, and may be found in

Western Australian maps of this area, e.g. Plan 1X/800.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 13

ruranja, south-east from Julia (Tindale, 1936, p. 179). A and B represent two

rock holes, C an echidna which the men had killed and eaten at this place, and D

the trail made by a wanigt, which after having been constructed by the Wati

Kutjara, was dragged away. Althouch the writer was not told that these ancestors

were responsible for the creation of the rockholes (°) A and B, it is more than

likely that it was so, the men having camped there, thus becoming ceremonially

associated with the place.

Fig. 9 relates to the meeting of the Wati Kutjara with the aged ‘‘ Moon man’’

and his grandson. This drawing was made by Mungalu (K.14) towards the end

of our stay, when comparative freedom from routine enquiries made possible the

obtaining of a more complete story.

At the place A the old man and the boy camped for the night. The following

morning they set out on a journey to a spot, D, the tracks made by the two being

indicated at B and C respectively.

Kidjili, the aged moon man, was feeble and partly blind, and therefore unable

to see that game was plentiful in the country. His grandson was anxious to obtain

meat for the evening meal, and seeing a cat called out, ‘‘There is a wilka. Let us

kill it for food.’”’? ‘‘No,’’ said the old man crossly, ‘‘leave it alone. We have a

long way to go, and there is no time for hunting.’’

After this rebuff the boy was silent until he saw an opossum. He again asked

to be allowed to catch meat, but the old man refused, on the same grounds as before.

On several occasions during the journey the boy made similar requests, only to

receive a gruff denial.

The old man Kidjili knew that the Wati Kutjara, who were following, would

eatch and kill any game seen by his grandson. The boy, however, was not aware

of this, the grandfather having intentionally kept such knowledge from him.

(5 7) An Australian term to signify a water catchment i in a rocky ‘outerop.

14 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

When the two moon people reached D, the boy was given a wooden dish, and

sent to a neighbouring rockhole, E, in order to bring water to the camp. On his

arrival he found that the dish leaked so badly that long before he reached the camp

it was empty. After several ineffectual journeys he achieved his purpose by block-

ing the holes in the dish with human excrement.

On his arrival he found to his surprise that the old man had already obtained

fresh meat and had cooked it in the oven, T.

It transpired that during the boy’s absence the Wati Kutjara had approached

the camp from another direction, and, laying the captured game on the ground

for the blind man, retired to their camps at Q and R. The unused portion of the

meat was transformed into a range of hills (see parallel lines M) ; the footmarks of

the Wati Kutjara, now large gum trees, are indicated by circles F, G, H and I, J, K.

The boy, knowing his grandfather to be too blind to catch game, said to him-

self: “‘T wonder where my grandfather obtained his meat?’’

The same thing having happened on several occasions, the boy became sus-

picious and, instead of going for the water as instructed, watched the doings of

the old man from the cover of some bushes. To his surprise two good-looking men

came up and gave meat to the old man. The boy then showed himself, and the old

man, finding that further subterfuge was useless, told the grandson that the Wati

Kutjara were his ‘‘uncles’’.

The camps of the Wati Kutjara are now two large hills, Q being called Nan-

gulpa, while R is unidentified. The depression S was made by the buttocks of

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 15

one of the men when he sat down to comb his beard, the creek P appearing where

the beard had rested on the ground,

It is interesting to note the difference between Kidjili, the moon man, who was

a relative of the Wati Kutjara, and Kulu, the man who pestered the Kunkarunkara

women, and who was finally killed by the Wati Kutjara at Tjilandi (Tindale, 1936,

p.176). Ina drawing by our interpreter, Pitawara (K,6), which shows influences

of his European associations, Kulu is described as ‘‘the ‘boss’ of the Moon, as well

as the morning and evening star’’.

=”

\

FIG. II

Fig. 10 refers to a place situated some distance east of the base camp called

Tjukata. The drawing, the work of Mungalu (K.14), is included in this series

because it was at this place that the Wati Kutjara are stated to have killed and

eaten the ancestral kangaroo, Malutjukur (malu = kangaroo, tjukur = relating

to the long distant past).

Several mythical beings, in addition to the Wati Kutjara, were responsible

for the hills, waterholes and creeks in this part of the country. The great snake,

Wanambt, as it travelled between B and W, forced the hills, C and D, apart and

created the creek A. The two hills are known as Jabu Tjukata. The ancestral

eaglehawk was responsible for the waterholes EK, F, G and H, the first two being

called Tjukata and Wakaelabunga respectively ; the latter was described as a rock-

16 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

hole inside of a hill, and it is interesting to note that the artist has attempted to

picture it in a different manner to the others.

The paired tracks J and K belong to the ancestral kangaroo who was killed

and eaten by the Wati Kutajara, who, after they had finished their meal, left the

head of the kangaroo behind. I and V are spear-throwers that belonged to the

hunters. Although not specifically mentioned these are probably natural features,

most likely hills.

Fig. 11 drawn by Windinja (K.51) relates to the incidents surrounding the

meeting of the Wati Kutjara and a eroup of ‘‘Sun’’ women at a place called Bubul.

FIG. 12

The story given as an explanation of this drawing is as follows: At the end of

a day’s journey the Wati Kutjara made a camp at A, and while resting heard the

sound of natives talking. The ancestors called out to the people ‘‘Come over here’’,

but received no reply. The ancestral men than said to one another, ‘‘I wonder

who they can be,’’ and continued to call. As the people who were talking in the

bush did not show themselves, the Wati Kutjara became angry, and set fire to the

spinifex that covered the surrounding country. The fire burnt these unsociable

people, who, it transpired, were a group of ‘‘Sun’’ Women (®). At every spot

(6) These women were called Tjindulakainguru. This word refers to one of the subdivisions

in the social organization of the Ngadadjara. tribe, and literally translated means ‘‘ Those who

sit, or camp in the sun’’, They thus belonged to the same generation as the Wati Kutjara. It

will be seen that the translation, given by the interpreter as ‘‘sun women’’, is a reasonable one,

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 17

where a woman was burnt (indicated by the series of concentric circles) a spring

arose. These are connected by large hills, drawn as parallel lines.

After the burning of the women the men travelled to D, where they lit a fire.

The hill that stands at this spot rose out of the ashes of that camp fire.

X is another hill, N a spring of water, and A the first camp of the Wati Kut-

jara, a large group of gum trees. The meandering lines H, F and G, represent a

series of creeks which flow into a waterhole at M.

Fig. 12 refers to a totemie centre called Julia (which place is identified by

Tindale, 1936, p. 170, as Sladden Waters in the Rawlinson Range). The sketch

was associated with the Wati Kutjara, but being one of the earlier drawings full

details were not secured. According to the artist, Katabulka (K.1), the concentrie

circles A, B, C and D were painted on the chest and forehead, and G on the back,

of the sub-initiates during the time they were undergoing ceremonial training at

this centre.

The rough sketches EK and F were made by the writer, and Katabulka was

asked to show the exact positions of the markings on the boy’s body. This he did,

explaining at the same time, that although the design covered the whole face of

the rough figure H, the actual symbol was painted on the forehead only.

The meandering lines connecting the various groups of circles were named

wanajawara, i.e. the trail made by the dragging of a digging stick (7) (wana =

digging stick, jawara = the trail made by a dragging object). This word suggests

the possibility of women being associated with this place, for the digging stick is

essentially a woman’s implement.

It is almost certain that A, B, C, D and F have a topographical significance,

but, as explained in connection with fig. 4, full details were not obtained.

(7) Wana, a stick about 5 em. in diameter and 1-5 metres long, sharpened to a chisel point

at one end by means of fire, It is used by the women for digging out yams and small marsupials,

18 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 13 was drawn by Katabulka (K.1) and its details recorded by Tindale.

It relates to the adventures of the Wati Kutjara at Tjawan, some two days’ walk

west of Windalda (Tindale, 1936, p.175). At Tjawan the Wati Kutjara made a

damper (*) from an unidentified fruit called turuba. The larger series of con-

centric circles, A represents a heap of the fruit, B and C the cooked dampers. The

latter were made by mixing the ground or pulverized fruit with water, and cooking

the mixture in the ashes.

F G J : ©"

The meandering lines connecting A, B and C depict the fruit spilling out on

the earth from the large heap at A. This may be a symbolic device by which an

aborigine expresses the presence of a plentiful supply. The meanings of A, B, C

and F apparently relate to the topography of the country. D and E are known to

be a water supply and a hill respectively.

Fig. 14 drawn by Tolaru (K.3) refers to ranges of hills and a waterhole north-

east of Warupuju. These hills were the handiwork of the Wati Kutjara. The

two outer circles picture the ranges named Jabu Neridji, and the inner circle a

waterhole called Kapi Paleuduna.

Fig. 15 was drawn by Ngawanti (K.48) and relates to the country a few miles

east of our camp. In this district the Wati Kutjara were responsible for eighteen

waterholes, a creek and a low range, A, called Bimulba. The latter grew up from

a game trap which had been constructed from the branches of trees for the purpose

of catching wallabies. One man hunted the animals into the trap while the other

killed them as they became entangled in the bushes. The two lines of concentrie

circles refer to the previously mentioned water supplies. Reading from the left

the names of those on the bottom are N, Wildjeri; O, Karnka (Tindale considers

(8) An outback Australian term applied fo a scone-like bread cooked in the ashes of a camp

fire. The name is not without its humorous side.

MoUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 19

His is likely to he Barlee Springs, P.B. 332); P, Katajungili; Q, Jili; R, Lelele;

8, Talunba; T, Neunduls UV, Kamini (Gamminah Soak, west of Mount tHerbert).

The last lwo, V and W, are munamed.

The names of the upper line. in the same order, ate; D, Duira; H, Pintapila;

h’, Katata; G, Palkiitay WH, Kakili; 1, Kapibura; KX, Juara; M, Tarnaja. Spinifex

country surrounded these waterholes.

The natives believe that the creek C was formed where the loosened hair string

(") of the Wati Kutjara rested after the wind had blown it along the ground.

Wie. 16 was drawh by K.8 and snegests that the Wati Kutjara were trans-

formed from erested pigeons into human beings at one time in their existence.

The large oval A represents a wet weather camp, the small upper oval B the camp

of the mother of the Wati Kutjara and her two children (apparently the youthful

Wati Kutjara). The mother is at R and the children at S, and their tracks at

Cand D lead away to the right, ln the lower oval O are the Wati Kutjara, T, their

tvacks, being shown at H.

Inchided in the same sheet are the drawings ol a crested pigeon, I, with its

tracks al B. K.8 explained thai this pigeon or pigeons later became the Wati

Kutjara. The camp of the crested pigeons al EK is now a well known waterhole

Windurn (Windarro, P.B. 280), while the large oval A is a place in the spinifex

country known to the natives as Jaralubulba. J is a wanigi left behind by the

Wati Kutjara.

This fragmentary sidelight touches on another aspeet of the Wati Kutjara

legend. It suggests that a group of pigeons were thansformed into human beings.

This transformation is not unusual in aborigiual mytholowy (Spencer and Gillen,

1904, pp. 400-410) quote several such instances. Tindale has shown that the

(!) The hair is bound in the form of a chignon with a considerable leugth of fur string,

Only fully initiated men are allowed to wear their hair in this fashion,

20 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

totem of the father of Pitawara (a Wati Kutjara totem man) was the mutumutu

or pigeon (Tindale, 1936, p. 182).

Fig. 17, the work of an elderly aborigine, Tolaru (K.3) illustrates a group of

three fig trees, jil¢ (19), which grow adjacent to a water supply ealled Kapi Tuk-

untjara, some distance north-west of Warupuju. The Wati Kutjara who came

from the south-west, camped at this place, and wherever they rested groups of fig

trees sprang up. A, B and C are but three of these trees.

Several sheets of drawings having a bearing on the Wati Kutjara legend were

drawn by our interpreter Pitawara (K.6). On all sheets, with the exception of

two figured by Tindale (1936, fig. 5 and 6), the designs used to illustrate the legend-

ary stories were typically European. This was probably due to the fact that the

aborigine had been in contaet with missionaries and police officers since he was a

young man, and thus had a restricted education in ceremonial matters. Pitawara

thus had little or no knowledge of the traditional symbols used by his countrymen,

although he appeared to be conversant with many of the legendary stories, par-

ticularly those relating to his own totem, the Wati Kutjara.

This would suggest that, although the legends are a matter of common know-

ledge to the men and to a lesser extent, the women, the method of depicting such

stories would only be acquired after years of association with the secret life of

the tribe.

In another of Pitawara’s series of drawings, a story relating to Kulu, the

morning and evening stars, and the new and full moon, is illustrated. The body of

Kulu is marked to show the manner in which the Wati Kutjara decreed that all

men should be decorated when they danced in the ceremonies relating to Kulu, who

was killed by the Wati Kutjara for interfering with women called the Kunkarun-

kara (Tindale, 1936, p.176). As mentioned in connection with fig. 9, Kulu should

not be confused with Kidjili, the moon. According to Pitawara, Kulu is the

master of the moon and morning and evening stars. The two latter, which the

natives recognize as one and the same, is called Murunba, the new moon Kidjili

pilda, and the full moon Kidjili takanba. The moons were depicted in the conven-

tional European manner, i.e. a crescent and a circle respectively, Murunba, five

pointed stars, and Kulu as a man in the usual manner.

Another drawing by the same aborigine shows a native dancing in the Wati

Kutjara ceremonies. It depicts him as wearing shaved sticks in his hair and with

his body marked with lines of down.

(10) A tree (Ficus platypoda) which grows on rocky outerops, the fruit of which is an

aboriginal food.

MouUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS al

ANALYSIS OF DESIGNS.

When examples of aboriginal art trom various parts of Australia are ex-

amined, it is noticeable that, those originating from the Northern Coast and, to a

lesser extent, from the Hastern coastal fringe north of Sydney, are largely repre-

sentations of various animals, fish and human beings. Some of the cave paintings

from Napier Broome Bay (Mountford, 1937, pp. 30-40), Prince Kegent River

(Bradshaw, 1891, p. 100), and adjacent localities are drawn with a freedom of

style that is not known in any other part of Australia.

When, however, the art of the natives from Central and South Australia, Tas-

mania aud Western Australia is examined, it will be noticed that by far the

greatest number of designs im use are so highly conventionalized as to be inde-

eipherable without the assistance of the artist who produced them.

The identifiable figures of uleu, animals and reptiles form a small percentage

of the designs Lo be seen at the various sites. An examination of Basedow’s work

on the rock carvings of South Australia (Basedow, 1915, p. 195-211), and the

writer's work on the sanie subject (Mounttord, 1928, p. 887-366), will make this

potol clear,

The drawings in the Wati Kutjara suite and, for that matter, all those collee-

ted at the Warburton Ranges, showed characteristics similar to the designs trom

Central, Southern and Western Australia,

Hor that reason, if was decided to analyse the Wati Kutjara suite under six

headings, as follows:

(a) 'l'ypes of designs used,

(0) Number of oceasions on which a particular design appears.

(¢) Meaning attached to a specitied design in each particular figure,

(d) The numbers of each type design used,

(e) The choice of colours.

(f/) Age of aborigines respousible for the production of the drawings,

(a) Typr ov Dusian Usep.

Figs. 1 and 2, being anthropomorphic, are excluded from the analysis, figs.

3-17 only being considered.

An examination of the various figures showed that the symbolical designs used

could be grouped under ten headings. The drawings of miscellaneous objects,

including human, animal, and animal (racks, may be set under another two,

making a total of Lwelve categories in all, .

The ten symbolic designs are shown in figs, 18 to 27. Three of the tigures, i.e.

22 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

18-19, and 22 are considered to be amplifications of simpler figures such as 20, 23

and 25.

Each of the figures, i.e. 18-27, was used by the natives to convey different

meanings, and will be considered as a separate element.

o — ~ © <=

21 22

18 19 20

|| \/

23 24 25 26 27

As mentioned previously, the analysis excluded designs from figs. 1 and 2.

These, however, would not influence the averages to any extent as they only con-

tain 17 only in a total of 357 designs.

(b) Number or FIguRES IN WHICH A PARTICULAR DESIGN Is USED.

Concentric cireles (fig. 18) 10

Parallel straight lines (fig. 19) 8

Meandering or zigzag lines (fig. 20) 5

Spirals (fig. 21) i ‘ 6

Parallel meandering or zigzag lines (fig. 22) 4

Circles (fig 23) 9)

Ellipses (fig. 24) 2

Straight lines (fig. 25) 2

Squares (fig. 26) 1

Fern leaf (fig. 27) 1

(¢) Mnanines ArracHepD TO Eacu Design ELEMENT.

Fig. 18. Concentric circles (10 figures).

Fig. 3—Haills, waterholes and gum trees.

Fig. 4--Waterholes and ceremonial marks placed on the bodies of the natives

(which may refer to some totemic centre).

Fig.

Fig.

Fig.

Pig. 2

MouNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 23

Fig. 6—Waterholes and hills.

Fig. 8—Waterholes.

Fig. §—Ilills, gum trees and waterholes.

Fig, 10—Waterholes.

Fig. 12—Ceremonial body markings (see fig. 4 above).

Fig. 13—A ‘‘damper’’ made from ground or pounded fruit.

Fig. 15—Waterholes and hills.

Fig. 16—Waterholes.

Fig. 17—Ceremonial fig tree.

19. Parallel straight lines (8 figures).

Fig, 4—Creeks between two waterholes,

Fig. 5

Ceremonial marks on aborigine’s chest.

Fig, 6—Paths made by euros.

Fig. 7—The Wati Kutjara and an wna board.

Fig, 8—Mark made by dragging a ceremonial object.

Fig. 9—Creek and range of hills.

Fig. 11—Range of hills.

Fig. 17—No meaning obtained.

20. Meundering or zigzag lines (5 figures).

Fig. 3—Creeks, ranges of hills, lines of spinifex.

Fig. 4—Ranges of hills.

Fig, 5—Trail made by dragging object.

Fie. 7T—Creeks.

Fig. 15—Creeks and ranges of hills.

21. Spirals (6 figures).

Fig. 3—Waterholes, hills and gum trees.

Bie. 5—Ceremonial marks on backs of initiates. Similar meaning on same

plate for concentric circles.

Vig. 12--Ceremonial marks on backs of initiates.

Hie. 13—Damper made from eround fruit.

Kie. 15—Waterholes.

Fig. 17—Fig trees.

2 Parallel meandering and zigzag lines (i figures).

Bie. §—Paths made by ancestral beings.

Wig. 1O—Creek made by ancestral snake.

Fig. 12—Trail made by the dragging of digging sticks.

Wig. 13—Paths made by fruit as it rolled from large heap.

24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 23. Simple circle (5 figures).

Fig. 3—Small waterholes.

Fig. 4—Waterholes.

Fig. 6—Waterholes.

Fig. 10—Waterholes.

Fig. 16—Opossum being’s camp and windbreak.

Fig. 24. Ellipse (2 figures).

Fig. 9—Native oven.

Fig. 10—Hills.

Fig. 25. Simple straight lines (1 figure).

Fig. 11—Hills.

Fig. 26. Square (1 figure).

Fig. 11—Waterholes.

Big. 27. Fern leaf design (1 figure).

Fig. 5—Pubiec Tassels, Wanigt.

Summary or ANALysIs OF MEANINGS ATTACHED TO VARIOUS Design ELEMENTS.

Fig. 18. Concentric circles.

These are largely used to represent a geographical feature, a locality, or a

waterhole.

fig. 19. Parallel straight lines had a broad range of meaning, such as was to be

expected with so simple a design. In general, it represents creeks, ranges of hills,

paths and ceremonial markings.

Fig. 20. Meandering or zigzag lines.

The meanings attached to fig. 20 were similar to those associated with fig. 19,

representing ranges, creeks and tracks followed by the various ancestors.

Fig. 21. Spirals.

These were used side by side with the concentric circle, fig. 18. In many cases

the figure was started as a spiral and completed asa concentric circle (see fig. 3,

G.J.M.).

Pig. 22. Parallel meandering and zigzag lines.

This is an amplification of fig. 20, and the meanings used for the one are

equally applicable to the other.

MouNnTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS 25

Fig. 23. Plain cireles.

This figure, like that of the spiral, has similar significance to the concentric

circles.

Fig. 24, Ellipse.

Used twiee only, once picturing a native cooking hearth, and in fig. 8 in a

somewhat more elongated form depicting hills.

Piy. 25, Straight line.

Although a simplified form of fig. 19, the single isolated straight line was used

twice, On each oceasion it represented ranges of hills.

Fig.26. Square.

This unusual pattern was used on fig. 5 to represent rock holes; the native

drew the square to indicate particular rock holes of that shape.

Big. 27. Fern leaf.

Well known to students of primitive art from many parts of the world

(Mountford, 1935, p. 215), the fern leaf design appeared only in fig. 4. In this

ease, it had two totally unrelated meanings, Le. a pubic tassel and a wanigt.

Various tracks of animals and men were uoted in figs. 2, 10, 11 and 16. It

is more than likely that, in suites of drawings relating to the personal experiences

of the aboriginal artists, or to the domgs of the animal ancestors, such as the

kaugaroos, CLUS OF OpOssuTus, a wreater percentage of footprints would oeeur.

Nevertheless, they would not approach the percentage of hunmn and animal foot

tracks seen among the voek carvings in South Australia (Mountford, 1928, p. 348).

tu some localities, in the rock carving sites of South Australia, various footprints

form the bulk of the petroglyphs present.

(d) Tae Numepers or Hacn Drsian Usp.

Fig. 18 we BM Fig. 23 - oe oR

Fig. 19 -. eg 204 Fig. 24 5

Fig, 20 ma Pa Fig. 25 2

Fig. 21 aoe Fig. 26 2

Fig. 22 io ~ #1 Fig. 27 » Bf 4

These figures reveal an interesting fact. Out of 340 figures drawn, the eir-

cular designs, i.e. fies, 14, 21, 25 aud 24 represent about one half, i.e. 176.

As most of the drawings are, in reality, crude maps of the country, it is to be

expected that the circular figures shonld predominate, for, as has already been

26 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

shown, such designs usually represent some well known topographical feature such

as a hill, a waterhole, or an especially large tree. The predominance of circular

designs is also evident in Aranda drawings (Mountford, 1937A, p. 193).

For the same reason, designs 20 and 22 (parallel straight and meandering

lines) symbolical of creeks and ranges, were used 149 times, leaving 75 figures to

represent other features.

The drawings of tracks, objects, and animal and human forms, which number

17 in all, are excluded from the above analysis.

(e) THE CHoIce or CoLours.

As mentioned previously, the native was given the free choice of four coloured

crayons, i.e. red, yellow, black and white. Especial care was taken to see that these

colours were always on hand. One red crayon was, by chance, of a brighter hue

than the others, and it was interesting to note that this crayon was in constant

demand.

The colours used were also analysed, with the following results :

Combinations of colours used.

(Number of figures in suite, 17.)

Ried and white . 23 or ils be & . 11

Red, yellow and white 2

Red, yellow, white and black . 2

Yellow and white 1

Red 1

It will be seen that the most commonly used colours were red and white, each

appearing in 16 out of the 17 figures. Yellow was used in only five sketches, and

black in two.

In the majority of cases, white was used as an outline of the main design,

whilst red, and in two eases, yellow, formed the main design. (12).

Red is the favourite colour of the aborigines, it being considered to be the

sign of good health by the Narrinyeri peoples of the Lower Murray. During the

smoke drying of the dead body, it was anointed with red ochre and grease for the

same reason.

The colour is used most extensively in ceremonial as well as personal decora-

tion, and long journeys are undertaken to obtain this valued cosmetic. The most

famous of these journeys recorded was that undertaken by the Deiri tribe of the

North-East of South Australia to the red ochre deposit at Blinman in the Northern

(42) The key to the colours used in Figs. 1-17 can be seen on Fig, 2.

MouUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL CRAYON DRAWINGS a7

Flinders Ranges in South Australia, a distance of 300 miles (Gason, 1879, p. 280).

During a recent expedition to the Northern Flinders it was ascertained that natives

travelled from Charlesville, 8.W. Queensland, to Blinman, a journey of over 900

miles, for the same purpose.

Black, as the figures show, was used in two drawings. Dislile of this colour

could hardly be the reason for a not greater use, for on many occasions during his

stay at Warupuju the writer saw the natives decorating themselves with grease

and powdered charcoal,

Ages of the men who produced the drawings.

The majority of the drawings collected on this expedition were the handiwork

of the older men.

In the series under review, 15 figures were produced by men over 50 years

of age, one by a native of about 21 years of age, and {wo by a youth of 18.

Figs. 0, 8, 12 and 13, drawn by K.1 estimated age 50.

Figs. 2, 14, 17 iets ee BD.

Fig. 7 7 » KA by yy dt

Figs. 6 and 16 s » K.8 5 » =(18.

Figs. 1, 9 and 10 5 , Kd ,, » 46.

Fig. 15 A » KAR, » 40,

Figs. 3 and 11 ” pee hs) yo BoE

(K.6), the interpreter Pitawara, also made four sketches (not reproduced) ; his

estimated age was 24.

It will be seen that the average age by the seven artists responsible for the

fifteen figures is estimated to be thirty-seven years.

Younger men, with the exception of K.8, made sketches of simple objects, or

lines of waterholes, similar to fig. 6. These men volunteered little detail. This is

to be expected, for the acquisition of a full knowledge of the legendary stories re-

quires years of training, as well as many long and arduous journeys to the various

totemic centres.

K.8, who drew the sketch indicating the ovigin of the Wati Kutjara (fig. 16),

although quite a young man, 18 years old, took a prominent part in the ceremonies.

He showed more personality than his companions of the same age and it is

likely that this, coupled with a higher degree of interest, enabled him to aequire

a deeper knowledge of the ceremonial life than that obtained by other young men.

28 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SUMMARY.

This paper records a suite of aboriginal drawings relating to the wanderings

of two legendary men, the Wati Kutjara. The drawings are the work of men of

the Ngadadjara tribe of the Warburton Ranges of Western Australia.

The first part of the paper deals with a detailed description of each sheet,

and the second, an analysis of the designs used, the meanings thereof, the favourite

colours, and the ages of the aboriginal artists concerned.

LITERATURE.

Tindale, N. B. (June, 1936) : Oceania, Vol. vi, No. 4, pp. 481-485.

Tindale, N. B. (Dee., 1936) : Oceania, Vol. vii, No. 2, pp. 169-185.

Spencer, B. and Gillen, F. J. (1899) : Native tribes of Central Australia.

Spencer, B. and Gillen, F. J. (1904) : Northern tribes of Central Australia.

Mountford, C. P. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. Aust., pp. 30-40.

Bradshaw, Jos. (1891) : Journ. Roy. Geog. Soc. Aust., Vic., p. 100.

Basedow, H. (1935) : Journ. Roy. Anthrop. Inst., xliv, pp. 195-211.

Mountford, C. P. (1928) : Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., pp. 337-366.

Mountford, C. P. (1935) : Aust. Ass. Adv. Sct., p. 2138.

Gason, Samuel M., Taplin, G. and others (1879) : Native tribes of South Australia,

p. 280.

Mountford, C. P. (1987) : Trans. Roy. Soc. of 8. Aust., p. 98.

TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Scattered through early accounts of South Australia there are brief references to

Tasmanian women who were brought to South Australia by sealers and escapees from

Van Diemen Land during the early years of last century.

The present paper summarizes some facts relating to four Tasmanian women and

places on record a few words still known to the descendants of the Tasmanians. It also

gives an account of two small pieces of archaeological work carried out by Dr. H. L.

Movius of the Department of Anthropology, Harvard University, N. de Crespigny,

and the writer at Cape Hart and at Antechamber Bay, in March, 1936.

TASMANIAN ABORIGINES on KANGAROO ISLAND

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By NORMAN B.'TINDALT, B.Se., Emawonacier, Sourn AuerrALiAN Museum.

Plate iii, and Text fig. 1-3.

INTRODUCTION.

Scarrnren through early accounts of South Australia there are brief references

to Tasmanian women who were brought to South Australia by sealers and escapees

from Van Diemen Land during the early years of last century.

The present paper summarizes some facts relating to four Tasmanian women

and places on record a few words still known to the descendants of the Tasmanians,

Tt also eives an account of two small pieces of archaeologieal work carried out by

Dr, Fl. L. Movius of the Department of Anthropology. Harvard University, N, de

Crespigny, and the writer at Cape Hart and at Antechamber Bay, in March, 1936.

There are many references in the literature to the lawless people of Tasmanian,

Avistralian and European origin who lived along the Southern coasts of Australia

between 1803 and 1836. A useful account is given by Moore (1925), while Berry

(1907) deseribed a then living half-caste Tasmanian descendant of one of the

Tasmanian women, Tindale and Maevraith (1931) have also given a brief account

of these people during the course of their deseription of the archaeological remains

of an ancient occupation of Kangaroo Island.

Tn more recent years the collating of the reminiscences of some of the oldest

inhabitants of the island and a study of official doeuments anc records has enabled

the main outline of the story of the Tasmanian native women to be traced down

to the time of the death of the last one about the year 1888,

Amone those who have contributed to these details are Mr. Robert Snelling.

born in 1853, whose parents issued Government rations to the blaeks on Kangaroo

Island; Mr. Fred Buick, born in 1856; the late Mr, C. J. May, Curator of the Flora

and Fauna Reserve at Flinders Chase, and Mr, A. Daw. Tam indebted also to Mz.

M. T. MeLean (Protector of Aborigines) for information contamed in official

doeket No. 3890/1894 in the Aborigines Office and in docket No, 280/1894 of the

Destitute Board Office. Mr. H. T, Condon kindly made drawings Nos. 12-15.

The only pictorial record of the Tasmanian women of Kangaroo Island is

probably the one given in a sketch by Leigh (1839) opposite p. 105 of his aceount

where three women are shown as squatting with legs folded before a fire, behind

a low breakwind (pl. iii, fig. 1).

30 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

THE NATIVE WOMEN OF KANGAROO ISLAND,

The lack of originality shown by the sailors in naming their native womentoll

has helped to confuse the record but numerous accounts attest 1o the presence of

four Tasmanian women on the island. The South Australian census returns for

1866 (5) for example record the native population of Kangaroo [slanc, and a foot-

note states that ‘4 natives of Van Diemen Land”’ were also present, In Destitute

Board Office docket No, 28/1894 there is correspondence which (discusses the status,

for relief purposes, of Mary, the half-easte daughter of Betty, one of these Tas-

manians (italies are owrs) : ‘The applicant is not an aboriginal of S.A. blood, but

it has been the practice to assist aborigines from the other Australian colonies when

located in South Anstralia. There were three (3) Tasmanian women, native

hbload, lining in Kangaroo Island for many years, the last of these aborigines died

about six years ago, and she was reeeiving rations from this department. The

present applicant is believed to be the very last of this race, and on the ground of

Intercolonial reciprocity would, I submit, haye some claim on S.A. for assistance,

(Signed) E. AH. Hamilton, 8th. Sept. 1894,’’

This official record indicates the probability that the last Tasmanian survived

on Kangaroo Island until 1888.

In addition to the Tasmanian women at least two Australian aboriginal women

are mentioned in early records and it seems advisable therefore to list the names

of both the Tasmanian and Australian women and also to give supplementary

details mentioned by my informants and a list of some other notes found in the

ephemeral literature.

TASMANIANS.

(1) Rumble-foot Sal = Biy Sal,

‘Fine-looking big black’’, bumble-footed, had lost two toes by burning in a

fire ; her hair was ‘‘ wonderfully eurly as in Suke and Betty’’, Old accounts state

that she had dark skin and woolly hair, She is supposed to have died somewhere

near the waterfall at Middle River, She is mentioned by Bull (1878, ps. 8) as‘‘a

Tasmanian hlackwoman, called Sal, who had lost half of one of Ler feet when

young by sleeping with them too near the fire’’,

(2) Betty = Pole-cat = Old Bet.

Brought trom Van Diemen Land about 1819 by Robert Wallen. She lived

with Nat Thomas at Antechamber Bay and had a son and two daughters, These

children are mentioned in a newspaper article (‘South Australia Register’’, 25th

September, 1844) :‘‘Nat Thomas has , . . . a native woman who eatehes veullaby

for him, By her he has three very interesting little children, who eombine the

intelligence of the white with the activity of the native.’’ The son went io sea

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO TSLAND 3)

and was not heard of again. The daughters both had ehildren of whom five were

still living in 1936. There are also numbers of oetoroon deseendants, Detailed

venealogies have been gathered as a basis fora study of the deseetidants of the two

families. Ller grandson Joseph, living on Kangaroo Island, states that Betty died

i 1878 and was buried at Antechamber Bay; the approximate site of her graye is

known to be in a small field opposite the point where the main road tums abruptly

northwest away from the banks of Chapman River (Seetion 75, Hundred of

Dudley). Unfortunately the surface indications have been obliterated aeciden-

tally by ploughing, Tolmer (1882) mentions Old Bet as a Tasmanian and one of

her daughters, Mary, as the child of Nat Thomas. Mary was studied and deseribed

hy Berry (1907), Her photograph is also published by Hallack (1905, p, 43).

Mary’s previously mentioned 1894 application to the Government for sustenance

was approved, and in retran for the surrender of her property she was allowed

‘ations from the Aborigines Office until her death on the 9th September, 1913, A

few days after her death her eldest daughter Enima applied for permission to

retain the use of the cottage property until it was sold by the Government. Emma

was then 60 years of age, Her brother Joseph wrote to the Snrveyor-General from

Penneshaw on August 31, 1914, asking for partienlars regarding the ‘‘ property

lately aeenpied hy my late mother Mary’’.

The other daughter of Betty is stated to have married a fair-haired man from

Lincolnshire, and threg of her four sons and several grandehildven survive,

(3) Old Suke = Sal (not to be confused with Little Sal),

A. Tasmanian who was of a retiring nature. She was seldom seen in the later

days except when she gathered her rations. According to R. Snelling she was the

last to die, but there is donbt as to her burial place. In 1844 she was arrested with

another woman by Tolmer for complicity in the killing of Meredith, an early

visitor from Van Diemen Land,

(4) Puss.

A fourth Tasmanian woman is mentioned under the name of Puss.

Puss and Poleeat (Betty) are described as having been brought, together,

from Van Diemen Land by Robert Wallen (Worley, Whalley, Wally, Walker,

Wallens) who escaped from eustody there about 1817 (arriving at Kanearoo

Ixland about 1819), There seems to be little remembrance of Puss on the island.

AUSTRALIANS.

In addition to the above Tasmanians, several mainland natives are believed

to have lived on the island and one or two have heen al times confused with the

foregoing. Twa of them are given particular notice:

32 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(1) Little Sal = Sal.

In Tolmer’s (1882) account of Kangaroo Island Little Sal is mentioned as

having been abdueted from Port Lincoln about 1827. According to R. Snelling

she claimed to be a mainlander. Two other informants emphasize that in contrast

to Betty and Suke she had straight, or at most wavy hair, an Australian charac-

teristic. It appears from local information that she was buried at Springy Water,

near Stokes Bay, about the year 1877.

Two other informants, the late Mr. C. J. May, and Mr. A. Daw, regarded

Little Sal as a Tasmanian, and Hallack (1905) states that the last of the Tas-

manians is buried at the place called Springing Vale, near Stokes Bay, Kangaroo

Island. This seems to be the same place as Springy Water.

The weight of evidence seems to be that Little Sal was a native of Port Lincoln.

(2) Sally Walker.

This woman was well known as a native of the adjoining mainland. She

lived at Hog Bay and had no associations with the Tasmanian women.

It seems that at most four Tasmanian women were among the permanent

native inhabitants of Kangaroo Island during the lawless days preceding the

foundation of the State. The earliest date suggested for their arrival is 1810.

They were definitely present in 1519. Official records indicate the presence of

four in 1866, and one of them lived on until about 1888. One (Betty) had children

and some ten quadroon and octoroon descendants live in South Australia te-day.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL TRACES OF THE TASMANIANS ON KANGAROO

ISLAND.

Mr. H. M. Cooper, who has displayed much interest in the systematic collecting

of implements from camp sites on the mainland of South Australia, several years

ago, was asked by the writer to extend his activities to Kangaroo Island. During

the years 1935 to 1937 he found no fewer than 47 sites indicative of the ancient

highly characteristic native occupation of Kangaroo Island. Some details of his

discoveries are given in another paper in this series. In February, 1936, after one

of his periodic visits to the island he brought back to the Museum a European gun

flint and several strange bluish-egrey flint implements of a type not previously

found on the island,

At first glance these seemed to be of Tasmanian origin. Some of the flint

implements and the gun flint had been found on a small rectangular site indicated

by stones and by the remains of a stone chimney at Cape Hart. The others, even

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ARORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND 33

more characteristically Tasmanian, were found on a wind-swept rise less fhan two

hundred metres from the sea at Antechamber Bay beside the well on Seetion 394

whieh appears in the 1910 edition of the Hundred map of Dudley.

The flint from which the inplements were made proved to he similar lo that

found commonly in the Tertiary Marine limestones of the South-Bast of South

Australia, several ocenrrenees of whieh have been noted by Tindale (1983, ps, 158)

and by Towehin (1984, p, 16).

Throngh the courtesy of Dr. CLT. Code Crespigny in organizing a visit to the

ishind, Dr, H, L, Moving, N. de Crespigny, ancl the writer, visited the sites in

March, 1986. Examination led to the recovery of further flint flakes at the Cape

Fart site, while flint boulders were found to abound on the adjoining beach and

several broken ones were ford associated with the flint chippings present within

the wind-swept area covered by the Wit site and in its immediate vieinity, The

flint chippings weve confined to an area little more than 10 m. x 15 m. on the sea-

ward edge of a flat limestone shelf some six inetres above sea level immediately to

the west of Cape Hart. Wind scour had dropped all remains to the limestone and

had removed most traces of Pood debris except for a few weathered bones,

The Antechamber Bay site, which was situated approximately 50 metres due

north of the mouth of Chapman River and about 200 metres inland from the beach

line, proved to be more productive and notwithstanding that some wind seou had

already talcen place it was possible to dig into and sieve a thin layer of undisturbed

debris on the site of what was once a hut. Several additional flint implement

flakes were recovered and the productive layer, only a Few centimetres in thiekness,

was found to consist of ashy material, remains of shellfish (all Turbo undulatus )

and bones, principally (lose of (he Sooty or Kangaroo Island Kangaroo (Macropus

fuliginosus). EBragments of glass bottles, a small hand-carved bone, forming part

of a domino piece and several flints were recovered,

Examples of the flint implements, fhe game piece (ihe half of the two. of

duminges), # kangaroo jaw bone, a Turbo undulatus shell and a tragment of glass

bottle are shown in plate iii, fig. 2, and one of the flints and the game piece are

shown in the text figures 1 and 3,

On our visit to Antechamber Bay we were accompanied by a grandson of

(he Tasmanian woman Betty, wito was able fo indicate the site as beg at the

landing place favoured by sealers who visited Antechaniber Bay. 1 was the first

home of his grandmother, who, later on, lived im a cottage at Seetion 63, south

of Chapman River, until her death in 1878. Betty's children were educated by

the wife of (he lighthonse-keeper at Cape Willoughby, a lew kilometres away.

This statement corroborates one mentioned by Hallack.

34 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MusEUM

SIGNIFICANCE OF THE IMPLEMENTS.

The Tasmanian implements, made on Kangaroo Island in the years immedi-

ately after 1819, are of considerable theoretical interest.

They are entirely unlike the coarse and large implements characteristic af

the many sites of the archaic Kangaroo Island culture. They were found on two

small and restricted areas, associated with hut sites, and remote from places where

implements of the Kangaroo Island industry have heen found,

They mdicate how, when conditions are favourable, even such a transient

oceupation as is indicated to us by our historical knowledge of Kangaroo Island,

may become recorded in archaeological debris.

The presence of the Sooty Kangaroo as the principal mammalian food, places

the period of ocenpation of the Antechamber Bay hut site at-an early date, within

the period of lawless oceupaney before 1836, for it is stated that owing to the de-

pradations of the sealers these animals soon became rare. Tn later years pies,

wallabies and goats provided the principal animal foods used on the island,

Flinders in 1802, and Sutherland in 1819, both noticed the amazing abundance of

emu and kangaroo at the eastern end of the island, in contrast with Bull (speaking

of the year 1836) and Leigh (of 1487) who both comment on the absenee of these

creatures,

The home-made game-piece from Antechamber Bay suggests that for the

refugees and sealers, the tedium of life in their isolated home was made easier by

means of games.

The flint implements indicate that their Tasmanian women partners had not

yet become entirely divorced from their old culture.

The implements themselves are of considerable interest.

Tn April, 1986, at the request of the Royal Society of Tasmania, the writer

made a visit to Tasmania and examined and reported on Lhe rock carvings fount

by Mr. A. lL. Meston (1934) at Mount Cameron West. He was accompanied on

his visit by the Director of the Tasmanian Museum, Dr. Pearson, and by Mr.

A, L, Meston, A passing visit was made to Roeky Cape Cave where, some years

ago, a narrow trench had been cut by Mr. Meston theongh (he occupational debris,

toa depth of more than two metres, Tt was then noticed that flints and implements

from the basal strata of the cave were strongly patinated, while those from the

superficial layers were not so affeeted, When the collections made by Mr. Meston

in the Rocky Cape section were separated, arbitrarily, into a patinated and non-

patinated series, it was apparent that important. typological differences were pre-

sent in the two. It should be emphasized that these preliminary indieations should

be tested by a carefully controlled excavation of the considerable portions of the

site which remain undisturbed,

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND 35

A few months later while on a visit to Oxford, Dr. Henry Balfour informed

the writer that some time previously he had determined the presence of two typo-

logically distinct series among the Tasmanian implements in the Oxford Museum

collections. Thus it is evident that when careful excavations are made, consider-

able light will be thrown on the development of Tasmanian implement cultures,

Ce =

‘Ze

N.B.T.

3

Text fig. 1-3. 1. Three views of a flint implement from Antechamber Bay ( 87). 2. Mlint

implement from N.W. Tasmania (x 4). 3, Portion of a hand-made domino piece ( X 45),

36 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

Implements of the Old Tasmanian series are typically made from flakes which

have been struck off from an unprepared platform. These flakes are trimmed

around the edges before and during nae, and while often of highly characteristic

form generally conform to the shape of the primary flake from which they were

made, Specialized implements of the Newer Tasmanian series are typically made

by striking off a flake from a prepared striking platform. The angle between that

portion of the striking platform retained on the implement and the flake surface

produced, is an obtuse one, usually tending to about 110°. Sueh implements are

characteristic in form, Text fig. 1 shows a typical flint implement from Ante.

chamber Bay, Kangaroo Island. It may be compared with fiz. 2, an example

from North Western Tasmania (.A.23192 in fhe 8. Anst. Museum). Both of these

implements agree in possessing the characters peculiar to the Newer Tasmanian

series, That the implements made by Tasmanian women in the period shortly

after about 1819, were of this specialized form, is therefore of some interest and

importanee to our study of Tasmanian culture sequences, since it helps to confirm

what we have already noticed in Tasmania.

TRACES OF A TASMANIAN VOCABULARY BURVIVING ON KANGAROO [SLAND,

Joseph, a grandson of Betty. the Tasmanian woman, 4 man of perhaps 80

years of age, was interrogated for a short. while during our stav at Penneshaw.

He complained of loss of memory and it was difficult for him to talk for lone on

one subject, but it was felt that much could have been learned if time had per-

mitted, The following words were written down in a phonetic system in use at

the University of Adelaide and described by Tindale (1935). They were clearly

enunciated by Joseph, who remarked that they were taught to him by his erand-

mother, who had told him that they were in the ‘Hobart Town Lunguage’’,

‘nina tu: napari you nncerstand,

lil tu:‘napari do you understand ?

“bulunta wo straight ahead,

maibir, ma:bier oy around.

The material is seanty, Two of the words have a nautieal flavour. ‘The pro-

nonu |‘nina| appears lo be the same as the neena — you, recorded for one of the

Sonthern tribes of Tasmania. According to another grandsou of Betty the two

families at one time used many words which were not understood by other people,

but the children had forgotten most of them,

SUMMARY.

Some details are given of the Tasmanian women who formerly lived on Kan-

garoo Island together with some notes on the mixed blood survivors,

TINDALE—TASMANIAN ABORIGINES ON KANGAROO ISLAND 37

Some stone implements, made on Kangaroo Island by the Tasmanian women,

are deseribed together with an account of the circumstances in which they were

round.

Several words, believed to be of Tasmanian origin, are transcribed in phonetic

form.

REFERENCES CITED.

Moore, H. P. (1925) : Notes on the early settlers in South Australia prior to 1836.

Roy. Geog. Soc. of Australia, South Aust. Branch, Proceedings, xxv, pp. 81-

135.

Berry, R. J. A. (1907) : Living deseendant of an extinet (Tasmanian) race. Proc.

Roy. Soc. of Victoria, xx (1.8.), pp. 1-20, pL. i, with bibliography.

Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, B. G. (1981) : Traces of an extinet aboriginal popu-

lation on Kangaroo Island. Records of the 8S. Aust. Museum, iv (3), pp. 279-

289, figs. 1-11.

Leigh, W. H. (1839) : Reconnoitering Voyages, travels and adventures in the new

colonies of South Australia, London,

South Australian Parliamentary Papers, 1866, No. 8, p. 12.

Bull, J. W. (1878) : Karly experiences of colonial life in South Australia, Adelaide.

Tolmer, A, (1882): Reminiscences of an adventurous and chequered career al

home and in the antipodes. 2 vols., London.

Hallack, E. H. (1905): Kangaroo Island. Adelaide,

Tindale, N. B. (1933): Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., wii, pp. 130-142.

Howehin, W. (1934); Stone implements of the Adelaide tribe of aborigines now

extinct, Adelaide,

Meston, A. L. (1984); Aboriginal rock-carvings in Tasmania. Antiquity, 8, pp.

179-184, pl. 1-4.

Tindale, N, B. (1935) : Legend of Waijungari, Jaralde Tribe, Lake Alexandrina,

South Australia; and the phonetic system employed in its transcription.

Records of the 8S, Aust. Museum, v (3), pp. 26-274.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LILI.

Fig. 1. Leigh's encounter with the Tasmanian women of Kangaroo Island in 1836

(atter Leigh).

Bie. 2, Remains from Antechamber Bay, a-c. Flint implements, d. Turbo undu-

latus shell, e. gaming piece, f. base of a glass bottle.

Ree. S.A. Museum Vor, Vie Poate IV,

BVIDENCES OF EARLY NINETEENTH CENTURY OCCUPATION OF

KANGAROO ISLAND.

RELATIONSHIP OF THE EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND

CULTURE WITH CULTURES OF AUSTRALIA

TASMANIA AND MALAYA

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.SC., ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

An account of some observations on the former human occupation of Kangaroo

Island was given by Tindale and Maegraith (1931). At the time of its first discovery

by Matthew Flinders in 1802, this island was devoid of inhabitants. Additional details

regarding this occupation have come under notice in recent years and there has been

opportunity for comparison with similar industries on the adjacent mainland; other

discoveries have been made on mainland sites, which appear to bear some relation to

the island one. The valued opportunity presented by the receipt in 1936 of a Carnegie

Travelling Grant has enabled the writer to discuss the problem of these implements

with research workers in Europe and America and also to see examples of similar

objects, characteristic of the Upper Palaeolithic of Malaya, in the Royal Colonial

Institute, Amsterdam, and at the Peabody Museum, Harvard University. The

following observations summarize the results obtained by several field workers.

RELATIONSHIP or rae EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND

CULTURE wrruy CULTURES or AUSTRALIA

TASMANIA ann MALAYA

By NORMAN B. 'TINDALE, B.Sc., Erunonocisr, SourH AusrraLian Museum,

Fig, 1-16.

INTRODUCTION.

AN account of some observations on the former human occupation of Kangaroo

Island was given by Tindale and Maegraith (1931). At the time of its first

discovery by Matthew Flinders m 1802, this island was devoid of inhabitants.

Additional details regarding this occupation have come under notice in recent

years and there has been opportunity for comparison with similar industries on

the adjacent mainland ; other discoveries have been made on mainland sites, whieh

appear to bear some relation to the island one. The valued opportunity presented

by the receipt in 1936 of a Carnegie Travelling Grant has enabled the writer to

discuss the problem of these implements with researeh workers in Europe and

America and also to see exaiuples of similar objects, characteristic of the Upper

Palacolithie of Malaya, in the Royal Colonial Institute, Amsterdam, and at the

Peabody Museum, Harvard University. The following observations summarize

the results obtained by several field workers.

ln Deeember-January 1931-32, Mr. F. J. Hall accompanied the writer to the

south coast of Kangaroo Island in order to examine Mount Taylor Cave. Although

this cave proved to be unproductive implements of the Kangaroo Island Industry

were found on surtace sites at several other places, and in situ in estuarine silts

at Rainy Creek. Ln December, 1934, a party of naturalists visited Flinders Chase

at the western end of Kangaroo Island. Soine general notes on the physiography

of the island were published by Tindale, Fenner aud Hall (1935), and several

additional sites for implements were found.

Mr. H. M. Cooper, who has extensively and systematically colleeted umple-

ments on maimland sites, was requested to search for implement sites on Kangaroo

Island, aid in the years 1935-37 tound traces of ocenpation at no fewer than forty-

seyen sites of {his ancient native Industry; more than forty of these oeeurrences

Were previously nouoted, Ot the implements brought logether by Mr, Cooper,

half have been donated to the South Australian Museum, and are stucied herein,

40 REcorpDs oF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The implements found below a marine horizon, at Fulham, South Australia,

by Capt. 8. A. White, were recently lent by their discoverer for stucy.

The area in the vicinity of Fulham where White (1919) found these imple-

ments, hus been under examination for several years by a committee of members

of the Anthropological Society of South Australia, Some shallow bores have been

drilled to depths of 2-5 metres in search of information. The aetual site exedyatec

by White is now an artificial lake and is inaccessible, but bores drilled within the

nearest practical distance lave passed Wirough the tenacious blae-black elay ol a

lake bed and then the marine horizon veeorded by White and by Llowehin (119).

There has been no opportunily to test (he Pulham site by excavation, but the

presence of consolidated matrix adhering lo one of the original unplement spee-

mens which, under the microscopy, sees identical with that established by our

bores as being below the lacustrine horizon, is a useful piece of evidence. These

implements are figured in this paper.

This year Mr. Cooper aud the writer made a close study of a recently ploughed

surface site on the western portion ot Section 562, Hundred of Noarlunga, on the

shoulder of the hill just below Hallett Cove Railway Station, linplenients of F'al-

ham type were found, which had been buried in the surtace layers of tle soll The

implements Were apparently confined to au area of some 10 acres on w& site where

cealeareous clay and sand is present on the flat top of a bill, ood debris and other

signs of recent occupation were lacking, Three small superimposed arens of

recent cumpsite with black ash soil, each forming a mound, are present, wid du the

best preserved of these abundant food debris and a few implements of the so-called

~*Murundian’’ type were guthered.

Howchin (1954) published a most interesting account of the ty poloyy of

Huplements Form in the area once occupied by the Adelaide tribe. It is the

result of many years spert in collecting specimens [rom surlave sites in the eoustal

distrieta of South Australia near Adelaide, Howehin ts vareful lo indicate that

the implements are all archaeological and that they are not necessarily the iinple-

ments belonging to the historieal Kaurna, or Adelaide tribe, A sad commentary

on the rapidity with which the aborigines disappeared is the Fact that, despite

aclive search and enquiry, nol one authentic stone implement, inounted for use

by a member of the Kaurna tribe, has yet been found in any eblimovraphic collec-

tion, either in Australia or abroad.

Howehin deals with the implements of all peoples who may have lived in the

Adelaide area, without reference to any cultural sequences whieh way cl inately

be established,

It is One of the purposes of the discussion concluding (his paper ta iudieate

the probability that, aear Adelaide, there may be welbdefined sequences, simile

to those established by Hale and Tindale (1980) for the Lower Murray Valley.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 41

THE KANGAROO ISLAND INDUSTRY.

New Locaurry Recorps ANp A DuseriptTion or tite Rarny Creek Sirs.

During 1931-22 additional implements of this industry were found by F. J.

Hall and the writer at Hawks Nest, principally on some areas of ti-tree sernb which

IMPLEMENT SITES on

KARTA on KANGAROO ISLAND.

Omiles 16

gKilormetves

e Bay of Shoals

we hngscole

hi

Fig. 1. Sketeh map of Karte or Kangarou Islanil, to show implement sites.

had been cleared and ploughed since our earlier visit. Other sites (Text fig. 1)

were:

(a) Lig Timber, 1-6 kilometres east of ‘‘ Fords’’.

(b) Mount Pleasant, on eroded laterite-vravel-coyvered vround,

(a) Rleanor Station.

(d) Kaiwarra or Mownt Pleasant Station, 3-2 kilometres 8. of the station on

the higher bank of Eleanor River,

(c) Redbank Station, near the southern gate on the road to Hawks Nest, on

eroded laterite soil,

(f) Cygnet Rwwer, evoded from soil near the bridge on the Penneshaw road.

(9) Rainy Creek, near the homestead of Eleanor Station, At this site a wash-

out, caused by the artificial cutting of a ditch across a flat, has eaused the stream

to cut toa depth of some two metres into a series of clay beds and silts; apparently

of estuarine origin (Text fig. 2-4). These are situated at an estimated height of

five-six metres above present, sea level. he silts in this basin seem to have acen-

42 Recokbs oF THE S.A, MUSEUM

mulated behind a bar of calcareous dune limestone which marks the seaward

margin of a former shoreline of Vivonne Bay into which the waters of Rainy

Creek once flowed, At present its waters are captured by the Eleanor River which,

atter flowing for 0:3 kilometre tiether west parallel to the shore-line, turns south

Wylit Y,

s My

eff

ee zy ane

Sandy clay

yellow c lay

pt I Mne ye pet ot ‘

“7 we ™ma a.

ay =i "en. °f <onseg |

Ie aed doy.

+ implements ___100 netres "Mes. aS |

implements

f iv bedded hays

,unconsolidated sands

of constal dunes

5

ree rnoullt of — > <=

,/ELEANOR woe - a tare veule ~

re Ce foe ee a ee

A MARINE CARCA)SHELL BEDS |:

ep , t the psht : q pees tS eprr &

N é-~%

EST RIAL Limes oy ES “it i ae rad 2be Pa

Fig, 2-5, 2, Sketeh plan of the vicinity of the junction of Eleanor River and Rainy Creek,

Kangaroo Tshind, 3, Sketeh seetion, ueroas Rainy Creek, 4. Knlarged section of clay beds, eon-

(aining dnplements, Rainy Creek, 5, Natural seetion revented along banks of Eleanor Riyer in its

passage through the coastal saud dunes,

and breaks ont through the present coastal dunes, Tn doing so it has eut through

some four metres of a consolidated limestone sea floor in which one of the dominant

shells is the locally extinet Arca (Anadara) trapezia (see sketch section, Text fix.

4). his sea floor overhes an old caleareous land surtace whieh is exposed at about

present sea level along the river banks and on the foreshore.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 43

The clay beds exposed at Rainy Creek (Text fig. 4) evonsist of a dark clay

(forining the lowest layer visible in the section) upon which there rests a metre

thickness of yellow clay, followed by 0-5 metres of light yellow sandy clay, above

which is the dark sandy soil of the present day surface.

Implements were present in the yellow clay ata depth of 1-3 metres and in

the sandy clay at 0-8 metres from the surface, while seventeen others including

both hammerstones and eutting implements were found on the floor of the washout

where they had been deposited by the erosion of the clay, No traces of food remains

or ash huve been preserved. Samples of yellow clay when washed and examined

microscopically unfortunately do not seem to furnish any direct indications of

the associated fauna,

Other implements are present on the weathered surface of the calcareous dune

limestone near its junetion with the old quartzites east of Rainy Creel as is also

indicated in the section,

The local physiographic conditions seem to indieate the possibility that the

élays were laid down during a period when the heds were at or near sea level,

whereas at present Rainy Creek is engaged in entrenching itself, to a shallow

depth, in its own sediments.

Estimations of! the area over which the implements were distributed suggest

that the twenty-four implements recovered were derived from an area of 275

square metres by the natural washing of some five hundred enbie metres of clay.

During the 1934 visit to Kangaroo Island a few further implement sites were

noticed.

(h) At Roehky River une excellent exaniple of a hanmierstone was pielked wp

by the caretaker of the Flora and Panna Reserve (Mr, H, Hausen) near the top

of the old limestane clune immediately south of the Station house, Up to the

present no examples have been turned up by the plongh on the neighbouring fats,

which have yielded bones of maiy recently extinct manuals,

(4) About two kilometres downstream from the Station the Rouky River sud-

denly entreuches itself and drops toto a rather deep limestone gorge excavated in

dune lioestones, On its northern bank the steep walls ave hollowed, im places, into

shallow eaves. One of these is sufficiently large lo serve as a shelter, A siuall

occupational horizon had been discovered lere a few years ago by one of the

selllers, who had been iu search of guano, The whole of the floor debris had been

silted and the finer dust and ash packed into sacks, Several saeks full of the sifted

earth had not been tuken away, The saeks were old and now decayed. The coarse

rejectamenta of the sieve yielded Turbo undulatus shells, a few iarsuptal bores

aid some vhareoal, but no implements were present, ‘Che paucity of the remaiis

44 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

and their disturbed condition prevented our arriving at any certain conelttsions

as to their significance.

(j) At North-ELast River, on the flat just above its junction with North-West

River, a hammerstone was found on the surface.

(4) On hillside above Penneshaw School house.

(lj) Between 1935 and 1937 Messrs. H. M. Cooper and R, Peake were able to

clevote several holiday periods to a search for additional sites on Kangaroo Island.

They collectedl numerous examples of the implements and have donated the first

set of their finds to the South Australian Museum. The localities are too numerous

for detailed deseription but the Cooper collection number and name of the sile

will be given below together with summaries of their field notes:

Anxious Bay (83). Waterworn pebbles from this locality probably furnished the

stone used in making many implements,

Muston (84). Property of E. Davies; from cultivated land running down to a

fresh water lagoon, dry in summer,

Muston (85). Property of W. Davies, on cultivated ground near a lagoon on iron-

stone rubble country. Several Port Lincoln Oyster (Ostrea simuata) shells

were also present.

Pennington Bay (86),

Salt Lagoon (87). East side of American River, Muston, Near a small lagoon

on cleared but uncultivated land, on property of BF. Buick. One quartzite

implement was enclosed in w bloek of loose limestone; limestone mdges sur-

rounding the lake yielded no implements.

Llog Bay River Station (89). On cultivated land sloping to the creek.

Deep Creek, Eastern Cove (91). On raised flat of cultivated ground adjoining

(he creek. Coastal sandhills in the vicinity yielded no sites.

Red Banks, Nepean Bay (92). Behind the coastal sandhills and inland on the

ironstone rubble country.

Taylor Lagoon (93).

Cape Hart (96). On wind-swept high limestone ground 0-4 kilometre worth-east

of the sealer’s hut site where Tasmaiian iniplements were found ; one trimmed

core was of Cape Willoughby granite.

Hog Bay River (97). Site on the cliffs above the river mouth.

Creek Bay Station (98), Cultivated area on bank of creek running into Lashmar

Lagoon, The largest specimen so far discovered, a chopping implemeni

weighing 108 oz. was found on this site,

Wallers (100), Three kilometres cust of Pennington Bay.

Bay of Shoals (101). An extensive site on cultivated land on the property of W.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 45

Turner. Many implements occurred on limestone ridges associated with an

extensive swamp.

Discovery Lagoon (102). Eleven kilometres S.W. of Kingseote. This must have

been a well oceupied area. Five inspections resnited in the largest collection

of chopping tmplements found on any site in this list,

Ten Mile Lagoon (103). Five kilometres W. of Kineseote.

Pennington Bay (120). Six kilometres east of the Bay,

Muston-Red Banks road (121).

Thomas Station, Point Morrison (122).

Muston Jetty (123).

Flour Cask Bay (156), south-west of Salt Lagoon. Two hammerstones found on

wind-swept limestone ridges together with many shells. The eoastal sandhills

themselves were examined, without result, for three kilometres to the west-

ward and more than one kilometre eastward of the Australian Salt Cowpany's

Lake.

Ilo Bay River, above mouth (157). Another site on the banks of Hog Bay River

which, together with sites 98, 101, 102 constitute the most important localities

found.

East. of Hog Bay River (158).

S.W. of Point Tinline towards Cape Linois (159). One large flint flake, one

hammerstone and a few unworked quartzite chippings in the sandhills.

Lagoon inland from D’Estree Bay (ten kilometres S.W. of Kingscote-Muston

turnoff (160). On eultivated ground.

Kast of White Lagoon (161). A ridge of cultivated vround revealed implements.

Buleara Station (162), Some very much worn hammerstones.

Hawk Nest Station (163).

Kaiwarra Station (164).

Eleanor River (165).

Karatta Station (166).

Sou’West River (167).

Cape Borda Road (168), Ten kilometres 8. of Stokes Bay turnoff. A single

chopping implement in scrub-covered ironstone gravel country.

Western River (169). One hammerstone behind the coast sandhills: on the steep

incline above the high cliffs were several chopping implements and stone flakes.

Middle River (170). Although there are extensive coastal sandhills here, results

were negative, One excellent hammerstone was collected a short distance

inland.

Stokes Bay (171). On cultivated ground,

Smith Bay (172),

46 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Kmu Bay, 1:3 kilometres inland from the seashore (173),

Wisanger (174). Near the Gap,

Cyenet River-Gap Road (175),

Lagoon N.W. of Cvenet River Post. Office (176),

Gum Creek, near Cygnet River (177). Light sandy soil on its hanks yielded

implements,

Near Bay of Shoals (178). On Bell’s homestead.

Railway, four kilometres inland from Muston Post Office (179).

Creek on property of C, Buick, American River (180).

The distribution of the above localities on the map of Kangaroo Island seems

to indicate a concentration of the occupation on the eastern half of the island, but it

must be remembered that the eastern end has been subjected toafar greater aniount

of clearing than the western extremity, and it is generally in ploughed ground and

occasionally in disturbed and driftine sandy ground, that finds have been made,

The western end of the island is still largely unecleared and uncultivated and a

large area is enclosed within the Flinders Chase Flora and Fauna Reserve, and is

thus not subjected to clearing operations. Mr. Cooper writes: ‘On present im-

perfect information it could perhaps be suggested that the more eastern portions

of the island carried the bulk of the population—the more open nature of the

country, warmer climate and lower rainfall, together with the abundanee of

lagoons and swamps would tend to substantiate this; the rugged and damper

western end was used perhaps more for hunting expeditions. However, later

working of the land in the latter localities may disprove such an opinion.”’

Only two sites have yielded information revarding the foods of the island

people, At Muston a few Port Lincoln Oyster (Os/rea sinuata) shells may have

heen ones left by these people, while in a wind-blown area on site 120, east of

Pennington Bay, where the specimens often have a thin coating of white lime

deposit, ‘fragments of emn eggshells, also oyster, mussel and limpet shells were

obtained as well as a few choppers and hammerstones’’. According to '' Mr. dames

Waller, another old resident of Kangaroo Island, this drift) commenced about

forty years ago after u period of clearing ond burning’’.

IMPLEMENTS OF THE KANGAROO ISLAND INDUSTRY.

In the light of the argmented collection of implements brought together since

1931 it is possible to make some detailed observations.

The dominant implement of the eulture is undanhtedly the elongate pebble-

core implement, hammer-flaked along one margin, whieh was deseribed by Tindale

and Maegraith (1931, p. 281) as ‘‘elongate-oval trimmed eore’’ (/.c. fig. 9).

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 47

Among the well-worked implements they are second only to the hammerstones in

abundance.

These elongate-oval trimmed cores have become known to archaeologists in

South-Eastern Asia as ‘‘Sumatra-type implements’’, for in Sumatra and the

Malay Peninsula they occur in several sites considered to belong to the Upper

Palaeolithic. Sites of this type are described by Kiipper (1930) and others.

20

15

a Pa

. 0

T = E

= tid

45 \ {8

a \ a

| = =

= < 6 7

FE a

5 / a <

/ = = 4

} — >

¢ o ”

/ FE = x

s Oo Ss ‘

/ ad x \ /\

of Gx i eH se 4 48 | _/ eo \ so go 80 \/ 90\

Fig. 6-7. 6, Weights of 96 swmatra implements from Kangaroo Island. 7, Length-breadth

index of 57 sumatra implements from Kangaroo Island.

Examples of this type of implement from Malaya have been examined by the

writer at the Royal Colonial Institute Musenm, Amsterdam, and at the Peabody

Museum, Harvard. Specimens from Kangaroo Island seem to be morphologically

indistinguishable from these, and in this paper it is proposed to use therefore the

term ‘‘Sumatra type implement’’ or briefly ‘‘sumatra’’ as a convenient name for

the implement.

An analysis of the dimensions and weights of nearly one hundred examples

of Kangaroo Island sumatra implements, reveals the presence of two sub-types

which may be arbitrarily called ‘‘heavy’’ and ‘‘light’’,

48 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

When the weight in ounces is plotted, using intervals of 4 oz., the eraph (‘Tex!

fiz. 6) indicates [hat peaks oceur at 20 oz, and d4 02. If the trough between these

two (at 22 0z.) is taken as a dividing line if will be noticed that, with one exception

(15 em.), all “light sumatrva’’ are 14 em, or under in length while all “heavy

(Br 100)...

an FT length indicates

that although there is considerable variation it! proportions, as shown by the range

of indices from 45-90, yet the natives, uneonscionsly or otherwise, strove to make

implements of the proportions indicated by a length-breadth mdex of about 60

(Text fig, 7). ‘Heavy’! and “light sumatra’’ implements have approximately

the same range in their proportions.

Tt would be of considerable interest to compare these results with those for

the same type of implement found in Malaya, while the application of acenrate

statistical data to series of implements in various areas, might give significant,

elnes as to their origin and uses.

The diseovery of further examples of the discoidal ‘implements called

trimmed flakes’? by Tindale and Maegraith (19381, p. 281, fig. 6-7) has enabled a

clearer idea to be obtained of the form and method of manufacture of these highly

characteristic implements. If is now evident that there are fundamental differ-

ences between them and the so-called arapia implements of Central Anstralia, and

thal they should not have been classified together.

sumutra’’ are 15 em. or over. The length-breadth index

Examination of a long series sugeests that, while all the Kangaroo Islani

examples are either made from cores or from pebbles broken at random, all trie

arapia agree with the type exawple from Wndala, Central Anstralia (Ie. £10) 10

being struck off as flakes from prepared core. A hlow directed against a prepared

platform detached a characteristically shaped Hake, Teehnieally the qrapra is a

mieh more advanced implement than the implements found on the island,

The Kangaroo Island core implements which superficially resemble the arajna

are thus trimmed from pieces of broken stone which approximate to the desired

form, A few exainples are really made from what are technieally flakes, but as

they do not seem to be obtained by any specialized techniqne the specimens shonid

be recorded as in the main a ‘‘eore industry’.

I+ seems convenient that the Kanearoo Island implements of this type should

be known by a different name from the arapia and it is proposed to use for them the

term karta, a native word, belonging to the wainland Raminjeri tribe, meaning

Kangaroo Island, The example deseribed and figured by Tindale and Maegraith

(1981, p, 281, fig. 6) may be regarded as the type example.

Mr. H. M. Cooper has found that on most sites Karta are not as common as the

larger sumatra implements, At Hawks Nest, during the 1931 survey they proved

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 49

(0 be somewhat more abundant, but the significance of this apparent difference is

Hot yet known.

Trimmed cores of the horse-hool?? type deseribed by Tindale and Maegraith

(1991, p. 281, fiz. 8) continue to he found in considerable numbers and it is evident,

(hat they must have functioned as implements. All are characterized by closely

set stepped, secondary flaking sears margining the right-angled eutting edge.

Fig. 8. Swmatratike implement from Baleoracana Creek, South Australia (X 54).

In addition to the above mentioned implements and hundreds of hammer-

atones, a great many simple flakes, frequently of white quartz, are found in asso-

ciation with the implements. Simple irregular flakes of quartzite are also abun-

dant. Oceasional examples of white quartz seem to have been shaped to a definite

form, approaching some of the crude discoidal stone implements characteristic

of the Tartangan Industry deseribed by Hale and Tindale (1930, p. 167, figs. 21,

29, etc.). However, quartz is a refractory material and it is difficult to compare

them with certainty; detailed description of the type may therefore be reserved

for the future, when examples made in a more satisfactory material may be

discovered.

Before discussing the Kangaroo island industry and its significance it is

proposed to mention several series of implements from the mainland,

50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SUMATRA-LIKE IMPLEMENTS FROM BALCORACANA CREEK,

8. AUSTRALIA.

During a recent visit to the Flinders Ranges, Mr. H. M. Cooper found a site

on a rock-strewn ridge, on the north bank of Baleoracana Creek at Red Banks (his

site No. 209), where two sumatra-like implements occurred. One of these weighed

16 oz. and measured 15 x 8 em. It is figured herein (Text fig. 8). The other was

smaller and only weighed 6 oz.

On the opposite bank of the creek, within 0-5 kilometre, there is a native site

(his No. 144) where many pir7t implements may be found.

After this paper had been prepared for press Mr. Cooper revisited the Flin-

ders Range and found eight additional sites where implements resembling those

from Kangaroo Island and Fulham oceur. At Mount Chambers Creek (183) near

a site possessing many rock carvings karfta, horsehoof implements and sumatras

occur alone. At several other waters Pirrian types of implements oecur with them,

e.g. Emu Springs (136), while at Yappala Lagoon (187) and Little Bunkers (195)

the only other implements seem to have a Murundian facies.

IMPLEMENTS FROM TASMANIA RESEMBLING THOSE FROM

KANGAROO ISLAND.

For several years the writer has been in communication with Mr. Adrian C.

Smith, of St. Helens, Tasmania, who has kindly presented to the South Australian

Museum many interesting Tasmanian implements. In a recent consignment he

sent a series of large specimens including several which appeared to be comparable

with the swmatra implement, the karta and even the ‘‘horsehoof’’ core of Kangaroo

Island.

Text fig. 9 shows a karta-like implement of quartzite from St. Helens, weighing

9 oz.

The average of the weights of three sumatra-like examples is 16 oz. and the

length/breadth index is 72. Text fig. 10 shows an example from St. Helens

weighing 11 oz. and with a L/B index of 71. The original pebble from which this

was made is more angular than are those from Kangaroo Island, but the method

of manufacture is similar.

An examination of the fine collection of Tasmanian implements belonging to

Mr. A. L. Meston at Launceston, suggests that karta and swmatra-like implements

are found in several places in Tasmania, but that relatively little attention has been

paid to them. The smaller and finer implements are of considerable interest to

collectors and in the past the large ones seem to have been passed over. Another

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 51

explanation may be considered. In a letter dated 13th Jane, 1987, Mev. Advian

Smith writes :

“The large stones of pebble type were not, as faras | remember, found on the

ocean beaches where the small flake types were found. The one from ‘St, Columba

Fig. Y-1. Narta and swnatre-lke inplements trom St. Helens, Tasmania (> 4),

Malls’ was found in the heart of the bush, in myrtle and fern eourtry., ‘The

olhers were found on Gevrges Bay on the golf Lolks,’’

It may be suggested therefore that these relies may oeeur on siles where the

ordinary Tasmanian implements are not present.

52 RECORDS OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

IMPLEMENTS OF THE FULHAM SITE DESCRIBED BY 8. A. WHITE.

Fig. 11 gives a generalized section of the beds associated with the implement

site at Fulham described by White (1919) and Howchin (1919). It is based partly

on their notes, partly on information provided by bores drilled by members of the

Anthropological Society of South Australia in 1933-1934, and also on the writer’s

Tuland ope

Red Sandhills fo

at

Fulharn

Murundion

se, Bent Pirrian Industry Site

Fulham Indujstry take bed

sarees Marine Beds oF

tiresrasre ease { Dactonia, §iPHe

Qld land surface

ny

Smaseaue

1 Kilometre

) nile 4

Fig. 11. Section at Fulham, South Australia, indicating in generalized form the succession

of beds and relationships of implement sites.

own observations. It is not proposed to discuss in detail the history of the site as

revealed by the bore sections, for the results obtained are sufficiently interesting to

warrant separate description. Suffice to state that bores at ‘‘A’’, at 10 yards 8. of

‘A’? and at ‘‘B’’ seem to confirm the first two metres of White’s section while

deeper bores, at ‘‘ Between B and ©”’ and at ‘‘E’’, ‘‘F’’, “‘K’’ and ‘‘M”’’, situated

at distances of respectively 150, 375, 600, 1,075 and 1,300 yards in an easterly

direction indicate the continuance of the blue-black clay of the estuarine lake-bed

and also suggest the presence of an old land surface at the level indicated by White.

The implements ascribed to this old land surface comprise well worn hammer-

stones of two types (fig. 12 and fig 13), made from quartzite pebbles and several

core-like implements, also of two types. The latter are similar to the karta and the

horsehoof cores of Kangaroo Island and are made of quartzites. Fig. 14 shows

an example of the karta 6-8 em. in diameter. In manufacture it has been broken

off from a large block of quartzite, apparently as a random ‘‘flake’’, and bears

evidence of much marginal secondary flaking. Fig. 15 shows an example of the

larger ‘‘horsehoof’’ core type of implement. It is 9 em. in greatest diameter and

6 em. in height, and is made of a fine-grained quartzite.

One of the core implements has attached to it part of the consolidated matrix

of ‘‘River Sand with calcareous concretions’’ in which it was once imbedded.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 53

Portions of this matrix, when mounted and examined under the microscope, com-

pare closely with samples from the same bed.

During the study of the Fulham site it was observed that a small surface area

of campsite containing abundant pirri together with other implements of a rich

i

tp Ta SKN

ne a th (h

ue

a

MMH aN

»\ ah i ‘ th

N hi \ " \

Na NA ik

oN

\ WN N\

\

Kig, 12-15. Implements from buried land surface at Pulham, South Australia, 12-13, Ham-

merstones, showing marked marginal wear, 14, Karta-like implement. 15, Horsehoof core (X 14)

54 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

stone industry, lay beside the line of section indicated by the bores. It was possible

to demonstrate that this campsite was formed on top of the blue-black clay of the

estuarine lake. It is thus later in date than the Fulham industry. Careful collect-

ing brought to light the following implements :

Pirri 24; small crescents 6; small chipped-back knives 3 ; discoidal adze stones,

prepared from flakes struck from prepared platforms 6; irregular adze stones 14;

large pirri-like flakes 3; large cores 1; hammerstone 1.

The position of this site is indicated by the words ‘‘Pirrian Industry Site’’

on the general section of the Fulham area (fig. 11).

IMPLEMENTS AT HALLETT COVE SIMILAR TO THOSE OF THE

FULHAM INDUSTRY.

The Hallett Cove site is located on the western half of Section 562, Hundred

of Noarlunga, and is situated a few hundred metres south-west of the Cove Rail-

way Station, on a flat terrace forming the top of the cliffs. It is at a general height

of sixty metres (200 feet) above sea level (Text fig.16). Here an old soil of

calcareous sandy nature is preserved over an area of some ten acres. Recent

ploughing of the surface has revealed that large implements of the types present

“Gal <<

Cave (266 ft)

Fulham Industry Mauvundian site

Fig. 16. Plan and sketch section at Hallett Cove, to show an implement site of the Fulham

industry overlain by a newer series.

at Fulham, namely kurta-like implements, and ‘‘horsehoof’’ cores together with

one or two doubtful sumatra implements and some hammerstones are present in

the surface layer over the area where this special type of soil occurs. They are

not associated with shells, or other signs of recent occupation.

Three small patches of black soil composed of ashes, abundant shell and other

food remains and a poorly developed adze-stone industry are present on the

southern side of this area and rest on the surface of this soil. The food remains of

this upper stratum consist of :

TINDALE—EXxTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 55

Shells Turbo undulatus (dominant).

Monodonta odontis

Nerita melanotragus

Mactra pura

Haliotus sp. fragments only.

Crab Ozius truncatus

Bird Dromaeus novachollandiae, ege shells of emu.

Mammal Macropus sp. fragments of bones.

These surface sites seem to be comparable with sites of recent occupation

which are elsewhere in South Australia called Murundian.

DISCUSSION,

In the preceding pages some records of stone implement sites on Kangaroo

(sland, on the Australiin mainland, and in Tasmania, have been set out, while

several types of implements have been described and figured.

It is proposed now to speculate on the significance of these occurrences and

to discuss some tentative correlatious.

The systematic study of Australian implement cultures is only just beginning

and it is eertain that many of our conclusions will be modified in the light of new

discoveries. Pressing’ desiderata are the systematic exploration of all rock

shelter and other sites where it may be possible to find evidence of successions.

In particular it seems highly desirable that preliminary conclusions here arrived

al regarding the sequence in Tasmania should be tested by excavation of one of

the roek-shelters present on the north coast of Tasmania.

At Tartanga and Deyou Downs a sequence has been noted which has enabled

tentative correlations 10 be made with surface sites in other parts of South Aus-

tralia. In the accompanying table is set out in diagrammatic form the additional

details brought out by a study of the Kangaroo Island Industry and the closely

related Kulham ludustry.

Ai Kangaroo Island we seem to have an old culture which has connections

with the Upper Palaeolithic of Malaya and may thus represent the type of mi-

plement culture which the first visitors to Australia brought with them, These

people may have been the ancestors of the Tasmanian aborigines; for like those

people they did not succeed in carrying the dog with them to Kangaroo Island.

The presence of simular implements in Tasmania and on some mainland sites lends

colour to this suggestion.

56

TENTATIVE

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

AUSTRALIA AND TASMANTA.

CORRELATION OF SOME IMPLEMENT SERIES IN

KANGAROO

MURRAY RIVER. ISLAND. FULHAM. HALLETT COVE.| TASMANTA.

NEWER

ae TASMANIAN | MURUNDIAN- | MURUNDIAN- | NEWER

¢ INDUSTRY LIKE SITES LIKE SITE. TASMANIAN

¢. A.D, 1819 (on present shore INDUSTRY

dunes). (implements struck

from. specially pre-

MUDUKIAN 7 _|pared cores).

INDUSTRY. Period of

__ no

PIRRIAN occupation. PIRRIAN

INDUSTRY TNDUSTRY. | _____ fasstnenntntnntntntnntnnnntnnnntnn

Higher river de- pectin ba iy

positing series of Kangaroo I. LACUSTRINE

silts over Tartan- | mdustryatRainy | CONDITIONS. (Flake industry ;

gan beds; these Creek epparently implements made

bel - Jevel | #8sociated with a from random

Be i M iameiianiok raised beach. ESTUARINE flakes).

taking place. and fae

TARTANGAN

INDUSTRY

associated with ex-

tinct species of

Unio.

KANGAROO

ISLAND

INDUSTRY

(sumatra, karta,

and horse - hoof

implements) .

old land surface.

FULHAM

INDUSTRY.

(karta and horse-

hoof implements).

FULHAM

INDUSTRY

(karta and horse-

hoof implements,

some _ doubtful

sumatra — imple-

ments).

(surface finds of

crude sumatra

type implements,

karta, and horse-

hoof implements).

The almost unvarying uniformity of implement type in over fifty campsites

on Kangaroo Island, suggests that this industry stagnated on the Island until

the inhabitants became extinct; the swmatra apparently remained the dominant

implement.

In the Fulham Industry, as known to us at Fulham and Hallett Cove, as well

as from scattered sites in other parts of South Australia, the swmatra seems to have

lost its dominant position and is rare or even absent; otherwise the implement

types remain the same.

At Fulham the industry appears to be associated with an old land surface

which was covered by marine, estuarine, and lacustrine beds.

At Rainy Creek on

Kangaroo Island there is also some evidence of physiographic changes associated

o * 5 Do

with a recent raised beach, and it also seems significant that on the island imple-

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 57

ments are not found in the present day coastal sandhills although they are present

relatively abundantly on many of the higher parts of the island, Tindale anc

Maegraith (1931) have already drawn allention to certain apparent changes in

climate associaled with the Hawks Nest site, The extinetion of the Kangaroo

Islanders inay have taken place a relatively long time ago,

At Tartanga on the River Murray physiographie changes of a suuilar nature,

involving uw rise in river level, seen to be necessary io explain the building up ol

the series of Upper Sill Beds, These overlie tle Tartangan beds, whieh contain

Niinan oecupational debris assoviated with an extinet spevies of Vio, Mineraliza-

tion of the bones preserved in the Tartangan beds apparently took place dure

this period of high river levels.

At Devou Downs Rock-shelter on the Murray River the Pirrian is the earliest

recognizable mdustry in the type section deseribed by Uale and Tindale (1930)

aud on several erounds it Las been placed as later thaw the Tartangan,

Ad Fulbaya a Pirrian site oceurs above a lalke bed which covers Lhe site of Lhe

Wiulhan Industry; it is therefore younger than the Mualhans series,

Analysis of the implements present on the Pirrian site at !ulham shows that

number of pirrt >< 100

Humber of other worked implements

the pirrt index ( is about 7, This is a

surtace site, and i! some of the earlier implement collectors lave visited it in past

years it is likely that the percentage of pirrd lovms has been lowered by the gather-

ig of some of these attractive litle objects, Nevertheless the proportion of piped

Is high. At Devon Downs ihe proportion was even higher us is imdieated by a

“Pure Index’’ of 174. This index is based on the recovery of 386 port and 21

other duplements trom the block of Pirrian strata excavated,

At Seetion 1175 Hundred of Yankalilla the Rey, N. LL, Louwyck has found

an totouched Pirrian site on Uie southern bawk of Bungala River where the ratio

of porve to other tuplements is in tl neighbourhood of 100, Three kilometres

uway, near the present shore line at ILayeoek Point (here is a campsite of Muriun-

dian facies, with abundant debris of resent ovenpation, where pirrd duplements

do Hol ocer,

The presence of pirat in such large proportions among the implements vceur-

ring in Pirrian sites suggests that they were of considerable importance in the

cullure and nol likely to be of merely cerennouial dnportanee, as sugvested by one

reven! weiter. la size aid Lorm they are closely similar to the pressire-flaked

spear heads of North-Western Australia, which ave made in great ttitmbers, anel

ure often used on hunting, as well as om fighting spears. ‘There is oe spear front

ibe Great Western Desert in the South Australian Museum which bears a pinned as

58 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

a spear point. In the absence of further examples it may be suggested that it is

an archaeological pirrt put to a new use, but it may indicate that formerly these

implements were in general use as spear points.

The great abundance of pir7i around some waterholes and also on some now

apparently waterless sandhill sites around the arid Lake Eyre Basin and in the

country south of the Musgrave Ranges indicates that the Pirrian culture once

thrived there. A seemingly significant feature in the Lake Eyre Basin, as else-

where, is the absence of pure from some areas where other implements such as

adze-stones are otherwise abundant. On the basis of the Devon Downs section it

is possible to interpret this variation as one of the effects due to presence of a

succession of industries rather than to any very local, and seemingly haphazard

variations in the contemporary distribution of styles of implement making tech-

niques

In 1934 one of the last survivors of the Dieri (Dintibana) informed the writer

that ‘‘pirrt were natural stones which always had that form. They were found on

the ground and were on occasion picked up and used as drills.’’ Like the Neolithie

polished stone axes called ‘‘thunder stones’’ by the people of Lron Age Hurope,

their human origin was not readily appreciated.

In an earlier paper in this volume, the writer has discussed the relationship

between an Older and a Newer Tasmanian implement series. His observations

were based on the examination of the open face of an excavation in Rocky Cape

Cave and a study of the collections made therein by Mr. A. L. Meston. In the

present paper is noted the occasional presence in Tasmania of implements similar

to those of the archaic Kangaroo Island Industry. This suggests the possibility

that future work may lead to the recognition of at least two and perhaps three

stages in the development of the Tasmanian implement culture.

The absence of any of the specialized implements of Tasmanian type on main-

land sites has been an impressive argument for those who would derive the Tas-

manians from an extra-Australian source by a sea route, especially if they overlook

the faci that implements of Tasmanian type are not found either in New Guinea,

in New Caledonia, or even in Patagonia whence they would like to derive them.

Lf the Tasmanian implements have developed locally and if the prototypes are

similar to those already recognized from the Australian mainland then one of the

major bases for their argument lapses. A useful statement of recent opinion on

the question of the origin of the Tasmanian culture is given by Davidson (1937)

who also provides a bibliography of the subject. A general discussion on the

problem of the origin ot the Australians is given by Fiirer-Haimendort (19386)

while Davidson has also considered the same problem.

TINDALE—EXTINCT KANGAROO ISLAND CULTURE 59

SUMMARY.

Additional sites for implements of the extinct Kangaroo Island culture are

described and several artefact types are defined. The relationship of one of the

implements with the Sumatra-type ones of Palaeolithic sites in Malaya is dis-

cussed.

The original specimens found by White and indicative of the Fulham In-

dustry are described and figured, and a new loeality is recorded at Hallett Cove

for similar objects.

Implements similar to those of the Kangaroo Island culture are described

from Tasmania and from Wirrealpa in South Australia.

A tentative correlation of these industries with the suecession already de-

seribed from the Murray River is discussed and it is suggested that the Kangaroo

Island Industry may be similar to that brought to Australia from Malaya by the

first native visitors, who may have been of Tasmanian type. he distinetive

features of the Tasmanian implement culture are thought to have largely developed

after their isolation on the island.

REFERENCES CITED.

Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, 5, G. (1931): Traces of an extinct aboriginal popu-

lation ou Kangaroo Island. Records of the 8. Aust. Muscum, iv (3), pp. 275-

289; figs. 1-11, bibliography.

Tindale, N. b., Fenner, B.S. and Hall, Wf. . (1985): Maan) bone beds of probe

able Pleistocene age, Rocky Niver, Kangaroo Island. Trans. Roy. Suc. 8.

clust., 59, pp. 103-106, figs. 1-3.

White, 8. A. (1919) : Notes on the occurrence of aboriginal remains below marine

deposits at the Reedbeds, Fulham, near Adelaide. Trans. Roy, Soc, 8S. Aust.,

43, pp. 77-80, fig.

Howelun, W. (1919): Supplementary notes on the o¢eurrence of aboriginal 1e-

myns discovered by Captain 8. A. White at Fulham (deseribed in the pre-

ceding paper), with remarks on the geological section. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.

-Lust., 45, pp. 81-84.

llowehin, W. (1984) : Stone implements of the Adelaide tribe of aborigines now

extinet. Adelaide, pp. 1-94, fies. 1-148.

Hale, Ht. M. and Tindale, N. GB. (1980): Notes on some liuiman remains in the

Lower Murray Valley, South Australia. Records of the 8S. Aust. Museum, iv,

(2), pp. 145-218, figs, 1-249,

60 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Kiipper, H. (1930): Palaeolithische Werktuigen uit Atjah, N. Sumatra. Tvjd-

schr. van het kon. Nederl. Aardrijkskundige Genootschap, xvii, pp. 985-988.

Davidson, D. 8. (19387) : The relationship of Tasmanian and Australian cultures.

Philadelphia Anthropological Society: twenty-fifth Anniversary Studies,

University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 47-62.

Haimendorf, Christoph von Fiirer (1936): Zur Urgeschichte Australiens. An-

thropos, Xxxi, pp. 1-86, 433-455.

FURTHER NOTES ON THE CUMACEA OF

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS

By HERBERT M. HALE, DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Since the publication of the last records of Cumacea from South Australia (Hale,

1936) collecting has been continued. As a result the following species are added to the

forms known to occur in the littoral fauna of our State.

Cyclaspis cottoni sp. nov.

Paradiastylis tumida sp. nov.

Dic brevidactylum sp. nov.

Nannastacus nasutus var. camelus Zimmer.

Schizotrema depressum Calman.

FURTHER NOTES on ruzr CUMACEA or SOUTH

AUSTRALIAN REEFS

By HERBERT M. HALE, Director, Souru AusTRALIAN Museum.

Fig. 1-9.

Stnce the publication of the last records of Cumacea from South Australia (Hale,

1936) collecting has been continued. As a result the following species are added

to the forms known to oceur in the littoral fauna of our State.

Cyclaspis cottont sp. nov.

Paradiastylis tumida sp. nov.

Dic brevidactylum sp. nov.

Nannastacus nasutus var. camelus Zimmer.

Schizotrema depressum Calman.

Twenty-one species have now been taken on the shore-line of Gulf St. Vincent

and Spencer Gulf. The limestone reef at Port Willunga, three miles north of

Sellick’s reef, was worked systematically and, as would be expected, all the species

recorded from the last-named were found at Port Willunga also,

The Cumacean fauna occurring on loose stones on our reefs is remarkably

uniform. If short, filamentous algae are present to retain a film of sand even the

smoothest rocks harbour Cumacea and other small Crustacea. For instance, in

March of this year, Messrs. B. C. Cotton and K. Sheard spent a couple of hours

on a tiny shingle patch in shallow water at Marino, a few miles from Adelaide.

Here they immersed the larger smooth pebbles in weak formalin as previously

deseribed and obtained the following species:

Famity BODOTRIIDAE

CYcLASPIs PuRA Hale.

(A fully adult male has the hairs of the pleopods much longer than in the

type.)

PricrocuMA POEcILOTA Hale.

62 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Faminy DIASTYLIDAE

PacHystyuis vietus Tale.

JOLUROSTYLIS WAITED (Hale).

(See Zimmer, 1930, p. 651.)

GYNODIASTY LIS SIMILIS Zimmer.

GYNODIASTYLIS TURGIDUS Hale.

Faminy NANNASTACIDAE

NANNASTACUS GIBBOSUS Calman,

CuMELLA Lima Hale.

CUMELLA LAEVE Calman.

ScHIZOTREMA BIFRONS var. ACULEATA Hale,

Again IT have to acknowledge my indebtedness to Mr. K. Sheard who spent

many days painstakingly sorting out thousands of small crustaceans from fine

debris.

Famity BODOTRIIDAE

Cyrcuaspis G. O. Sars.

CYCLASPIS COTTONI sp. noy.

Ovigerous female. Integument firm but easily broken ; surface slightly glossy,

squamose. Carapace with dorsal edge, when viewed from the side, slightly irreeu-

lar, less than one-third total length of animal, its depth more than half its length

and less than its greatest breadth. Pseudorostral lobes not quite reaching apex of

eye-lobe. Most of the several ocular lenses, black. Antennal notch wide and deep,

and tooth acute. Anterior half of carapace with a sharp dorsal keel, on each side

of which is a shallow depression ; there is a double pit at the middle of the length of

the carapace and posterior to these indentations the keel bifureates (the divergent

portions being swollen and less elevated) forming a single keel again just before

reaching the hinder margin, Most of the first pedigerous somite concealed ; second

to fifth somites with a low but distinet dorsal carina; third to fifth, each with a

pair of dorso-lateral elevations.

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SoutTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 63

Pleon somites all feebly keeled above and with small lateral articular pro-

cesses on all but sixth; first to fourth and telsonic somite of approximately equal

length; fifth distinetly longer.

Fig. 1, Cyelaspis cottoni. Type female; a, lateral view; b, dorsal view of carapace.

«, Luteral view of allotype male (all % 38).

First antennae with third segment longer than second and with first as long

as second and third together; inner flagellum minute, elongate and apparently

two-jointed ; outer two-jointed, the first sezment three times as long as second.

Basis of second maxillipeds a little longer than rest of appendage and with

an apical plumose seta. Basis of third maxillipeds wide, strongly geniculate, dis-

tinetly longer than the ‘‘palp’’ and with outer apical portion expanded, and ex-

tending forwards beyond level of insertion of carpus; outer distal part of merus

also expanded and reaching almost to level of apex of carpus, which is distally

expanded on the inner side. First peraeopod with carpus reaching to apex of

antennal angle; basis curved, subequal in length to remaining joints together,

with inner (or ventral) distal portion produced into a sharp tooth and with a long

plumose apical seta on opposite side; ischinum and merus together as long as carpus

which is a little longer than propodus (15:14); dactylus three-fourths as long as

64 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

propodus, and with two unequal apical spines. Second peraeopods with basis as

long as remaining joints together ; ischium short and merus longer than carpus;

dactylus a little shorter than carpus and propodus together and with three unequal

spines at the oblique apex. The last three pairs of limbs offer no special features.

Pedunele of uropods nearly half as long again as telsonic somite, slender, with

inner edge feebly serrate; exopod four-fifths as long as pedunele, a little longer

than endopod and narrowly truncate distally, with two unequal terminal spines;

endopod slender, distally pointed and with inner edge serrated for portion of its

length. ;

Fig. 2. Cyclaspis cottoni. Paratype ovigerous female; a, first antenna; b and ¢, second

and third maxillipeds; d, e and f. first, second and fourth peraeopods; g, uropod (a, X 96;

b-g, x 62).

Colour white with sooty markings and mottlings.

Leneth 3-3 mm.

Male. Differs from female in having carapace less deep, in the much larger

ocular lenses, and in having the first pedigerous somite wholly concealed. The

second pedigerous somite is shorter and its crest is less elevated. The infero-

lateral portions of the first to fifth pleon somites are expanded downwards as

usual in this sex.

Length 3-2 mm.

Loc. South Australia: Spencer Gulf, Port Germein, ‘‘burrowing in dirty

sand between tide marks’’ (B. C. Cotton, Apl., 1937). Types in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. C. 2140-2141.

This is one of the several Cumacea new to South Australia which have been

collected by Mr. Cotton, and I have pleasure in associating his name with it. It

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 65

was secured by stirring sand in a bucket of sea water and straining out the dis-

turbed Crustacea,

Although the carapace exhibits no bold seulpture, the impressions at the

termination of the anterior, clear-cut part of the dorsal carina anc the waviness

of the more faintly marked, double posterior portion are responsible for slight

but characteristic irregularity in the dorsal outline.

C. cottoni is very closely allied to (. herdmanit Calman (1904, p. 171, pl. iil,

fig 56-69, and pl. iv, fig. 60-66) and one would not hesitate to refer the South Aus-

tralian specimens to that species were it not for the faet that they differ in having

the exopod of the uropod distally truneate and with two distinetly articulated

terminal spines. Calman in his fig. 65—66 illustrates the uropods of C. herdmant

as he describes them—‘ Both rami are acutely pointed, without terminal spines.’’

Leprocuma G. O. Sars.

Leprocuma sHeArDI Hale.

Leplocuma sheardi Hale, 1936, p. 409, fie. 38-4.

The adult male is now available. The carapace in dorsal view is narrower

than in the female. The ocular lobe is sooty, with four of the eve lenses clear,

prominent and glittering. The pseudorostral lobes are produeed in front of the

eye-lobe, but do not come into contaet. The exopod of the fourth peraeopods is

rudimentary as in the female and young males.

In a male 5-65 mm. in length five pairs of pleopods are well developed and

hear long setae, but in an example 4-35 nm, long the abdominal appendages are

rudimentary.

The uropod of the adult male is much as in the female but is armed with

longer and more numerous spines and setae.

The colour pattern is remarkably uniform and is as in the type (Hale, 1936.

fiz. 3).

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent. Port Willunga, on stones, 1 fath.

(Hale and Sheard, Feb., 1987).

Famity DIASTYLIDAE

GynoprastyLis Calman.

GYNODIASTYLIS TRUNCATIFRONS Hale.

Gynodiastylis truncatifrons Hale, 1928, p. 43, fig. 13-14.

Several specimens of this distinctive species were secured at the southern end

of Sellick’s Reef. The type was taken five miles from shore,

66 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Sellick’s Reef, 1 fath. (Hale and

Sheard, Jan., 1937),

PARADIASTYLIS Calman.

PARADIASTYLIS TUMIDA sp. nov.

Ovigerous female. Integument strongly indurated, Carapace one-third total

length, much wider than deep; triangular in dorsal view, its greatest breadth

occurring at posterior end, where it is almost as wide as long; a dorso-lateral fold

or ridge on each side is marked off into three prominent tumidities; there is also a

large rounded elevation at each side near the hinder margin, and from it curves

forwards and downwards a swollen ridge, which does not reach to the anterior

margin. Pseudorostral lobes rather narrow, meeting in front of eye lobe for a

distance equal to more than one-fifth of length of carapace. Ocular lobe wide,

with three unpigmented lenses. Antennal notch distinet; a distinct tooth below

notch and above the rounded and serrate infero-lateral angle of carapace.

First pedigerous somite exposed, short; second and third somites short dor-

sally but with pleural portions lengthened and swollen above articulation of

peraeopods; dorsal length of fourth somite about equal to that of first three so-

mites together ; fifth smaller than any of others.

Pleon somites one to four not markedly differing in length; fifth somite one.

fourth as long again as fourth; telson three-fourths as long as fifth somite, and

equal in length to sixth, with two upeurving rather prominent terminal spines

and six pairs of smaller lateral spines.

First antennae with first joint barely longer than third and half as long again

as second. Third maxillipeds without exopods; basis curved near proximal end,

wide, and distally expanded, with a series of stout and very long plumose setae;

length of basis equal to that of remaining segments together.

First peraeopods reaching but little beyond apex of pseudorostrum, basis

only about two-thirds as long as rest of limb; ischium and merus each with a long

plumose seta distally ; carpus a little longer than propodus, half as long again as

merus and three times as long as ischium; dactylus subequal in length to merus,

tipped with several setae, of which one is conspicuously the stoutest ; exopod short

and slender. Second peraeopods widely separated from third pair; with basis

very broad (two-thirds as wide as long’) and having inner edge toothed; ischium

suppressed ; carpus barely longer than merus but nearly twice as long as propodus;

dactylus shorter than propodus, with one of the terminal setae strong; exopod

relatively longer and stouter than in first peraeopods. Last three pairs of peraeo-

pods with basis shorter than remaining joints together (much shorter in fifth

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 67

pair) ; carpus mueh shorter than merus in third and fourth peraeopods but as long

ax merus in fifth; carpus in each pair with an unusually stout and long clistal seta

and a slender bristle; dactylus terminating in a strong claw-like seta, and with one

or two bristles near distal end.

Fig. 8. Paradiastylis tumida. Type female; a, lateral view; b, dorsal view of cephala-

thorax; ¢. antero-lateral margin of carapace. Juvenile male; d, lateral view; e, dorsal view

of cephalothorax (1h, * 26; 6, * 60; d-e, X 46),

Pedunele of uropods about half as long again as telson, wide (its greatesi

breadth nearly one-fourth the leneth) and armed with three spines on inner mar-

vin, two being placed near distal end; excluding the terminal spines the endopod

isa little longer than exopod ; including the spines the rami are subequal in length ;

endopod with first joint longer than second and the latter longer than third; four

68 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

short spines on inner margin of endopod, one at middle of length and one at distal

end of first joint, and one at distal ends of second and third joints.

Colour cream.

Length 3-75 mm.

Juvenile male. Carapace in dorsal yiew with sides parallel for posterior two-

thirds, relatively much narrower and not so deep as in female; dorso-lateral and

lateral ridges sharply defined and not swollen. Appendages as in female excepting

that an exopod is present on the third maxilliped, the exopod of the first and

second peraeopods is much stouter, and the bases of second and fourth pairs of

legs are wider, with the inner margin serrate.

Fig. 4. Paradiastylis tumida, Paratype ovigerous female; a. first antenna; b, third

maxilliped; e—f, first, second, third and fifth peraeopods; g, telson and uropods (X 52).

That the specimen is young is evidenced by the faet that exopods are absent

on the third and fourth peraeopods, pleopods have not yet appeared and the

second transverse suture of the endopod of the uropods is absent, although the

spines are arranged as in the female; this two-jointed condition is without the

slightest doubt due to immaturity,

Length 2 mm

Loe, South Australia: Gulf St. Vineent, Port Willunga Reef, on stones, 1

fath., and Sellick’s Reef, on stones, 1 fath. (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Jan. and

Feb, 1987). New South Wales: Sydney Harbour, Vaucluse, on stones between

tide marks (T. Harvey Johnston, Jan. 1937). Types in South Australian Museum,

Reg. No. C, 2144-2147.

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 69

Dic Stebbing.

Dic LastopacryLum Zimmer.

Dic lasiodactylum Zimmer, 1914, p. 193, fig. 17-18; Hale, 1936, p. 422, fig. 12-13.

In recording this species from South Australia, the writer deseribed an im-

mature male, larger than Zimmer's types and differing in having the carapace

spiny and the telson and uropods relatively much longer and markedly spinose.

The collecting of further material from Sellick’s and Port Willunga Reet's, shows

that, as adults, both **typical’’ and ‘‘spiny’’ torms cover the same range of size,

Thus, one finds ovigerous females from 3 mm. down to 2:5 mm. in length having

the long spiny telson and rough carapace. On the other hand a ‘‘typical’’ female

nearly 3 mum, in length is like Zimmer’s specimens in so far as telson and uropods

are concerned, but has a pair of spinules on the ocular lobe and the inferior margin

of the carapace spinose (fig. 5, a).

Vig. 5. a, Carapace of adult female of typical form of Dic lasiodactylum. |, Carapace of

adult female of Die lasiodactylum yar, spinicuuda (* 46).

As, however, the long, spiny telson consistently distinguishes the ‘‘spiny”’

form from ‘‘typical’’ specimens of the same size, the varietal name spinicauda is

proposed for it. The earapace of var. spizicauda always bears a goodly number

of spines arranged more or less as shown in fig. 5, b; in some examples the spines

are more abundant and the dorso-lateral elevation on each side is much more

marked.

Dic BREVIDACTYLUM sp. nov,

Ovigerous female. Integument rather thin. Carapace about as deep as wide,

less than one-third total length ; in dorsal view the lateral margins, to level of base

of pseudorostrum, are subparallel; surface without sculpture save for a slight

dorso-lateral bulge on each side. Pseudorostval lobes upturned, meeting in front

of ocular lobe for a distance equal to more than one-fourth length of carapace.

Ocular lobe very wide.

70 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

All pedigerous somites fully exposed; pleural parts of first and second pro-

duced forwards, of third to fifth backwardly produced.

Pleon a little longer than thorax; telson distinetly longer than sixth somite,

without armature excepting a pair of rudimentary apical spinules.

rg

Fig. 6. Die brevidactylum. a, Lateral view of ovigerous female. Juvenile male; b, lateral

view; ¢, dorsal view of cephalothorax (X 32).

First peraeopods with small exopod, tipped with a few very short setae; basis

one-fifth as long as remaining joints together ; carpus stout, one-third as long again

as propodus, which bears a long apical spine; dactylus less than half as long as

propodus and with only three apical setae. Second peraeopods with small exopod

bearing one or two hairs; ischium suppressed and carpus equal in length to pro-

podus and dactylus together.

Peduncle of uropods nearly one-fourth as long again as telson, which is equal

in length to exopod; endopod almost as long as exopod, with setae on inner edge,

with a long terminal seta, and with third joint longer than second but shorter than

first ; exopod wtih two spines on outer margin and with three terminal setae.

Colour white.

Length 2-7 mm.

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 71

Immature male. Rudimentary exopods are present on the first four pairs of

peraeopods, and the second antennae do not nearly reach to hinder margin of

carapace. Appendages otherwise much as in female.

Length 2-1 mm.

5

Fig. 7. Die brevidaectylum. Type female; a and b, first and second peraeopods; ¢, telson

and uropod (x 70).

a

WH,

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Sellick’s Reef, on stones, 1 fath.

(11. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Jan. and March 1937). Types in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. C, 2151-2152.

This species differs from D. lasiodactylwm in the very different proportions

of the segments of the first peraeopods and in the absence of long bristles on the

dactylus of that limb, the subparallel (instead of convergent) sides of the carapace

as seen in dorsal view and in the character of the uropods.

Pacuystyuis H, J. Hansen.

Anchicolurus of Stebbing seems to be a synonym of Colurostylis Calman

(Hale, 1928, p. 47 and Zimmer, 1930, p. 651). The acquisition of a male of Pachy-

stylis vielus makes it increasingly difficult to separate Colwrostylis from Hansen’s

genus.

72 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PACHYSTYLIS VIETUS Hale.

Pachystylis vietus Hale, 1936, p. 424, fig. 14-15.

The species was previously known only from the adult female. <A single

young male differs as follows. The first four peraeopods bear well-developed exo-

pods, the accessory flagellum of the first antennae is not much shorter than the

main flagellum, there are pleopods on the first two pleon somites and the apical

spines of the telson, although tiny, are longer; the branches of the pleopods are

rudimentary and are not furnished with long setae. The apex of the telson has

two short, slender setae, in addition to the small spines, just as in the female.

Loe. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Sellick’s Reef (H. M. Hale, Keb.

1937) ; Port Willunga (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Jan. and Feb. 1937) ; Marino

(K. Sheard and B. C. Cotton, Mar. 1937).

Fig. 8. Allodiastylis eretatus. a, Cephalothorax of adult female. b, Cephalothorax of male

with form of female (xX 34).

ALLODIASTYLIS Hale.

ALLODIASTYLIS CRETATUS Hale.

Allodiastylis cretatus Hale, 1936, p. 426, fig. 16-17.

This species was originally described from a single adult female and a single

maie. Further material now available reveals some curious facts.

The type female is abnormal in so far as the pseudorostrum and the anterior

margin of the carapace are concerned; it has already been noted (Hale, wf supra,

p. 428) that its first peraeopods do not form a symmetrical pair. In females now

before me the pseudorostral lobes are upturned, are spinose interiorly and have

long setae radiating from the apex, while the antero-lateral angle of the carapace is

HALE—CUMACEA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN REEFS 73

prominent and, like the inferior margin, is spinose. In lateral view the serrated

dorsal margin exhibits a ceeper indentation at the middle of its length and the

antero-lateral portions of cach dorso-lateral ridge are spinous, one of the spines

heing fairly prominent (fig. $,a). The appendages and telson are as in the type

female (with the exception of the malformed first right peraeopod of the latter)

and no exopods are apparent on any of the thoracie limbs.

One exumple from South Australia (fig. 8, b) resembles the females described

above, but lias exopods on the third maxillipeds and first to fourth peraeopods,

although they are not fully developed; the appendages generally are as in the type

ihaie, The sculpture is exactly asin the females, while the integument is indurated

aud chalky white, the pseudorostrim is uplurned and the telson terminates in a

pair of very short blunt spines, instead of long spines as in the type male.

Using the “formalin method’? of collecting on a reef in New South Wales,

Prof. T. Harvey Johnston secured a number of females in conipany with an adult

maie; the latter agrees in every detail with the type male. Thus, (his transiiecent

male, with raised ocular lobe, downbent rostrum, strongly ridged carapace and

lony telsonic spines, has now been found associated with the very different white

females in two widely separated Australian loealities—evidence supporting the

assumption that they are the sexes of the one species.

The variation exhibited by some other Cumacea indicates the desirability uf

examining large series whenever possible. One may cite, for example, the range

of variability of Miastylis glabra Zimmer (see Zimmer, 1926, pp. 57 and 72), Nann-

aslacus nasutus Zimmer, VN. gibbosus Calman, V. zimmeri Calman, and Die lasiv-

dactylum Zimmer.

Loe, South Australia: Guit St. Vineent, Sellick’s Reet, on stones, 1 fath.

(H, M, Male and ik. Sheard, Jan. 1937). New South Wales: Sydney Harbour,

Vaucluse, on stone between tide marks ('‘T, Harvey Johnston, Jan, 1937).

Famiry NANNASTACIDAE

NANNASTACUS Spence Bate.

NANNASTACUS NASUTUS Var, CAMELUS Aiminer.

Vunnustacus nasulus var, cornelius Zimmer, 1914, p, 186, fig. 15,

Aaunber of specimens taken on South Australian reels conform to the above

variely. The eve is pigmented in all, A female 2-5 mn. in length is figured,

Loe, South Australias Gull St, Vineent, Port Willimpa Reet, on stone, 2

Nath. al high (ide, and Sellick’s Reef, on stone, 1 fath. (11. M. Hale and Kk, Sheard,

Jan-Feb. 1937).

Hlab. South-western and South Australia,

74 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 9. Nannastacus nasutus var. camelus. Female; a, lateral view; b, dorsal view of

cephalothorax (X 30).

ScHIZOTREMA Calman.

ScHIZOTREMA DEPRESSUM Calman.

Schizotrema depressum Calman, 1911, p. 361, pl. xxxiv, fig. 14-17.

Specimens of this species have now been taken in South Australian waters.

Adult females attain a length of 2 mm. and have the carapace more rugose than

that of smaller examples.

As noted by Calman the lateral setae of the cephalothorax and pleon are al-

ways encrusted—either with algae or mud—so that the bizarre appearance of the

creature is increased.

Loc. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, Port Willunga Reef, on stones, 1

fath. (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, Feb. 1937).

Hab. Gulf of Siam and South Australia.

REFERENCES.

Calman, W. T. (1904) : Rep. Ceylon Pearl Fish., ii.

Calman, W. T. (1911) : Trans. Gool. Soc., xvii.

Hale, H. M. (1928) : Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., li.

Hale, H. M. (1936) : Rec. S. Aust. Mus., v, No. 4.

Zimmer, C. (1914) : Fauna Stidwest Aust., v.

Zimmer, ©. (1926) : Kungl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand., Band iti, No. 2.

Zimmer, C. (1980) : Mitt. Zool. Mus., Berlin, Band xvi, Heft. 4.

A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TROMBIDIIDAE

(ACARINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., ENTOMOLOGIST,

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Recently Dr. Sig Thor (Zool. Anz., 1935, ex, pp. 107-112) has divided the family

Trombidiidae into ten subfamilies. In this paper therefore I propose to revise our

knowledge of the Australian forms in the light of Sig Thor’s studies.

Subfamily I, Trombellinae Sig Thor, 1935.

Body elongate, abdomen rectangular. Cuticle strong, tuberculate; hairs ciliated or

simple, short and pointed; the two pseudostigmal hairs placed close together in the

middle of the thorax on one or two prominences between the two pairs of stalked or

sessile paired eyes. Fourth segment of palp with various spines or hairs; fifth segment

long.

A REVISION or raz AUSTRALIAN TROMBIDIIDAE

(ACARINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., Enromonoctsr, SourH Ausrratian Museum.

Fig, 1-3.

Recentuy Dr. Sig Thor (Zool. Anz., 1935, ex, pp. 107-112) has divided the family

Trombidiidae into ten subfamilies. In this paper therefore I propose to revise our

knowledge of the Australian forms in the light of Sig Thor’s studies.

Subfamily 1, TRomBevurnae Sig Thor, 1935.

Body elongate, abdomen rectangular. Cuticle strong, tubereulate; hairs

ciliated or simple, short and pointed; the two pseudostigmal hairs placed close

together in the middle of the thorax on one or two prominences between the two

pairs of stalked or sessile paired eyes. Fourth segment of palp with various spines

or hairs; fifth segment long.

In this subfamily Sig Thor places only the typical genus T'rombella Berl.

1887. Inasubsequent paper (Zool, Anz, 1936, exiv, pp. 29-32), however, he puts

the genera Chyzeria Canest. 1897 and Parachyzeria Lirst 1926, both of which he

omitted from the earlier paper, in the subfamily Microtrombidvnae. According

io his subfamily diagnosis, both the above genera seem to me io be more closely

related to Trombella and should, I believe, be grouped with that genus in the

Trombellinac, rather than in the Microtrombidiinae. Such inclusion, however,

does necessitate a slight alteration in the diagnosis of the Trombellinae, In both

Chyzeria and Parachyzeria the erista is absent and the pseudostigmal hairs are

placed close together on a single prominence, while the paired eyes are on long

peduncles and not sessile, he above characteristics are included in the diagnosis

of the subfamily as given above.

The three genera here included in the subfamily may be keyecl as follows ;

1, Pseudostigmal hairs on two slightly separated tubercles. Body hairs simple

or very finely serrated. Eyes 2 4- 2, sessile. Dorsal surface of abdomen often

with glandular clepressions he - Gen. Trombella Berl. 1887.

Pseudostigmal hairs on a single tubercular promineuce. Body with or without

lateral processes ; hairs ciliated and simple. Eyes 2-+ 2, pedunculate .. 2,

76 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

2. Body with 4 lateral abdominal processes on each side. Dorsum posteriorly

with simple sinuate hairs, overlying which are long ciliated hairs.

Gen. Chyzeria Canestrini 1897,

Body without above processes. Dorsum anteriorly with four brushes of very

long ciliated hairs, underlying which posteriorly are the simple sinuate hairs

asin Chyzerta .. .. Gen. Paruchyzeria Hirst. 1926 (not Australian).

Genus TROMBELLA Berlese, 1887.

The only known Australian species is U'rombella warregensis Hirst 1929,

which is recorded from New South Wales and South Australia.

Genus Cuyzeria Canestrini, 1897.

This genus is widely distributed in Australia and also occurs in New Zealand.

The following forms have been described and have been keyed in an earlier paper

(Womersley 1984) ; C. australiense Hirst 1928; C. australiense v. musgravei Hirst

1929; C. a. var. occidentalis Hirst 1929; C. a. var. hirsti Wom. 1934; C. insulana

Hirst 1929; C. montana Hirst 1929; C. armigera Hirst 1929.

Subfamily II, Tanaupopinak Sig Thor, 1935.

Body moderately broad. Cuticle smooth or tuberculate; hairs pointed, short

or long. Crista weak, without sensillary areas; the two pseudostigmal hairs placed

near the crista in the middle of the thorax. The two pairs of sessile eyes some:

times absent. Palpi with few spines. Legs short, seldom long.

This subfamily is as yet unknown from Australia. It includes the following

genera: Tanaupodus Haller 1882; Hothrombiwm Berlese 1910; Rhinothrombium

Berlese 1910; T'yphlothrombium Berlese 1910; Neotanawpodes Garman 1925,

Subfamily I11, Jounsronianinag Sig Thor, 1935.

Abdomen cylindrical, with pointed simple hairs. Crista well developed, with

two sensillary areas in the middle (or at ends) and 4 (2 pairs) of pseudostigmal

hairs. With a distinct nasus. Eyes shortly stalked or sessile. Palpi with or

without a few tibial spines. Legs moderately long.

Included here by Sir Thor are Johnstoniana George 1909 (= Diplothrombium

Berlese 1910 = Rohaultia Oudemans 1911), Centrotrombidium Kramer 1896,

Notothrombium Storkan 1934. To these should be added Myrmicotrombium

Womersley 1934. The genus Rohaultia Oudemans was erected for a larval form.

As the genus Centrothrombidiwm Kramer possesses only one pair of pseudo-

stigmal hairs on a single sensillary area of the erista, the inclusion of it here does

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 77

not seem natural. Tt would probably he hetter placed in the Microtrombidiinae.

With the exception of this genus and of Notathrambiiwmn, the deseription of whieh

is not available to me, the two Australian genera may he separated thus:

1. Eyes 2 -++ 2. sessile. Crista with either both or only one pair of psendostigmal

hairs situated medially ; if only one, then the seeond pair is at the anterior end

hoth pairs on sensillary areas. ‘a Gen, Johnstoniand George 1909,

(= Diplothrombium Berl, = Rohaultia Ouds.).

2. Tyes 1 -+-1, sessile. Crista with two pairs of psendostigmal hairs placed al

opposite ends, on sensillarv wreas.. Gen, Murmicotranbiunm Wom,. 1934.

’

Genus JOHNSTONIANA George, 1909.

= Miplothrombinm Berl, 1910, Tlirst 1928, Womersley 1934.

= Rohaultia Onds. 1911, Wom, 1934.

Only a single species Johnstoniuna australiense (TMirst, 1928) is known from

Australia. It was described by Hirst from Queensland and was later recorded by

the present writer from South Australia.

Genus Myruicorromern™ Womersley, 1934,

This genus is only known from the type species M. hrevicristatum Wom. de-

seribed from specimens found in an ants’ nest in South Australia.

Subfamily IV, Eurrompipirnar Sig Thor, 1935.

Abdomen broad, triangular (except the narrow Leptathrombium), with short

thickly ciliated hairs and with a few transverse furrows, Apex of abdomen with

an oval shield-like area, seldom without. Thorax anteriorly with a distinct nasus.

Crista well developed, with a medial small but solid sensillary area and two pseudo-

stigmal hairs between the shortly peduneulate or sessile paired eyes. Palpi with

strong accessory claw and many strong spines. Lees strong, of variable length,

Larvae with 2 or 3 dorsal shields; lower lip forming a chitinons ring; tarsal claws

of leg ITT strongly modified, the inner claw being stump-like and projeeting

backwards.

The genera placed here by Sig Thor are Hutrombidiwn Verdun 1909, Lepto-

thrombium Berlese 1912, and Cercethrombinm Methlag] 1927. The last is only

known from the larval stage, Mutrombidiwm from both larva and adult, and

Leptothrombium from the adult only. The last genus is regarded by Berlese as bit

a subgenus of Hutrombidium.

The following key will help in the separation of the genera.

78 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1. Adults

2.

Larvae is 4 a : 3

2. Form broadly triangular ; body hairs uniform.

Gen. Lutrombidium Verdun, 1909.

Form narrow and elongate; body hairs of two forms.

Gen. Leptothrombidium Berlese, 1912.

3. Only two dorsal shields ; coxal hairs short and stumpy and apically bifureated.

Gen. Hutrombidium Verdun, 1909.

Three dorsal shields; coxal hairs long, pointed and ciliated.

Gen. Cercothrombiwm Methlagl, 1927.

Genus Evurromepipium Verdun, 1909.

This is the only genus as yet known to occur in Australia, It is represented

by Lutrombidium trigonum Herman, the larvae of which have been found at-

tached to the Black-tipped Locust, Chortoicetes terminifera (Walker) at the

Waite Institute, Glen Osmond, South Australia, by Mr. D. C. Swan in April, 1934.

Subfamily V, Poporurompunar Sig Thor, 1935.

Abdomen moderately broad, cordate, with shoulders and with fine, very

weakly or unciliated hairs. No nasus. In the middle of the thorax and between

the two pairs of shortly peduneulate eyes is a well developed sensillary area with

two pseudostigmal hairs; crista behind sensillary area shortened and in front

rudimentary. Fourth segment of palpi with accessory claw and many spines or

combs; fifth segment (tarsus) large. Legs long.

The genus Podothrombiwm Berlese 1910 is the only one included in this sub-

family. It does not occur in Australia.

Subfamily VI, Tromsicutinakr Ewing, 1929.

(Itch- or Chigger-mites.)

Body form in adult with the shape of an 8, with a constriction behind the

shoulders; abdomen rounded behind. Body hairs thick, soft, and finally ciliated.

Thorax without nasus, sometimes with an anterior incision. Crista well developed,

extending the whole length of thorax, posteriorly with a sensillary area and two

pseudostigmal hairs. Eyes weakly developed, seldom one or two pairs near the

sensillary area, often absent or rudimentary. Palpi long, fourth segment without

comb or accessory claw, with few spines (more in Blankaartia). Legs short.

Larvae with only one dorsal shield (two in Blankaartia).

In this group Sig Thor places the following genera: Heterothrombidium Ver-

dun 1909, Neothrombium Bruyant 1909, Doloisia Oudemans 1910, Leewwenhoekia

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 79

Ondemans 1911, Zannemania Oudemans 1911, Gahrliepia Oudemans 1912, Schon-

gastia Oudemaus 1910, Neoschdngastia Ewing 1929, Schdngastiella Tlirst 1915,

Odonlacarus Ewing 1929, Walehia Ewing 1932, Endolrombieula Ewing 1932,

Atonus Late, 1795 (= Metathrombium Oudemans 1909), Vrombieula Berlese

1905 (= Neabrombioula Mirst 1925).

Very few of these genera are known from the adult forms, most of them being

represented in collections by larvae, The larval stages are generally to be found

as ectoparasites on warni-blooded animals (ineluding man) but some appear to be

restricted to amphibians,

The genus Atomus Latr. (= Metathrombiwmn Ouds.) is here regarded as being

more properly placed in the Wicrolrombidtinae.

The varions genera may be separated with the help of the following key

1. Adults; body 8-shaped, Eyes one or none on each side 0 ee Ay

Larvae fr 3 i 34 we “4 vi Sh

2. Byes placed at base of large sensillary area of erista, or absent. Sensillary

area broad with two pseudostigmal hairs, Gen. Trambicula Berlese, 1908.

Eves placed on anterior adie of thorax; apex of thorax incised.

Gen. Blankaartia Oudemans, 1911 (not Australian).

4%. With two median dorsal shields. Eyes two on easel side, posterior eve the

smaller, Dorsum behind seeond shield with numerons small symmetrical

shields, Lower lip not as a chitinous ring. Tarsi T and Tl with only 2 claws,

TIT with three. Gen, Blankaartid Oudemans, 1911 (not Australian),

With one or three median dorsal shields and only one eve on eaeh side... 4.

4, Anterior dorsal shield with 3 or more pairs of setae, in addition to the two

psendostigmal hairs BY . A. ae + ee HS

Dorsal shield with only 4 or 6 si ingle setae besides the psendostigmal hairs 1).

5. Dorsal shield with 4 pairs of setae besides the psendostigmal hairs, Remur of

lee T only divided; one pair of setae between coxae T and one pair between

coxae TIT. Palpal claw bifureate. Gen. Gahrliepia Oudemans, 1912,

(= Typhlothrombivm Oudemans, 1911) (not Australian),

Dorsal shield with 3 pairs of setae .. - - x: J. 6,

6. Pseudostizmal hairs clavate,

Gen. at Dp apiiatls Hirst, 1915 (not Avstralian).

Pseudostivinal hairs not clavate... ois . Le 2

7. ae dorsal shielcl longer than broad ; magsitary eoxal setae in front of

palpi Gen. Heterothrombinm Verdun, 1910 (not Australian).

Dorsal shield broader than lone, . Fi ’s ee 8.

8. Dorsal shield] without any median anterior process but with a poorly developed

erista 0 Gen. Hannemunia Oudemans, 19117 (not Anstralian).

Dorsal shield with a short median anterior process; without erista,

Gen. Leenwenhoekia Oudemans, 1911.

80

10,

11.

13.

14.

16.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dorsal shield trapezoidal . ut nd 7 me a0:

Dorsal shield triangular. Palpal claw with 1-5 points.

Gen. Doloisia Oudemans, 1912 (not Australian).

Dorsal shield with only two pairs of setae besides the psendostigmal hairs;

latter clavate. Eyes absent or rudimentary. Palpal claw trifureate.

Gen. Walchia Ewing, 1931 (not Australian).

Dorsal shield with 5 setae in addition to the pseudostigmal hairs; latter clavate

or not . phe #: - a A, ia sis ed

Pseudostigmal hairs clavate J , f. als ., 12.

Psendostigmal hairs not clavate .. ; Mh J yo he,

Chelicerae with a row of teeth dorsally ; palpal claw usually bifureate.

Gen. Schénqastia Oudemans, 1910.

Chelicerae without more than one dorsal tooth; palpal claw trifureate. Eyes

two sd fe Gen. Neoschdngastia Ewing, 1929 (not Australian).

Dorsal shield distinetly pentagonal, with the posterior sides forming a strong

angle. HKyes two on each side or absent es 7 £. ~_ 44,

Dorsal shield at most roughly 5-sided, without strong posterior angle .. 15.

Eyes two on each side. Gen. Pentagonella Sig Thor, 1936 (not Australian).

Eyes absent 3 Gen. Reidlinea Oudemans, 1916 (not Australian).

Dorsal shield poorly developed; all 5 setae placed near middle of shield;

median anterior seta simple; pseudostigmal hairs short, simple, setiform.

Chelicerae with 3 sharp recurved teeth on upper margin and a vestigial lateral

tooth. Eyes 2 + 2, well developed.

Gen. Endotrombicula Ewing, 1931 (not Australian).

Dorsal shield well developed, the 5 setae marginal or submarginal .. 16.

Chelicerae with a row of teeth on upper margin.

Gen. Odontacarus Ewing, 1929 (not Australian).

Chelicerae with not more than one tooth on upper margin.

Gen. Trombicula Berlese, 1905.

(= Neotrombicula Hirst, 1925).

Of the above genera only Trombicula Berlese 1905, Schéngastia Oudemans

1910, and Leeuwenhoekia Oudemans 1911 are so far known to be represented in

Australia.

Genus TromprcuLa Berlese, 1905.

The following five species of this genus are recorded from Australia, two as

adults and three as larvae.

TROMBICULA SIGNATA Womersley, 1934.

Described from a solitary adult specimen from Western Australia. The type

is in the South Australian Museum.

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES

TROMBICULA TINDALET Womersley, 1936.

81

Deseribed from a specimen taken on Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South

Australia by Mr. N. B. Tindale. Type in the South Australian Museum.

TROMBICULA HIRSTI Sambon, 1927.

Only known from the larval form, this species is the ‘‘ti-tree itch mite’’ of

Queensland and South Australia. Tts real host is unknown but recently the writer

has had a specimen from a blackbird where it was found walking over the beak

after the death of the bird. This specimen was from Payneham, South Australia.

June 30th, 1937.

TROMBICULA NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE Hirst, 1929.

Described from larvae found on Rattus greyi from Kangaroo Island, South

Australia, it was later taken on Potorous tridactylus in Tasmania.

TRoMBICULA MAcROPUS Womersley, 1934.

This species was described from specimens of larvae found attached to the

scrotum of a wallaby from Darwin, Northern Australia.

Genus ScnbncastrrA Oudemans, 1910.

Of this larval genus five species have been described from the Australian con

tinent as follows:

ScHONGASTIA ANTIPODIANUM Hirst, 1929.

From Rattus greyi from Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

ScHONGASTIA COORONGENSIS Hirst, 1929.

From the ears of a rodent at Robe, South Australia.

Scubncastta DASYCERCI Hirst, 1929.

From Dasycercus cristicauda, Ooldea, South Australia,

SCHONGASTIA WESTRALIENSE Womersley, 1954.

From the ears of a domestic cat, Greenbushes, Western Australia.

ScHONGASTIA PETROGALE Womersley, 1934.

From the scrotum of a wallaby, Musgrave Ranges, South Australia,

82 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Genus LEkuWENHOEFKTIA Oudemans, 1911.

LEEUWENHOEKIA AUSTRALIENSE Hirst, 1925.

Originally described from specimens taken on a human being in New South

Wales, it has also been found on the ears of a domestic eat at Glen Osmond, South

Australia.

Subfamily VII, Microrromsiniinak Sig Thor, 1935.

Body small to moderately large. Abdomen cordate. Body hairs very vari-

able, smooth, thin, weakly ciliated or thick (apparently unciliated), dagger-like,

clavate or globular, frequently combed on inner side, septate or not. Eyes usually

in two pairs or absent, sessile or shortly pedunculate. The sensillary area of erista

behind the eyes, usually posterior or subposterior, occasionally submedial. Palpi

on fourth segment with one or a few spines (besides accessory claw), on inner side

with a longer or smaller comb of stiff hairs and sometimes some spine-like setae.

Nasus absent (except Neotrombidium). Legs generally shorter than or as short

as body. Larvae with 1, 2 or 5 large dorsal plates, sometimes these followed by

rows of round or quadrate plates bearing setae. Eyes usually two on each side,

occasionally only one. Hind tarsi with 2 or 3 claws, modified or not. Lower lip

of mouth parts not ring-like.

Within this subfamily Sig Thor places the following:

Microtrombidium Haller 1882 (subg. Enemothrombium Berlese, 1910; Cam-

pylothrombium Krause, 1916); Dromeothrombium Berlese, 1912; Ettmiilleria

Oudemans, 1911 (larvae); Atomus Latr., 1795 (= Metathrombium Oudemans,

1911) ; Polydiscia Methlagl, 1927; Neotrombidiwm Leonardi, 1901; Georgia Hull,

1918; Calothrombium Berlese, 1918; Haplothrombium Ewine, 1925 (larvae) :

Dendrothrombiwm Sig Thor, 1936; Platythrombidium Sig Thor, 1936; Camero-

thrombium Sig Thor, 1936.

In 1935 (Zool. Anz. cix, 111) in defining his subfamily Sig Thor expressed

the opinion that Hnemothrombidium and Campylothrombium should be regarded

as only subgenera of Microtrombidium. Later, however (Zool. Anz. 1936, exiv,

30-31) he further split up the Microtrombidium complex and erected three addi-

tional new genera, Dendrothrombium, Platythrombidium and Camerothrombium

on corresponding differences in hair structure. As restricted in the present paper

both Mnemothrombidium and Campylothrombium are regarded as of generi¢

status in accordance with Sig Thor’s later paper. The genus Centrothrombiwm

Krause, for reasons stated earlier, is also included in this subfamily. Here also

the following new genera are erected and defined : Hchinothrombium (type Ottonia

spinosum Canest.) ; Laminothrombium (type M. myrmicum Womersley, 1934) ;

Eutrichothrombium (type M.(H.) eutrichum Berlese, 1905).

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 83

The larval genus Bthmiillerca, allhongl evidence is mot conclusive. would

uppear to be the larval stage of Aehinathrombitum or Camerathrambinm, more

probably the latter (see Womersley 1986, J. Linn. Soc. London, xl, 114)-

6.

Key to Toe Genera OF MickorrRoMBIDITINAE,

Larval forms .. nm — 3 = 3. 2

Adult forms 4 , A ci = a a Dh

With two large dorsal shields which are punctate. Inner claw of tarsus TTT

strongly modified, short stump-like and directed backwards, Palpi with

vlaws ie if be cs 43 as oe oS

One or five large dorsal shields; if one, then this followed by a series of rows

of large dorsal shields. Tuner claw of tarsus TTT not as above .. face hy

whe dorsal setae behind the second shield placed on small round plates, Tes

2+ 2, sessile. .. . Gen. Ettinilleria Oudeinans, 1911,

No small plates behind seenta shield. Hives 2 + 2, sessile.

Gen, A fomus Latr.. 1795,

(= Metathrombinm Ondemans, 1909 (not Australian),

With 5 large transverse dorsal shields. Eyes 1-1. Tarsus of lee TIT with

only two claws, one long and one short, and a lone stiff seta with lone seeon-

dary hairlets ., Gen, Hoplathrombium Ewing, 1925 (not Australian).

With one large dorsal plate, this honr-class shaped aud porous: the dorsum

behind ocenpied by 16 large quadrate plates each bearing a seta. Eves 2 + 2.

sessile, on small plates. Claws on all tarsi unmodified.

Gen. Polydiseva Methlagl, 1927 (not Anstralian).

With a distinet nasus. Dorsal body hairs uniform. trifureate from hase, with

few or no serrations x 4 Gen. Neotrombidiim Leonardi, 1911.

Without a nasus . is . ee bt oe a- 8G:

Sensillary area of crista aibmedial: Palpi with strone accessory claw, three

atronst spines on inner side and 8—9 on outer side of tibia. Body hairs short

hut strong, frequently bifureated from hase, the arms sometimes expanded

and forming an enclosure, with strong hairlets.

Gen. Calathrambinin Berlose, 1918.

Sensillary area of erista posterior or subposterior . ran

Palpal tarsus clavate, apically with two strong lone forwardly directed spines;

tibia with long apical claw and small accessory claw. Pseudostigmal hairs

elavate (Onudemans). Eyes 2 + 2.

Gen. Centratrambidium Krause. 1896 (not Australian),

Not so . . . of nt 7 . 8.

Dorsal hairs nniformly of one type bn sometimes of variahle length oO

Dorsal hairs of two distinet types . . at ae

Dorsal hairs tapering, pointed, with lone outstanding hairlets rs .. 10,

Gen, Wierotvambidium Haller. 1882,

Dorsal hairs different - rm is a. . ik

84

10.

11.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Legs I and IV shorter than the body. Subg. Microtrombidiwm Maller, 1882.

Legs I and IV longer than body. Sube. Dromeothrombium Berlese, 1912.

Dorsal body hairs long and spine-like with few serrations. Palpal tibia with

one large accessory claw and a few spine-like setae,

Gen. Echinothrombium nov. (part).

(type O. spinosum Canest., 1877).

Not so. AC . 43 riage,

Dorsal body hairs tree- like with fine intermingling iceman. Palpal tibia

laterally with a strong forwardly directed spine. Tarsi T oval, broad, much

longer than metatarsus.

Gen. Dendrothrombium Sig Thor, 1936 (not Australian).

Not so. ey : Nd - Ae ss .. 18.

Dorsal body hairs not senate ce Li, 4 oF .. 14.

Dorsal hody hairs septate, divided into chambers Po “ .. 16

Dorsal body hairs sessile, short, conical, pointed with numerous short cilia-

tions. Palpal tibia laterally with at least one, often many, strong spines.

Tarsus T generally elongate-oval, longer than metatarsus.

Gen. Platythrombium Sig Thor, 1936.

Not so. + ar - ws m4 .. pal ER,

Dorsal body hairs more or less sessile, arising from short conical tubercles,

leaf-like with marginal! ciliations. Palpal tibia with strong accessory claw and

without strong dorsal spines. Tarsus T short and broad.

Gen. Laminothrombiwm nov.

(type M. myrmicwm Wom., 1934).

Dorsal body hairs on short peduneles, claviform, apically acute or rounded,

with short ciliations we Gen. Enemothrombium Berlese, 1905 (part).

Dorsal body hairs short stalked or sessile, cup-like with short stiff ciliations.

Gen. Camerothrombium Sig Thor, 1936 (part).

Dorsal body hairs long, claviform and not cup-shaped, backwardly curved,

with subapical septum and open apex.

Gen. Campylothrombium Krause, 1916 (part) (not Australian).

Many of the dorsal hairs with thick stems and long strong hairlets and multi-

ramous apically, the rami being as thick as the stem; other hairs equally thick

with long hairlets but not ramous Gen. Georgia Hull, 1918 (not Australian).

Not so . + Pi i+ aie Pe! ts |, Be

Shorter hairs as in Microtrombidium; larger hairs stout, spine-like with few

or no serrations x a Gen. Echinothrombium nov. (part).

Shorter hairs otherwise .. . ls - me «3 9.

Longer hairs septate ate ol oe ae: ap .. 20.

Longer hairs not septate .. : 6 +3 a Baad Be

Longer hairs elongate, claviform, open at apex.

Gen. “Campylothrombium Krause, 1916 (part) (not Australian).

Longer hairs cup-like or globose, on short peduncles.

Gen. Camerothrombium Sig Thor, 1936 (part).

WoMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES a5

21, Shorter hairs sessile, short, conical, pointed, with numerous ciliations, as in

Platythrombidium, oy else without ciliations and with 4-5 short apical fungi-

form lobes; longer hairs clayiform or rod-like with many ciliations.

Gen. Hnemothrombiwm Berlese, 1905 (part).

Shorter hairs globose; without septa, closely packed but with longer fine setae

interspersed hs .t .. Gen. Butrichothrombium nov.

(type W.(#.) eutrichwm Berlese, 1905) (not Australian).

Genus ErrmMu.LuEria Oudemans, 1911.

This larval genus is, so far, represented in Australia by the following two

species.

ETTMULLERLA AUSTRALIS Womersley, 1936.

Reared trom eggs which may have been those of a species of Echinothrombium

or Camerothrombiwm trom Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

EvrMunLeria OvscuRA Womersley, 1936.

Only known from a single individual found in moss from Glen Osmond, South

Australia,

Genus Nrorrompipium Leonardi, 1901.

Represented in Australia by a single species N. barringunense Hirst 1923,

which is known from New South Wales and South Australia.

Genus CaLorHrombiuM berlese, 1918.

To this genus should be referred the following three species.

CALOTHROMBIUM RETENTUS (Banks, 1916).

= Rhyncholophus retentus Banks, 1916.

= Microtrombidium retentus Womersley, 1934.

The longer dorsal hairs often bifurcated with straight branches. Palpal tarsus

with 3 inner spines, ‘Tarsus | four times as long as high and only slightly longer

than metatarsus.

This species is only known from the type material from Victoria,

CALOTHROMBIUM KOORDANUM (Hirst, 1928).

= Microtrombidium koordanum Hirst 1928, Womersley 1934.

The longer dorsal hairs bi- or triturcaie trom base, the branches widened, leaf-

like and forming more or less of au enclosure between the leaves. Palpi with

clavate tarsus. ‘Tarsi | twice as long as high and equal in length to metatarsus.

Only known from type material from Koorda, Western Australia.

86 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

CALOTHROMBIUM TUBBI Sp. nov.

(Text fig. I a-d).

Description. Colour reddish. Length 1-923 mm., width 1-29 mm. Eyes

2 + 2 sessile, placed well forward on anterior margin of thorax. Crista 345 long

with posterior sensillary area and two pseudostigmal hairs. Palpi 4380p long,

femur almost cylindrical and but little swollen, tibia with large blunt apical claw

and smaller accessory claw behind which are two spines, tarsus long and cylindrical

reaching tip of claw. Legs short; I 1345y, tarsus elliptical 2834 by 170u, meta-

tarsus 173n; I) 8654; LL 770%; 1V 1070u. Dorsal hairs uniform, bifurcated at

base, one branch being fan- or leaf-like and convex, the other branch elongate and

curved in towards the fan, both branches with long ciliae.

Locality. A single specimen collected by Mr. H. Tubb at Heathmont, Vic-

toria, July 28th, 1934.

Genus Microrrompipium Haller, 1882.

Subgenus DromEotHRoMBIUM Berlese, 1912.

This is separated from the subgenus Microtrombidium s. str. by the great

length of the first and fourth legs. The following Australian species should be

placed here.

MicroTroMBipiumM (DROMEOTHROMBIUM) ATTOLUS (Banks, 1916).

= Rhyncholophus attolus Banks, 1916.

= Microtrombidium attolus Womersley, 1934.

Only known from the type material from Sydney, New South Wales.

Subgenus Microtrompipium Haller, 1882, s. str.

Nine Australian species can be referred to this subgenus in the restricted sense.

They may be keyed as follows:

1. Eyes wanting. Front tarsus 4 times as long as high. Dorsal hairs long and

slender, 26n, tapering with long hairlets. Palpal tibia with 2 or 3 accessory

claw-like spines Fs a: M.(M.) barringunense Hirst, 1928.

Eyes present, two on each side, sessile a ut fs va oD

2. Front tarsus elongate, at least 24 times as long as high with straight sides which

are parallel or converge perceptibly apically .. bag re we

Front tarsus elliptical with rounded sides, at most only slightly more than twice

as long as high .. x t'. iy bet ah LOA

1

WOoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 87

arsus | 204, by Sop, with sides converging towards apex, metatarsus 136p,

Ilairs variable in length op to 65,2, with long ontstanding hairlets, Palpal

Libia with accessory claw and three strong spines on inner side, without lateral

forwardly directed spine .. .. MACM.) westraliense Womersley, 1984,

Hront tarsus with parallel sides, 4154 by 185, metatarsus 255n. Dorsal hairs

variable in length up to 50u, with long hairlets which on some of the longer

hairs lie closer apically givine a clavate bushy appearance. Palpal tibia with

strong accessory claw and laterally a strong forwardly directed spine.

M.(M.) myloriense sp. nov.

Front tarsus broadest basally, with a very distinet basal angle. Dorsal hairs

35. Palpal tibia with accessory claw he "4 Sc cD

Front tarsus broadest in the middle, without distinct basal angle . we «6.

Smaller species, 1190p, tarsus 1 twice as long as high, 2724 by 136, metatarsus

1é6u. Dorsal setae 35, long ts MAM.) karriense Womersley, 1984,

Larger species 2040, tarsus | 450 by 270p, metatarsus longer (ham tarsus is

high, 300u. Dorsal setae 38d long -. M.CM.) tasmanicum sp. nov,

Dorsal hairs 264, tapering, uniform in length, tarsus 1 272” by 136, sides

strongly and evenly curved, widest in middle, metatarsus 2702, Palpal tibia

with accessory claw, without strong lateral spine, Length 1275p,

M.(M.) wequalis (Banks, 1916),

Dorsal hairs 40 or more long, wniform i ifs o DL

Dorsal hairs variable in length to 52, longer ones bushy at apex and appearing

somewhat clavate. Tarsus 1, 2200 by 90u, broadest in middle, Palpal tarsus

with accessory elaw. Length 9804 .. ». M(M.) newman Wom, 1934,

Dorsal hairs 40p Jong, uniform e*, Syd ri ba rar VB

Tarsus | U87p by 102,, widest in middle, metatarsus 102 long. Palpal tibia

with accessory ¢law followed by a dorsal series of spines, Length 1000, by

1100p i4 iz t M.A(M.) adeluidicum Wom, 1928,

Tarsus | 2724 by 1362; widest medially, metatarsus nearly as long as tarsus,

2584. Palpal tibia with accessory claw and series of spines. Length to 1200p.

M.(M.) affine Hirst, 1928,

Micvxorroweipium (M.) BARRTNGUNENSE Hirst, 1928.

Only known from the type material from Barringnno, New South Wales,

Micnorrowemro (M.) wesrranixss Womersley, 1954.

Fouad associated with ants in Western Anstralia,

Microrromeimie mM (M.) Karetensts Womersley, 1934,

This species is widely clistvibuted in South Australia, and | have vecords of

i trom Morialta Gorge, September 2ud, 19384; Mount Osmond, June LOth, 1954;

Mylor, September Tdth, 1985; Mount Conipass, June 7th, 1985; National Park,

Belair, May 6th, 1985, July 19th, 1936, July 4th, 1987; Adelaide, May 11th, 1936;

Mount Lofty, May, 1937.

88 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Microtrompipium (M.) amquauis (Banks, 1916).

As stated in my previous paper, the type of this species appears to have become

lost, but a second record from Western Australia was given.

MicrotrompBipium (M.) NewMaAni Womersley, 1934.

Only known from the type record of Bedford-dale, Western Australia.

MicrorromsBipium (M.) Arrine Hirst, 1928.

This species is fairly common in and around the Adelaide district of South

Australia.

Microtrompipium (M.) aApELAIDIcCUM Womersley, 1934.

Not uncommon around Adelaide, South Australia.

Microrrompipium (M.) MYLORIENSE sp. nov.

(Text fig. 1, e-g).

Description. Length 1:91 mm., width 1-335 mm. Colour reddish. Abdomen

ovate, with moderately rounded shoulders, thorax small 550% wide; eyes 2 + 2,

sessile, placed on lateral edge of thorax; crista short, 300u long, sensillary area

broad with two pseudostigmal hairs, anterior arm of crista two-thirds as wide as

sensillary area. No nasus. Palpal tibia with strong apical claw and accessory

claw, laterally a strong forwardly projecting spine and on outer side of tibia with

a number of strong spines; tarsus slightly clavate, reaching tip of claw. Legs

shorter than body, I 1600,, tarsus I with almost parallel sides, 415 by 135, meta-

tarsus 235 long. Body hairs slightly variable in length, 25—50u, pointed with

long hairlets but in some of the longer ones the apical hairlets tend to cling giving

a brush-like appearance.

Locality. Two specimens from under a stone along Cox Creek, Mylor, South

Australia, September 26, 1937.

MicrorrompBipium (M.) TASMANICUM sp. nov.

(Text fig. 1, k-n).

Description. Length 2-0 mm. Colour reddish. Abdomen ovate without

distinet shoulders, 1-2 mm. wide, thorax 600 wide without nasus. Eyes 2 + 2,

sessile, placed on anterior margins of thorax; crista 430 long with posterior sen-

sillary area and two pseudostigmal hairs. Palpal tibia with strong apical and

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 89

accessory claws and on outer side with some strong setae, apparently without

lateral forwardly directed spine; tarsus not clavate, reaching tip of claw. Legs

shorter than body; tarsus 1 450. by 270u, elliptical, broadest before the middle,

metatarsus 300» long. Dorsal body hairs uniform, with strong lateral hairlets, but

not forming a distinct apical taper; length of hairs 30-35p.

Locality. Two specimens collected by Mr. J. W. Evans on Mount Wellington,

Tasmania, October, 1935,

Wig, 1. acd. Culothrombium tubbi sp, noy,; a, anterior end showing eyes and erista; b, tip

of palp; ¢, front tarsus anil metatarsus; d, dorsal seta. e-g, Microtrombidium (M.) myloriense

sp. nov.; ¢, tip of pulp; f, front tarsus and metatarsus; g, dorsal seta. lj, Hnemothrombiunm

cvansi sp. noy.; h, tip of palp; i, front tarsus and metatarsus; j, dorsal seta. k-u, Microtron-

bidium CAL) tasmanicun sp. nov.; k, eaterior end showing eyes and crista; |, tip of palp; m, front.

tarsus and metatarsus; n, dorsal seta,

Genus EouinoruROMBIUM nov.

As in Microtrombidiwin s. str. but all or some of the body hairs long stronz

aud spine-like with relatively few or no short serrations.

The type of the genus is Olfouty spinoswm Canestvini 1877, and other species

are M. cehidninwn Uirst, 1991 (= MM. wicleriense Womersley, 1954) ; AL. spina-

tun Womersley, 1934; O. hystricinum Canestrini; diverstpile Canestrini; JM.

southealli Womersley, 1934; M. willangae Hirst, 1931.

Of these spindhon, echidninum, southeottd and willungae are Australian,

spinoswin is Kuropean while hystriedumn and diversipiie are known from New

(ruinea.

90 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Key To THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ECHINOTHROMBIUM.

1. All the dorsal spines variable in length but uniform and spinelike with short

serrations. Tarsus | 270 by 135y, elliptical, metatarsus 190, long. Palpal

tarsus clavate, tibia with terminal and accessory claw and two spines.

E. spinatum (Wom., 1934).

Dorsal spines interspersed with different setae, short, smaller, with long hair-

lets “4 oa a0 hc we oe é fe

2. Dorsal spines sparsely and minutely serrated, tapering apically, 200-230.

long; smaller setae 25, pointed with comparatively long hairlets. Tarsus I

32 times as long as high, sides almost parallel. E. echidninum (Hirst, 1931).

= victoriense (Wom., 1934).

Dorsal spines not much more than 100, long; shorter setae not so pointed, wit

relatively shorter hairlets. Front tarsus elliptical. Species smaller vars.

3. Front tarsus twice as long as high .. .. . southcotti (Wom., 1934).

Front tarsus three times as long as high ve L, willungae (Hirst, 1931).

ECHIDNINUM sPINAtuM (Womersley, 1934).

The type of this species was collected at Glen Osmond, South Australia.

ECHINOTHROMBIUM ECHIDNINUM (Hirst, 1931).

= M. echidninum Hirst, 1931.

M.(E.) victoriensis Womersley, 1934.

This is one of the most abundant Trombid mites in South Australia. It is

undoubtedly synonymous with my species M.(E.) victoriensis.

EcCHINOTHROMBIUM souTHcortr (Womersley, 1934).

= M.(E.) southcotti Womersley, 1934.

Described from material from Belair, South Australia.

Genus PLATYTHROMBIDIUM Sig Thor, 1936.

To this genus belongs the single Australian species.

PLATYTHROMBIDIUM PARANUM (Hirst, 1928).

= Microtrombidium paranum Hirst 1928, Womersley 1934.

This species is only known from the type material from Gawler, South

Australia.

Genus LAMINOTHROMBIUM nov.

Dorsal body hairs leaf-like with strong midrib and marginal ciliations. Front

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 91

tarsi elliptical, width more than half the length. Palpal tibia with strong apical

and accessory claws.

The type and only species of this genus is

LAMINOTHROMBIUM MyRMIcUM (Womersley, 1934).

= MM. myrmicum Womersley, 1934.

Described from material from the nest of ants in South Australia.

Genus EnemoturompiuM Berlese, 1905, s. str.

As restricted in the generie key this genus will include the two following

species :

HNEMOTHROMBIUM CYGNUS Womersley, 1936.

= M.(L.) cygnus Womersley, 1936.

Deseribed from a single specimen from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island,

South Australia.

ENEMOTHROMBIUM BYANSI Sp. nov.

(Text fig. 1 h-j).

Description, Length 1-1 mm., width 0-7 mm. Colour in life reddish. Eyes

2-+ 2, sessile and placed on anterior margin of thorax, Crista 160 long, well

developed with posterior seusillary area and two pseudostigimal hairs. Palpal

tibia with strong apical and subapical accessory claws, dorsally with a series of

strong spines running right to base and laterally and twardly with another

shorter series. Legs shorter than body; tarsus | elliptical 1764 by 100.2, widest in

middle, metatarsus 954 long. Dorsal body hairs of approximately uniform length,

sessile, cylindrical, with blunt apex and with longitudinal lines of fine serrations.

Locality. The type of this species was found by Max. J. W. Evans in a rotten

log on Mount Wellington, Tasmania, in May, 1935, A second specimen was from

moss from Brisbane, Queensland, in October, 1934, and a third from Fern Tree

Gully, Vietoria, in January, 1937.

Genus CAMBROTHROMBIUM Sig Thor, 1936.

g

Sig Thor places in this genus the following Australian species: £7. simile Lirst,

FE. collinwm Wirst and £. hirsti Womersley. To them should be added &. wyandrue

Hirst. These four species may be separated as follows:

1, Sialler dorsal hairs cup-shaped with minute denticles . uy +, 72,

Smaller dorsal hairs otherwise se se ny , pe ~B.

92 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

bo

Larger dorsal hairs with stem suddenly expanding to form cup. Tarsus I

three and a half times as long as high M3 C. simile (Hirst, 1928).

Larger dorsal hairs with stem gradually expanding to form cup. Tarsus I

less than 3 times as long as high =... Sy C. hirsti (Wom., 1934).

3. Smaller dorsal hairs very irregular, with small lateral fungiform lobes. Tarsus

I more than 4 times as long as high .. .. C. wyandrae (Hirst, 1928).

Smaller dorsal hairs more regular, rod-like. Tarsus I more than 3 times as

long as high pe a Ae af C. collunum (Hirst, 1928).

CAMEROTHROMBIUM SIMILE (Hirst, 1928).

= M.(E.) simile Hirst, 1928.

= M.(E.) simile Womersley, 1934.

This species is fairly widely distributed in South Australia.

CAMEROTHROMBIUM Hirst1 (Womersley, 1934).

= M.(E.) hirstt Womersley, 1934.

As yet known from the type material only.

CAMEROTHROMBIUM WYANDRAE (Hirst, 1928).

= M. wyandrae Hirst, 1928.

Only known from the type material.

CAMEROTHROMBIUM COLLINUM (Hirst, 1928).

= M. collinum Hirst, 1928.

There are no further records beyond that of the type material.

Genus EKuTrRICHOTHROMBIUM nov.

Dorsal body hairs globular, on peduncles, without septa and interspersed with

fine longer needle-like setae; globular hairs finely ciliated. Palpal tibia without

true accessory claw but with a few dorsal setae and with a strong inner lateral for-

wardly directed spine. Tarsi elliptical.

This new genus is erected for the Javanese species H. eutrichwm Berlese, 1903.

?

Subfamily VIII, Tromsipiwar Michael, 1883 (part), Sig Thor, 1936.

Body large or very large, triangular or cordate, thickly covered with elongate

or clavate or ciliated or feathered hairs, generally reddish. No nasus. Eyes

paired on long peduncles. Crista with sensillary area and two pseudostigmal

WoOMERSLEY—-AUSTRALIAN MITES 93

hairs; sometimes the crista is tripartite, usually entire, always narrow. Palpi

large; tarsus long and clavate, tibia simple with apical claw but no accessory claw

or comb. Legs short and thick, tarsi without pulvill1.

Included here ure the genera Trombidium Fab. 1775 (= NSericothrombium

Berlese, 1910) ; Dinothrombiwmn Oudemans, 1910 (= Trombidium Berlese, 1905) ;

Yenothrombium Oudemans, 1927: Caenolhrombinm Oudemans, 1927; and Austro-

thrombium Womersley, 1984. They may he keyed thns:

1. Crista divided into three parts, with broad sensillary area, anterior arnt ending

in a broacl rectangular plate in whieh the front marein is straight or only

slightly eoneave. Gen. Dinothrombiam Ondemans, 1910 (not Australian).

Crista entire i. tt ee .- . + ilies

2. Crista with the seusillary area medial, anterior arm simple aha not ending in

a plate .. wa .. Gen, Venathrombiam Ondemans, 1927.

Crista with the sohailavy area anterior of middle aD Ay ote AE

2 Body bairs claviform ov brnsh-like; apex of abdomen incised,

Gen, Trambidinn Bab,, 1775.

(Laryae with two dorsal plates, front plate with 3 pairs of setae and 2 psendo-

stigmal hairs. Claw of maxillary palp bifureate. Median dorsal plate trans-

verse; front plate folding below to venter. Mouth-parts not visible from

above, lower lip ring-like, Leg TYT with deformed inner claw.)

Not so; crista anteriorly with a broad transyerse plate . . mw 4

4. Anterior plate of erista very deeply cleft, so as to appear fork-like,

Gen, Austrathromhinn Womersley, 1934.

Anterior plate of erista with straight or only shghtly concave front marein,

Cen. Caenothrombium Oudemans, 1927.

Genus Xeno turRomMetnM Oudemans, 1927.

Only represented in Australia by the following recently ciscovered species,

XENOTHROMEIUM HIRSUTUM sp. NOV,

(Text fie. 2 e-7.)

Description. Length to 3-0 mm., width 1-5 mm., with a distinet constriction

behind the shoulders. Colour bright red. Crista well developed with the sen-

sillary area anterior of the middle, anterior arm simple and not ending in a

transverse plate. Eyes 2 + 2, peduneculate. Palpi as figured, tarsus long, clavate,

and reaching tip of elaw. legs shorter than body, strong; tarsus [ 654» by 211)p,

more or less with parallel sides, metatarsus 480. Body thickly clothed with very

long ciliated hairs, mostly up to 8300p long and red, but some up to 7-800u and

white (ef. fig. 2j).

94 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Locality. This species has so far been found only at the National Park, Belair,

South Australia, 1936 and since. It is moderately common under stones and fallen

branches.

Genus CAENOTHROMBIUM Oudemans, 1927,

This seems to be the dominant genus in South Australia, no fewer than ten

species having been described to date.

N72 (3

5555555

Fig. 2. a-d, Caenothrombium furcatum sp. nov.; a, erista and eyes; b, palp; ¢, front tarsus

and metatarsus with claws enlarged; d, dorsal seta. e—j, Xenothrombium hirsutum sp. nov.;

e, dorsal view; f, crista; g, front tarsus and metatarsus; h, palp; i, shorter dorsal seta; j, longer

dorsal seta.

Key TO THE SPECIES.

1, Anterior two pairs of legs with bifureate, occasionally trifureate, claws; pos-

terior two pairs with simple claws. Tarsus I nearly 4 times as lone as high,

with parallel sides; metatarsus # length of tarsus. Dorsal hairs 70p long,

pointed, with long hairlets . es a5 .. C. furcatum, sp. nov.

All tarsal claws simple .. & is oe ns 332:

2. Dorsal body hairs of two sizes. Front tarsus 3 times as lone as high, 425, lone.

C. montivagum (Hirst, 1928).

= rainbow (Hirst, 1929).

Dorsal body hairs more uniform od . we

3. Front tarsus very elongate, about 7 times as ‘tone as high. Length of animal

2-4 mm. = an 7 C. augustae (Hir st, 1928).

Front tarsus much shorter, not sxvoading 4% times as long as high J OA,

4. Front and hind legs much longer than body. Front tarsus 44 times as long

as high, 780 by 175. A large well defined white patch on each shoulder and

another at apex of abdomen ! i C. album Womersley, 1934.

Front and hind legs scarcely exuceding length of body .. es pant Ds

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 95

4. Species not exceeding 4-0 mm. in length

a

Species more than 4-0 mm, long os Mi 3 : f

fi, Front tarsus 444 times as long as high. Dorsal body hairs 60-90, lone,

slender, tapering with long hairlets a C. farridwm (Wirst, 1928).

= taylori (Hirst, 1928).

Front tarsus almost 4 times as long as high. Dorsal body hairs stont, blint

and strongly ciliated, 60« long ir .. ©. miniatum Womersley, 1934.

Front tarsus 24 times as long as high, Body hairs fairly stout and reaching

60. in leneth .. 2 ok .. OC. nyunganense (Hirst, 1928),

7. Posterior dorsal hairs short and stout, parallel sided, with short hairlets, often

slightly swollen distally, 50-604 long and slightly eurved. Front tarsus 44

times as long as high a. * .. Cy sericatum (Rainbow, 1906).

= splendidum. (Tirst, 1928).

= ventricosum (Tlirst, 1928).

Posterior hody hairs longer and straighter, 75p long, more tapering and never

swollen distally. Front tarsus 3 times as long as high.

C. crassum (Hirst, 1928),

Posterior body hairs longer still, 1504, slightly curved, more tapering and

delicate 3 Ha ic C. nobile (Tirst, 1928),

CAENOTHROMBIUM FURCATUM sp. nov.

(Text fie. 2a-d.)

Description, Length to 1-73 mm., width 1-0 mm. Colour light red with a

tendency to white patches or bands behind the shoulders. Crista well developed

with a broad sensillary area antero-medially and with two pseudostiemal hairs:

anterior plate of crista with slightly concave front margin. Eyes 2 + 2, on lone

peduncles, posterior eve the smaller, Front tarsus 397, by 110, metatarsus 318,.

Tarsi of legs I and TT with bifwreated claws occasionally one or other claw trifur-

cate; claws of legs IIT and TV simple. Leg I 1-53 mm., 11 1-21 mm., [11 1-10 mm.,

IV 1-69 mm. Palpal tibia with long strong apical claw; tarsus long and clavate.

Dorsal body hairs arising from short conical tubercles, 70. long, tapering to a

point and with long strong hairlets.

Locality. Three specimens from a small paddock at Wood’s Point, South

Australia, Oelober 24th, 1935 (H.W.).

CAENOTHROMBIUM MONTIVAGIM (Tlirst, 1928).

= Microtrombidium montivaqum Hirst, 1928.

Dinothrombinm montivagum Hirst, 1929,

Pinothrombium rainbour Hirst, 1929.

Cornothrombium montivaguin Womersley, 1934.

There are no fresh records for this species,

96 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

CAENOTHROMBIUM AUGUSTAE (Hirst, 1928).

= Dinothrombium augustae Hirst, 1928.

Caenothrombium augustae Womersley, 1934.

This species is fairly widely distributed in the southern parts of South

Australia.

CAENOTHROMBIUM ALBUM Womersley, 1934.

Also a fairly widely distributed species.

CAENOTHROMBIUM TORRIDUM (Hirst, 1929).

= Dinothrombium torridum Hirst, 1929.

Dinothrombium taylori Hirst 1929.

Caenothrombium torridum Womersley, 1934.

This appears to be rather an uncommon species in the southern part of South

Australia.

CAENOTHROMBIUM MINIATUM Womersley, 1934.

Not uncommon around the Adelaide district.

CAENOTHROMBIUM NYNGANENSE (Hirst, 1928).

= Dinothrombium nynganense Hirst, 1928.

Caenothrombium nynganense Womersley, 1934.

Common and widely distributed in South Australia; it also occurs in New

South Wales.

CAENOTHROMBIUM cRASSUM (Hirst, 1928).

= Dinothrombium crassum Hirst, 1928.

Caenothrombium crassum Womersley, 1934.

Only known from previously published records.

CAENOTHROMBIUM SERICATUM (Rainbow, 1906).

= Trombidium sericatum Rainbow, 1906.

Dinothrombium splendidum Hirst, 1928.

Dinothrombium ventricosum Hirst, 1928.

Caenothrombium sericatum Womersley, 1934.

T have no further records of this species to add to those already published.

WOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 97

CAENOTHROMBIUM NOBILE (Ehirst, 1928).

= Dinothvombium nobile Hirst, 1928.

Caenothrombium nabile Womersley, 1934.

No additional records.

Genus AustrotHrompium Womersley, 1934.

Of this genus the three following species only are known from Australia :

AUSTROTHROMPIUM AUSTRALIENSE (Hirst, 1929).

=Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) wustraliense Tirst, 1929.

slustrothrombium australtiense Womersley, 1934,

There are no further specimens to be recorded.

AUSTROTHROMBIUM INSIGNE (Hirst, 1928).

= Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) insiqne TWirst, 1928,

Austrothrombium imsigne Womersley, 1934,

T know of no further specimens of this species,

AvUsTROTHROMBIUM KONDINTUM (Hirst, 1928).

= Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) antipodianum v. kondinium Virst, 1928.

Allothrombium (Mesothrombium) kondiniwm Hirst, 1929,

Austrathrombium kondiniwm Womersley, 1934.

Only known from the previously published records.

Genus Trompipium Fab., 1775.

No adult species of this genus has yet been found in Australia, but the follow-

ing larval form has recently been discovered by the writer.

TROMBIDIUM CLARKT Sp. noy.

(Text fig. 3a-f.)

Description, Length 2-3 mm., width 1-5 mm, Colour red. Month parts

not visible from above, lower lip forming a chitinous ring. Anterior dorsal plate

only slighlty showing on the dorsal surface, mostly veniral, 175p wide posteriorly

and 112 anteriorly, finely and longitudinally striate, with three pairs of hairs

and one pair of long fine pseudostigmal hairs. Posterior plate wide and short,

142y by 50p, longitudinally striated with two hairs, 4 times its own length from

98 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the anterior plate. Eyes small, 2-2. Dorsal body hairs short, fine with few

ciliations and sparse, in 5 rows of 2, 4, 4, 4, 2. Legs: anterior pairs of coxae

adjacent, tarsi with three claws, front two pairs with the middle claw long and

slender, lateral claws stouter, shorter and subapically trifurcate; inner claw on

leg III modified, stump-like and directed backwards, outer claw spine-like with

long hairlets, middle one short and sickle shaped. Venter with three pairs of

hairs behind third legs.

Fig. 3.

c, entire dorsal view; d, front claws; e, posterior claws; f, dorsal seta.

a-f, Trombidium clarki sp. nov.; a, anterior half from above; b, same from below;

Locality. Several specimens taken from an Anthomyid fly at Fern Tree

Gully, Victoria, in January, 1937. It is named in honour of Mr. J. Clark, Entomo-

logist 10 the National Museum, Melbourne.

Subfamily 1X, AtLorHrompiinak Sig Thor, 1936.

Body larger, with strong shoulders, rounded, with bristle-like feathered,

seldom fureate hairs, Hyes 2 + 2 on long peduncles. Crista distinctly tripartite,

WoOMERSLEY—AUSTRALIAN MITES 99

with large broad, cross- or heart-shaped sensillary area which is placed on or in

front of the middle; sensillary area with two pseudostigmal hairs. Palpi large,

with large apical claw but without accessory claw or comb of spines. Legs short

or moderately long, tarsi with characteristic pulvilli or on the onter side of each

claw with a brush-like bristle (in Coreothrothrombwum).

The two genera Allothrombiwm Berlese 1908 and Coreothrothrombium Oude-

mans 1928, are placed in this subfamily. Only the first of these is known from

Australia.

Key vo tHe AusgTRALIAN Specius or ALLOTHROMBIUM.

1. Up to 1-2 mm, in length, sparse haired; form rather elongate and much con-

stricted behind shoulders. Body hairs uniform aud with few long secondary

hairlets a he 4 A, delicatulum Womersley, 1954.

Large species... a Fr oe én 2% a 2,

2. Dorsum with a distinct pattern of red and white. Some of the body hairs very

much elongated F wie m; A, guitatum Hirst, 1928.

= ornatum Hirst, 1928,

Colour entirely red er, a: #, ake ba va) By

3. Body hairs uniform, short, plumose. Front tarsus twice as long as high.

A, toyend poe Hirst, 1928.

Body hairs of two distinct types... oo OA

4, Longer body hairs more clavate apically, axial thread fiifehiee shorter hairs

more tapering apically... Y: a OAL antipodianum Hirst, 1926.

=v. olorinum Hirst, 1926.

parvulum Tirst, 1929.

? wasselt Hirst, 1931.

Lonver body hairs less clavate apically, the hairlets longer near the base, stall

apparently shorter; short hairs not tapering apieally.

A, lerrae-reginae Hirst, 1929.

ALLOTHROMBIUM DELICATULUM Womersley, 1934.

This small species is moderately abundant, under loose stones, fallen branches

and even on tree trunks in the National Park, Belair, South Australia.

ALLOTHROMBIUM GUTTATUM Hirst, 1928.

= Allothrombium guttaudum Hirst, 1928,

Allothrombium ornatwm TWirst, 1928,

Allothrombium quttatum Womersley, 1934.

T have no further records of this species since my earlier papers.

100 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ALLOTHROMBIUM ANTIPODIANUM Hirst, 1926.

= Allothrombium antipodianum Hirst, 1926.

Allothrombium antipodianum v. olorinum Hirst, 1926.

Allothrombium parvulum Hirst, 1929.

Allothrombium ? wasseli Hirst, 1931.

Allothrombium antipodianum Womersley, 1934.

I have no further records of this species. The species A. wasseli described

posthumously by Hirst appears to be identical with the above form as far as one

can judge by the description, the accompanying drawings of which were lost after

Hirst’s death.

ALLOTHROMBIUM TERRAE-REGINAE Hirst, 1929.

There is nothing further to add to the previously published data on this

species.

ALLOTHROMBIUM WYANDRAE Hirst, 1928.

Only known from the type material from Mount Kosciusko, N.S.W.

Subfamily X, SrycorHRomBiNaE Sig Thor, 1936.

Body small, elongate, worm-like, swollen dorsally, with only small rudimen-

tary hairs. Cuticle thin, striated, with low papillae. Crista similarly rudimen-

tary, narrow, anteriorly with weak areola which, near the two sensory hairs, has

4 or 5 fine hairs. Rostrum outstanding, behind flask-like, in front spoon-like, with

two bristles. Mandibles long and narrow with stylet-like claw. Palpal segments

weakly differentiated, fourth segment can be distinguished with the reduced fifth

attached ; segment II has 2 thorns and 6 long hairs, III 3 thorns and some hairs,

IV with a few hairs and a long thin end claw (no accessory claw). Legs with 3

claws, the lateral combed. Species living in water.

This subfamily is entirely unknown in Australia. It includes only the genus

Stygothrombium Veitz, 1932, and its subgenus Cerberothrombium Veitz, 1934.

EGGS AND EGG CASES OF SOME SOUTHERN

AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSCA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, CONCHOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Melo Miltonis Gray.

The South Australian Museum is indebted to the Director of the Western Australian

Museum (Mr. W. L. Glauert) for the opportunity of examining the egg capsule of the

Southern Australian Baler Shell, Melo miltonis Gray, and a series of seven juvenile

shells from Cottesloe, Western Australia.

The egg capsule is cylindrical, 165 mm. long, 75 mm. in diameter and contains 47

protoconchs. The protoconchs average 26 mm. in length and 16.5 mm. in greatest

width; they consist of four whorls, axially crinkled and finely, obsoletely, spirally

ribbed subsuturally. The last 3.5 mm. of the outer lip has the typical triangular white

blotches on the light brown ground, while the rest of the protoconch is uniformly

cream coloured. In an adult specimen, 10 mm. of the protoconch rises above the shell.

EGGS anp EGG CASES or SOME SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN

MOLLUSCA

By BERNARD C, COTTON, Concuonncisr, Souwrn Austrataan Musrum.

Plate iy.

Meno minronts Gray.

Tue South Australian Museum is indebted to the Director of the Western Aus-

tralian Museum (Mr. W. L. Glauert) for the opportunity of examining the ege

capsule of the Southern Australian Baler Shell, Melo maltonis Gray, and a series

of seven juvenile shells from Cottesloe, Western Australia.

The ege capsule is cylindrical, 165 mm, long, 75 mm. in diameter and contains

47 protoconchs. The protoconchs average 26 mm. in length and 16-5 mm, in

greatest width ; they consist of four whorls, axially crinkled and finely, obsoletely,

spirally ribbed subsuturally. The last 3-5 mm. of the outer lip has the typical

triangular white blotches on the light brown ground, while the rest of the proto-

conch is uniformly cream coloured. In an adult specimen, 10 mm, of the proto-

vonech rises above the shell.

The protoconch of a common Queensland species, Melo flammeum Bolten,

measures 19 mm. in length and 13 mm. in ereatest width; an adult is half as bie

again asthe fully grown Melo milionis. There does not appear to be the subsutural

crinkling in the protoconch of Melo flammeum.

COMINELLA ADELAIDENSIS Grosse.

The type locality of the species is ‘Port Adelaide’’. This species or variety

is one of the Cominella lineolata group, very nearly allied, if not synonymous with

Cominella acutinodosa Reeve (type locality, South Australia), At the Outer

Harbour there is an isolated group of stones in the middle of a vast sand and mud

flat where Cominella adelaidensis is found in plenty, being the dominant molluscan

species.

The ege capsules are laid from the bezinning to the end of September, and all

appear to be hatched by the end of October. The egg capsules are acuminate

blunt at the point, slightly expanded at the base and attached individually in

irregular groups or lines folowing the depressions or cracks on the under surface

of the stones. Height 8 mm., width 4 mm,

102 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

User contcum Lamarck.

The collar-like egg nidi of this species are found in great numbers in spring

time after storms, and are flexible when wet and extremely brittle after drying.

Levens Beach, Yorke Peninsula and Holdfast Bay are two places where these

egg nidi are particularly common. Specimens usually range from 100-150 mm. in

diameter; smaller specimens are sometimes found, probably incomplete, only 59

mm. in diameter or less.

HAPLOCHLOAENA MACULOSA Hoyle.

This small ‘‘Octopus”’ is frequently found in Pinna dolabrata Lamarck, and

under rocky ledges at low tide in shallow water.

The eggs are attached individually by a delicate thin stalk to any convenient

sheltered surface. Those figured are attached to the inner surface of a dead valve

of the Port Lincoln Oyster (Ostrea sinuata Lamarck) colleeted at Dutton Bay by

the Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Mr. F. W. Moorhouse, in April, 1937.

The eggs are club-shaped, smooth, shining, and are attached in clusters by

their respective thin stalks. The cluster on the oyster contained about fifty eggs.

Measurements are as follows: Length of flask, 17 mm.; width, 6 mm.; stalk length,

5 mm.; width, 0-5 mm.

The female of this species broods over the eggs apparently syringing them

from the funnel.

During a collecting trip with Messrs. H. M. Hale, Leo Stach and K. Sheard, a

small adult female was taken at the Port Willunga Reef in shallow water. Evi-

dently disturbed in the act of brooding the specimen swam away dragging some

of the ova with her, and these were retained after capture. Some of the eggs on

the point of hatching were collected and placed in a bowl! of sea water, others not

secured hatched and the young were seen swimming in the rock pool.

Sixty-three young hatched out in the bowl; all consistently swam to the

shaded side, as did also the parent who adopted the inverted brooding attitude,

actually covering some of the young while clinging to the surface of the dish.

The funnel is proportionately larger in the juvenile, but the colour pattern is

similar in scheme to that of the adult, consisting of bluish bands on a cream

ground, the bands being regular and transverse on the arms, oblique and irregular

on the body. The average measurements of the newly-hatched young are as

follows: Total length, 11 mm.; length of body, 5 mm.; width of body 3-8 mm.;

length of funnel, 2 mm.; length of arms, 6 mm.

It is surprising to learn that in Robson’s Monograph of Recent Peleeypoda the

egos sizes of only nine Octopi are listed, probably the only available records.

CoTTON—EGGS OF SOME MOLLUSCA 103

Ova are best preserved in weak formalin as aleohol, even if diluted, shrinks

them hopelessly.

AMPLISEPIA APAMA Gray.

Thirty eggs of this species were taken on the beach of St. Vincent Gulf, he-

tween Glenelg and Henley Beach, in October, 1982, after a storm. A few speci-

mens placed in sea-water developed far enough to confirm the identification of the

species. The specimen figured measures 60 mm. in total length, the flask being

32 mm. long and 21 mm. wide. Further specimens were taken at Brighton in

November, 1933, so that October and November can be definitely cited as the

breeding months.

SEPIOTEUTHIS AUSTRALIS Quoy and Gainard.

’

Bunches of ege@ nidi of this species were cast ashore in large numbers after

the above-mentioned storm of October, 1932. They are particularly common on

the beach during early spring.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV.

Cominella acutinodosa Crosse, single egg capsule, lateral view (X 6).

Cominella acutinodosa Crosse, single ege capsule, top view (X 6).

Fominella acutinodosa Crosse, group of egg capsules (> 1-25).

|

-_—

Fh Ee

ie oo; No

Amplisepia apama Gray, single egg (nat. size).

Fig. 5. Melo miltonis Gray, ege capsule (< 0-6).

Fig. 6. Melo miltonis Gray, protoconch showing commencement of colourations

(xX 1-6).

Fig. 7. Melo miltonis Gray, protoconch showing aperture (X 1-6).

Fig. 8. Haplochlaena maculosa Hoyle, eggs attached to Ostrea sinuata Lamarck

(X 0:6).

Rec. S.A, Muskum Vou. VI, PLATE. LV.

6 7

MOLLUSCAN BEGGS AND EGG CAPSULES.

Je

A NOTE ON THE OCCURRENCE OF RHABDOPLEURA

ANNULATA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS

By PROFESSOR T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE

Summary

The only published reference to the presence of Rhabdopleura in Australian waters is

that of Harmer (1904, p. 23) who found in South Australian material a fragment

which he did not determine specifically. Norman (1921, p.98) described R. annulata

from localities close to the Three Kings, a group of islands lying to the north of New

Zealand. His material consisted of coenoecia found on stones and on a shell dredged

from depth of 183 and 549 metres.

A NOTE on Toe OCCURRENCE or RHABDOPLEURA

ANNULATA tw SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS

By Proressor T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, Universiry of AveLAve.

Tu only published reference (0 the presence of Mhabdopleura iu Australian

waters is that of Harmer (1904, p. 23) who found in South Australian material a

fragment which he did not determine specifically. Norman (1921, p. 98) deseribed

K. annulata from localities close to the Three ings, a group of islands lying to the

worth of New Zealand. His material consisted of coenoecia found on stones and

ona shell dredged from depth of 185 and 549 retres.

In an aceount which has for some years been awaiting publication in the

Reports of the Australasian Antaretic Expedition of 1911-1914, the present. anthor

has recorded the finding of fragments amougst the debris from a dredging in 64

fathoms off Maria Island on the east coast of Tasmania. Mention is also mace in

that report of the oecurrence of the same species, identified as A. annuata, at bwo

collecting stations (Nos. 113 and 114) of the British, Australian aud New Zealand

Antarctic Researeh Expedition of 1929-1931, both localities beinw off ihe eastern

coast of Tasmania, viz.: (1) 42° 40° 5, 148° 27-5" HB, in 122 aetres, as well as iu

15910178 metres; and (2) -H" U8? 8, 148° 42° HK, i 128 metres, The latter locality

is close to the entrance to Banks Strait.

In the report just mentioned, it was suggested that Harmer’s material which

was not definitely localized, wight have been deteeted in dredgines taken from

South Australian waters by the late Sir Joseph Verco who, we know, forwarded

his collection of Polyzoa to that investigator for identification. The continental

shelf in the vicinity of Kangaroo Island was suggested as a possible locality because

of the depth. A mass of Polyzoa taken by Verco from various localities off our

soulbern coast is at present in tbe collection of Lhe South Australian Museum, and

this was examined macroscopically in 1956 at my request by B.C. Cotton and by

L. Stach, the latter being especially engaged in a study of the group. My own ex-

alination was only a enrsory one, As u result of these searches, no trace of the

characteristic peristomial tubes or peclocaulus was recoehized,

lu May of the present year, scrapings of the material adherent to the under

surface of rocks at, or just below, low spring tide marl at Port Willunga Reef were

examined for their content of lower invertebrate life and, quite unexpectedly, a

fairly lang, well preserved coenoecium of R. annulata was found. The specimen

was probably not taken im situ and no doubt was washed up trom deeper water in

106 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the vicinity as a result of storm action. The locality is open to the influence of

south-westerly gales, so that it is possible that the tube may have been carried

from the sea floor of Investigator Strait, whose depth varies from 60 to 70 fathoms

between the end of Eyre’s Peninsula and the western part of Kangaroo Island, but

diminishes to 12 to 17 fathoms between the island and Yorke’s Peninsula. The

adjacent part of St. Vincent’s Gulf varies from about 20 to 12 fathoms, shallowing

rapidly close to the coast in the vicinity of Port Willunga.

As Harmer’s article was published in 1904, his specimen must have been

taken either in that year, or more probably earlier. Vereo had been engaged in

dredging prior to that date, but he stated (1935 Edit. Cotton) that, prior to Janu-

ary 1905, he had never dredged in depths greater than 35 fathoms.

The Port Willunga specimen, on which numerous minute filamentous algae

were growing, is 2°53 mm. long and 0-265 mm. broad, the internal diameter of the

tube being 0-19-0-192 mm. The maximum thickness of the wall at the projecting

portion of each ring is 0:02-0:025 mm. The rings resemble closely those figured

by Norman and are 0-042—0-045 mm, apart. The length of the fragment is much

ereater than in those illustrated by Norman who noted, however, that such was

variable, and reminded one of those of R. norman Allman. The projecting rim

and other features agree completely with Norman’s figures. It is to be remarked

that R. normuni is a very widely distributed species, occurring off Greenland, the

Shetland Islands, the coast of Norway, and in the South Atlantic off Tristan

da Cunha where it was taken by the ‘‘Challenger’’, The known depths for that

species range from 5 metres (according to Schepotieff) to 500 metres. Broch

(1927, p. 468) recorded briefly the finding of fragments of R. normani by the

‘‘Gauss’’ in the Antarctic at 66° 02’ 8, 89° 38’ EH, in 350 metres, but since he con-

sidered that there was only one valid species (FR. norman), and as he did not figure

his specimen, its relation to R. annulata is not known. A specimen taken by the

‘*Siboga’’ in the Hast Indies, south-westerly from Celebes, in 75 to 94 metres and

described by Harmer (1905, 127, Text fig. 2) as Rhabdoplewra sp., was assigned by

Norman (1921, 101) to R. annulata.

The present note extends greatly the known range of the species, which now

includes the seas off the northern part of New Zealand, the east coast of Tasmania

from Maria Island to Banks Strait, and the region in the vicinity of the entrance

to St. Vincent’s Gulf in South Australia.

JOHNSTON—RHABDOPLEURA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS 107

REFERENCES.

Broch, H. (1927) : Die Pterobranchier, Rhabdopleura. Deutsche Siidpolar Exped.,

19 (Zool. 11), 468.

Harmer, 8S. F. (1904) : Hemichordata. Cambr. Nat. Hist., 7, 21-82.

Harmer, 8. F. (1905) : The Pterobranchia of the ‘‘Siboga’’ Expedition. Siboga-

Expeditie. Monogr. 26 bis, 132, pp.

Johnston, T. H. (1911-1914) : Rhabdopleura. Rep. Austr. Antarct. Exp., Ser. C,

3 (4), in press.

Norman, J. R. (1921) : Brit. Antaret. (‘‘Terra Nova’’) Exp., Nat. Hist. Rep. Zool.,

4 (4), 95-102.

Verco, Sir J. (1935): Combing the Southern Seas. (Edit. by B. ©. Cotton),

Adelaide.

OBITUARY OF JOHN SUTTON

By HERBERT M. HALE, DIRECTOR AND

H. CONDON, ASSISTANT IN ZOOLOGY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Mr. John Sutton, who succeeded the late Dr. A. M. Morgan as Honorary Ornithologist

at the South Australian Museum, died on November 22™, 1938, after a short illness.

Mr. Sutton was a Victorian; he was born at Castlemaine on March 25", 1866, and his

early years were spent at Bendigo. He was a banker by profession, at one time being

acting Manager of the National Bank in Adelaide, and later Inspector at Melbourne.

On his retirement from the bank in 1917, Mr. Sutton returned to this State and acted

as lecturer in Banking at the University of Adelaide. He was a member of the Institute

of Bankers.

OBITUARY or Joun Sutton

By HERBERT M. HALE, Direcror, ann

H. CONDON, Assisrawr ix Zoonocy, Sourmn Ausrrantan Museum,

Mr, Jomn Suvron, who sueceeded the late Dr. A. M. Morgan as Honorary Or-

nithologist at the South Australian Museum, died on November 22nd, 1938, after

a short illness. Mr, Sutton was a Victorian; he was born at Castlemaine on March

25th, 1866, aud his early years were spent at Bendigo. He was a banker by

profession, at one time being acting Manager of the National Bank in Adelaide,

and later Inspector at Melbourne. On his retirement from the bank in 1917, Mr.

Sutton returned to this State and aeted as lecturer in Banking at the University

of Adelaide. He was a member of the Institute of Bankers.

At the age of 53, Mr. Sutton began seriously to study our native birds. With

characteristic thoroughness and enthusiasm, he set about observing and recording

the habits, calls, and distribution of the South Australian avifauna, and whenever

opportunity arose, extended his researches into other parts of the Commonwealth.

Mr, Sutton was not a private collector of birds, but many specimens found by him

are now in the Museum collection. Several trips were made to Queensland, New

South Wales, and Vietoria, and the habits of the birds observed there were

recorded.

Mr. Sutton was also keenly interested in the historical side of South Aus-

tralian ornithology, and discovered many new and interesting facts about early

ornithologists and their activities in this State. He was the author of many papers

and articles on birds as well as innumerable short notes and descriptions in the

Emu’! and ‘South Australian Ornithologist’’. During his comparatively short

career as an ornithologist, it can be said that he beeame one of the leading figures

in South Australian ornithology, and his knowledge and opinions were valued

greatly by all with whom he came into contact.

In 1923, following the death of Mr, . R. Zeitz, Ornithologist at ihe Museum,

Dr. A. M. Morgan was appointed Honorary Ornithologist, and during the same

year, Mr. Sutton joimed him as Assistant Honorary Ornithologist. Wor the next

fifteen years, Mr, Sutton spent every afternoon at the Museum, and as a result of

his organizing ability and thoroughness, about fifteen thousand specimens were

registered, catalogued, and stored during this period. He was an expert penman,

and all his records were kept with meticulous care.

110 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Mr. Sutton joined the South Australian Ornithological Association in 1919,

acted as Honorary Secretary for sixteen years, and was a member of the Editorial

Committee of the ‘‘South Australian Ornithologist’’ for eleven years.

In October, 1934, on the death of Dr. Morgan, Mr. Sutton became Honorary

Curator in Ornithology, which position he held until his death. He was a member

of several learned and scientific societies, including the Royal Society of South

Australia, the Royal Australasian Ornithologists’ Union, the Royal Geographical

Society, and the South Australian Ornithological Association.

CONTRAST IN DRAWINGS MADE BY AN AUSTRALIAN

ABORIGINE BEFORE AND AFTER INITIATION

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, ACTING ETHNOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The remarkable change in the mental outlook of a partly detribalized aborigine, after

he had passed through the ceremonies admitting him to full tribal membership, and

the distinct alteration in the character of the crayon drawings, produced by him before

and after initiation, form the subject of this paper.

When the 1935 Adelaide University Anthropological Expedition to the Warburton

Ranges in Western Australia (') left Laverton, two interpreters were employed; one,

Pitawara, a fully initiated aborigine twenty-five years of age, the other, a youth named

Niyau (pl. vii, Fig. 2), who, we understood at the time, had passed through all stages

of initiation — that is to say, he had been circumcised and subincised.

CONTRAST tn DRAWINGS MADE psy an AUSTRALIAN

ABORIGINE BEFORE anp AFTER INITIATION

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, Acting Errunonoaiwr, Sourn Ausrranian Museum.

Plates v—vii.

Tuy remarkable change in the mental outlook of a partly detribalized aborigine,

after he had passed through the ceremonies admitting him to full tribal member-

ship, and the distinet alteration in the character of the crayon drawings produced

by him before and after initiation, form the subject of this paper,

When the 1935 Adelaide University Anthropological Expedition to the War-

burton Ranges in Western Australia (1) left Laverton, two interpreters were em-

ployed; one, Pitawara, a fully initiated aborigine twenty-five years of age, the

other, a youth named Nijau (pl. vii, fig. 2), who, we understood at the time, had

passed through all stages of initiation—that is to say, he had been cireumeised and

subincised.

After a journey of three hundred and fifty miles across uninhabited country,

composed largely of mulga flats and spinitex-covered sandhills, we reached Waru-

puju, a small waterhole on the junction of the Elder and Warburton Creeks, Here

we established our base camp and started work among a group of people of the

Ngada tribe, who were practically untouched by civilization.

In order to gain some insight into the art of the aborigines, sheets of brown

paper and red, yellow, black and white crayons were distributed amongst the

natives.

For a while, when every-day objects formed the subjects of the drawings, the

older men made no attempt to conceal them from our younger interpreter, But

when confidence beeame established between the older men and myself and the

drawings beyan to take on a more secret character, it beeame obvious that Nijau

was not aceepted by the tribal leaders. He was diffident and hestitating in their

presence, and spent most of his time playing with boys many years his junior.

Should Nijau pass near the place where the older men were making the drawings,

these were at once turned face downwards.

Inquiries then revealed the fact that our younger interpreter, although he

(1) This was financed by funds made available by the Rockefeller Foundation and adminis-

tered by the Australian National Research Council,

112 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

had been circumcised some years ago, had been persuaded by the mission authori-

ties not to undergo the ritual subincision ceremonies, the participation in which

would have granted him the rights and privileges of full tribal membership. He

was therefore tribally a child, and as such would not be allowed to see drawings

depicting legends known only to the initiated. Nijau was therefore useless as an

interpreter.

During this period Nijau, in common with other aborigines, made a number

of drawings; pl. v, figs. 1 and 2, are two examples of his work. The subjects are

purely European, and are such as any white child in the upper classes of a primary

school might have produced. In the first sheet (pl. v, fig. 1) the objects illustrated

are easily recognizable, i.e. on the top of the sheet a policeman, then an aeroplane,

railway train, axe, boot on the lower left, a revolver, and on the lower right a

station hand, with his wide-brimmed sombrero and gay neckeloth, who had evi-

dently caught the imagination of the aboriginal youth.

The drawings on the second sheet (pl. v, fig. 2) are, if anything, of a higher

order. A, isa house on the Mount Margaret Mission; B, a ram (reminiscent of one

of the famous paintings at the Altimira Caves in Spain) ; C, an echidna; and D, a

cauliflower in blossom. The lower drawing is an excellent representation of the

stockyards, windmill and troughs at the above mission station. Considerable

detail is shown, even to the wheel of the stop valve E, that controls the flow of

water to the trough. These sketches showed considerable skill, for, as Nijau could

neither read nor write, it is almost certain that he had not received instruction in

drawing.

During the latter part of our stay, Nijau, in company with two other younger

poys, passed through the subincision operation and rituals.

This act wrought a major psychological change in the youth. He no longer

played with the boys or approached the men with downeast eyes or diffident mien,

put associated freely with the elders, noticeably proud of his new status and the

head-dress that proclaimed it (pl. vii, fig. 1), while in his general conduet he dis-

played all the confidence and assurance of much older men.

No longer did the men turn their sheets of drawings face downward, but

willingly explained, through Nijau, the meaning of the symbols on the sheets of

drawings which illustrated the wanderings of their semi-human ancestors. The

youth’s pride and self-importance reached even greater heights when he was

chosen as guardian to a boy selected for cireumeision (pl. vii, fig. 1), and was, for

the first time, allowed to sit in the circle of singers and chant the sacred songs of

his tribe.

Thus Nijau reached full tribal membership. But it was in the crayon draw-

MOUNTFORD-—DRAWINGS OF AN AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINE 113

ings that the remarkable psychological change was most clearly exhibited. After

his initiation Nijau produced two sheets of drawings (pl. vi, fig. 1 and 2), and on

these every object depicted is associated with the life of the uncivilized aborigine,

and the symbols (with the exception of F, fig. 2) are the same as those used by the

older men to illustrate their traditional stories.

A (pl. vi, fig. 2) are the tracks of parent emus as they travelled backwards

and forwards to their nest at G. B is a line of wallaby tracks leading into a cave

at C; a hill F overlooks this place. D pictures a distorted gum tree seen by the

artist whilst on our outward journey; according to Nijau it had been blown over

by the wind and had re-rooted itself. KE indicates the roots of the tree. Except

for A, a waterhole called Kapi Pilbit, and the associated creek (created by the

ancestral Kangaroo) every object pictured would be known only to the fully

initiated. B is a wanigi made by two ancestral beings, the Wati Kutjara, and left

behind at Winduru Waterhole (2).

At C is shown another wanigi seen by the author and Nijau at a semi-secret

ceremony enacted at the expedition camp. D isa gnanma hole (*), Kapi Matara;

F, a somewhat Europeanized representation of an aborigine wearing the sacred

wanigi supported from his head, his face painted with white pipeclay, and body

decorated with lines of eagle-down, while E is the equally sacred bullroarer pup-

imba (equivalent to the Aranda tjurunga).

The cohesive power of the ceremonial life of the aborigines and the calamitous

effect of any influences that tend to destroy that power will be evident from this

short paper. If Nijau had not been subincised, he would have lived his life as an

outcast from his tribe. At the same time, such nonconformity to native customs

would not have rendered him more acceptable to the white community. For the

happiness of the aborigine, the maintenance of his ceremonial life and social or-

ganization is vital.

REFERENCE.

Mountford, C. P. (1937) : Rec. 8S. Aust. Mus., vi, pp. 5-28, fig. 1-27.

(2) Figured by Mountford, 1937, p. 19, in a suite.of drawings describing the exploits of these

ancestors. Winduru is a large water-hole some fifteen miles north-east of the base camp of the

expedition (see W. Aus. plan [X/800).

(3) A water catchment of limited supply found in the arid parts of Western Australia.

114 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate v.

Fig. 1 and 2. Crayon drawings produced by Nijau before subincision ceremony.

Plate vi.

Fig. 1 and 2. Crayon drawings produced by Nijau after subincision ceremony.

Plate vii.

Fig.1. Nijau guarding initiate in circumcision.

Fig.2. Nijau.

Rec. S.A. MusEuM Von. VI, PLATE V,

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM Vou. VI, PLATE VI.

Rec. S.A, MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE VIL.

A SURVEY OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PEARL AND

BALER SHELL ORNAMENTS

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, ACTING ETHNOLOGIST, AND

ALISON HARVEY, HON. ASSISTANT IN ETHNOLOGY

Summary

The shell ornaments described in the following paper are used by the aboriginal

population over wide areas in Australia. They may be divided into two general types,

one made from the Baler shell (Melo diadema), the second from the shell of the Pearl

Oyster (Meleagrina maxima), and from the smaller pearl shell (Meleagrina

margaritifera).

The pearl shell ornaments are found almost exclusively in the western half of the

continent, while with a few exceptions, the baler shell ornament is limited to

Queensland, Western Central Australia and North-eastern South Australia.

A SURVEY or AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PEARL anv

BALER SHELL ORNAMENTS

By C. P. MOUNTFORD, Acting MrunoLocisr, anb ALISON HARVEY, Hon. Assisrant

IN ErHNoOLoGY.

Plates vili-ix, and Text fig. 1-7.

INTRODUCTION,

Tne shell ornaments deseribed in the following paper are used by the aboriginal

Wy

hey may be divided into two general

types, one made from the Baler shell (Melo diadema), the second from the shell of

population over wide areas in Australia.

the Pearl Oyster (Meleagrina maxima), and from the smaller pearl shell (Melea-

gring margaritifera).

The pearl shell ornaments are found almost exclusively in the western half of

the continent, while with a few exceptions, the baler shell ornament is limited to

Queensland, Western Central Australia and North-eastern South Australia.

PEHARL SHELL ORNAMENTS.

MANUFACTURE.

The pearl shell ornaments of the North-west Coast of Australia early attracted

the attention of visitors and scientists. Martin and Panter in 1863, p. 86, noted

that the method of manutacturing these objects consisted in grinding away about

two-thirds of the marginal substanee of the shell, and drilling a hole at one end of

the smaller diameter for the hair-string. The patterns on the decorated ornaments

were engraved to a depth of about half a millimetre, and the spaces filled in with a

pigment of gum and chareoal.

Stirling, on a card in the South Australian Museum, substantiates the above

description. and noted that the rough outer surface of the shell was covered with

hot ashes and then removed by erinding with sand and water.

Usage,

Use of the pearl ornament. lies in two fields, as a means of personal decoration

and as an object of ceremonial importance. Love (1925, p. 27) points out that the

men of the Worora tribe wear these shells as ornaments, and suspend them from

116 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

their belts at the back and front; while both men and women hang several of them

down their backs from a necklet made of human hair. Small pieces of oval pearl

shell are sometimes used as forehead ornaments.

Martin and Panter (1863, p. 86) noticed the coastal north-western tribes

wearing these ornaments suspended from a waist band. These writers consider

them to be largely ornamental, although Campbell (1914, p. 86) saw them, at

Sunday Island, being worn by youths who were passing through the final stages

of initiation. On these occasions they wore richly ornamented shells (E and F,

pl. viii). This evidence is supported by Mr. J. Heggie in connection with A and

B, fig. 1. The dress of a fully initiated man consists of a plain shell.

Baler shell ornaments A

Pearl shell ornaments e

Fig. 1. Distribution of Pearl and Baler Shell ornaments.

The shell ornaments of South-Western Queensland have two uses, one as a

pubic ornament for ‘‘corroborees and other public rejoicings’’, the other, in the

hands of malignantly-disposed people, as an object of evil magic.

In Central Australia, such ornaments have an important magical value.

Nevertheless they are still used as a form of decoration (Spencer and Gillen, 1899,

p. 544).

According to Mr. N. B. Tindale, pearl shells at Ooldea (H, fig. 3) were used

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 117

in the rain-making rituals, but a photograph by the late R. H. Pulleine, which

pictures an aborigine wearing one as a neck pendant, suggests that on some occa-

sions, the shells still perform the function of decoration.

In the Ngada tribe of the Warburton Range of Western Australia one of the

authors observed that a pearl shell pendant was used by one of the older men as

an article of dress in both the ordinary camp life and the initiation ceremonials.

In a recent interview a native called Waria, a member of the almost extinct

Ngadjuri tribe of the middle north of South Australia, described how he wore

pearl shell ornaments at the time of his circumcision. The shell ornaments, which

he had not seen previously, were tied on the upper part of the leg (C, fig. 6) and

according to Waria rattled and shone in the firelight as he ran round the cere-

monial ground. The fact that Waria had not seen these ornaments before his

initiation indicates their sacred character.

Maaic.

As articles of magical worth, these ornaments are widely distributed in

Australia.

In Central Australia they are found as such, and the chief aspects of their

magic being their potence as charms for women and their healing properties. De-

scribing their use in connection with the latter, Spencer and Gillen (1899, p. 544)

write : ‘If a man desires to charm a particular woman, he takes a Lonka-lonka, as

the ornament is called, to some retired spot, and charms it by singing over it, ‘Ma

quatcha purnto ma qillia purtno’, which conveys an invitation to the lightning to

come and dwell in the Lonka-lonka, After the charming has taken place it is hung

on a digging stick at the corroboree ground until night time, when a man removes

it and ties it to his waist band. While he is dancing, the woman whom he wishes to

attract, alone sees the lightning flashing in the Lonka-lonka, and all at once her

internal organs shake with emotion. If possible, she will creep into his camp that

night or take the earliest opportunity to run away with him.”’

From the description of the Lonka-lonka ‘‘flashing”’ in the firelight, it would

appear that the object was made from pearl shell, as a baler shell (which is also in

use in this area) would not ‘‘flash’’.

On the same page, in a footnote, Spencer and Gillen refer to the healing quali-

ties of the Lonka-lonka. Used in sickness of any kind its magic has great curative

properties. Roth (1897, p. 163) also refers to the use of the pearl plate as an anti-

dote to sickness because of its magical powers.

At Ooldea, according to Mr. Tindale, scrapings of the shell are used in the

rain-making ceremonies.

118

Fig. 2.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

eS

Wa

Decorated Pearl Shells. A, B, and D; Sunday Island, Western Australia,

Cygnet Bay, Western Australia. E; Mount Casuarina, north-western Australia,

MoUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 119

MytTHOLoey.

Various myths are woven round the pearl shell. Professor A. P. Elkin, in a

foreword of ‘* Aboriginal Decorative Art’’ (McCarthy, 1938), writes that on the

north-west coast a particular chant is sung when the design is being engraved on

the pearl shell. The design cannot be made except by those who know the ‘‘sone’’.

This suggests that the patterns are traditional. This statement is supported by

Mr. Heggie in connection with A, fig. 2.

According to Mr. N. B. Tindale, the natives at Ooldea believe that the shell

comes from a place in the far north-west, where large lizards live in the water and

attack the men who collect the shells (H, fig. 3).

DESCRIPTION,

The pearl shell ornaments are somewhat oval in shape, and vary from two to

eight inches in length. Hach shell has at one end either a hole or a mass of resin or

wax to which a hair-string is attached. Pearl shells are of two types, plain and

engraved. The pattern on the latter is usually carried out on the concave face,

but sometimes on both.

Twenty-eight examples of pearl shell ornaments, from the eighty-five avail-

able for study, were chosen as being representative of the various forms. These

are illustrated in fig. 2-6.

A, fig. 2, collected at Sunday Island by Mr. J. Heggie, is a striking example

of a maze design. Commencing at the lower edge of the shell, three parallel lines

can be followed without a break over most of the surface, finishing in the

middle of the left-hand side. Basedow (1925, p. 355) figures a pearl shell from

the same locality in which a definite anthropomorphic figure can be traced, and

the fundamental design of the Sunday Island specimen is similar. According to

Mr. Heggie, the youths of this locality, after they have passed through the four

earlier stages of their initiation, wear engraved ornaments, while the insignia of

the fully-initiated is a plain pear! shell.

The owner of the ornament (A, fig. 2) explained to Mr. Heggie that the pat-

tern hac been thought out by somebody a ‘‘long long time ago’’, and in that form

had been handed down, generation by generation, to the aborigines of the present

day. This statement suggests that the design is associated with the tribal mytho-

logy.

B, fig. 2, is also from Sunday Island. The engraved pattern is the key or

meander type—a definitely aboriginal concept belonging to the north-western area

(Davidson 1937, p. 1830)—but the lines of circles, the leaf, and the conventional

designs make one suspect Huropean influence, while the regularity and accuracy

120 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 5. Decorated Pearl and Baler Shells. A; Pearl Shell, Roebuck Bay. B; Pearl Shell,

Katherine River, Northern Territory. C; Pearl Shell, Roeburn, Western Australia. D; Baler

Shell, Daly Waters, Central Australia. E; Pearl Shell, north-western district, Western Aus-

tralia. F; Baler Shell, Central Australia. G; Pearl Shell, between Barrow and Tennants

Creek, Central Australia. H; Pearl Shell, Ooldea, South Australia. J; Pearl Shell, Sunday

Island, Western Australia.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 121

of the circles suggest the use of a steel tool. With one exception (C, fig, 3) this

shell is the only example in the collection on which the concentric cirele is en-

graved. This design is that most commonly employed in Central Australian de-

corative art (Mounttord, 1937, p. 25).

The ladder-like, meandering design on C, fig. 2 (from Cygnet Bay) resembles

the snake motif often found in the tjurunga designs of the Central tribes. Mount-

ford, 1937, fig. 9, illustrates a crayon drawing that relates to a snake totemic

centre, the meandering line of which resembles that on the left-hand of C, fig. 2.

Tt is not unlikely that the design of the pearl shell refers to some mythical snake

ancestor. The significance of the other figures is unknown, except those resembling

arrow heads, which throughout Australia represent bird tracks.

D, fig. 2, was collected from the same locality as A, fig. 2. These are two of

the most decorative examples in the collection. Three parallel lines meander

backwards and forwards over the whole surface of the shell, making a modified

maze. The spaces between are filled with engravings of tracks of human beings,

kangaroo-like creatures and birds.

Snake designs have been engraved across the centre of the shell, on the upper

right-hand edge, and emerging from the drilled hole at the top. This pattern is

repeated on the reverse side (F, fig. 2) in greater detail. Above the snake is a

remarkable group, the significance of which could hardly be misunderstood. The

upper figure pictures one of the many sharks that infest the northern waters, while

that immediately below is strongly suggestive of a Sucker-fish or Remora (1)

ready to attach itself to its host.

E, fig. 2, was obtained at Mount Casuarina, which is the most northerly locality

at which engraved pear! shell plaques have been collected. No meaning can be

ascribed to the pattern.

A, fig. 3, from Roebuck Bay, is in the collection of the Hamburg Museum, and

was photographed there by Mr. N. B. Tindale in 1937. The patterns, which do not

appear to be as deeply engraved as those previously described, are almost entirely

naturalistic. The two main figures, one on the lower right, the other slightly left

of the centre, are similar to representations of yams seen on bark paintings from

Arnhem Land, and in crayon drawings of the Granites district in the north-west

of Central Australia. In such figures the circles indicate the yams, and the con-

necting lines the roots. The engravings on this pearl shell may have a similar

meaning. Several star forms are also present.

B, fig. 3, was collected on the Katherine River, Northern Territory. A sharp-

(1) The Sucker-fishes possess a large dorsal sucking dise and attach themselves to sharks,

whales, or even the bottom of boats. When a meal is in sight the remora will leave its host, capture

the prey, and return to its resting place,

122 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

48

Suwa TT)

“a i)

IN

5)

Sd

LORY

RERESS

F

Fig. 4. Decorated Pearl Shell. A; Derby, Western Australia. B; Roebuck Bay, Western

Australia. C; Cygnet Bay, Western Australia. D; Bernice Bay, Western Australia. E; Bernice

Bay, Western Australia. F; Kimberley Coast, Western Australia.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 123

edged tool had been used to cut the pattern, which is composed entirely of fine

lines, some almost indistinguishable. With the exception of a single star, only

ladder-like designs are present.

A fragment of what must have been a particularly decorative example is

shown in CG, fig. 8. The original is in the possession of Mr. W. B. Saunders, of

Georgetown, who collected it at Roeburn. He kindly permitted a rubbing to be

made, and from this the illustration was prepared. The plant-like figures on the

lower edge are suggestive of those on A, fig. 3. Meandering lines, stars, and a single

concentric circle form the remainder of the designs.

K, fig. 3, was collected from the north-western districts of Australia by David-

son (1987, fig. 44). The engraving on the lower right hand probably represents

the silver bat fish (Monodactylus argentius), and that on the centre left one of the

coral fish. No meaning can be ascribed to the circular figures.

G, fig. 8, is a portion of a large pearl shell—collected between Barrow and

Tennant’s Creeks, Central Australia—on which the angular meander had been

engraved. This design is strongly suggestive of the north-west coast, the home

of this motif. The central portion of the pattern had been ground away, perhaps

for the same reason as that recorded in connection with H, fig. 3 (7).

H, fig. 3, when sketched by Mr. N. B. Tindale at Ooldea, on the Trans-Aus-

tralian Railway Line, was being used by the natives of those parts. Here again

only a fragment of the original pear] shell remains, and consequently only portion

of the engraved angular meander. According to Mr. Tindale the shell is called

kararba. The natives claim that it comes from a place in the north-west, where

large lizards live in the water and attack the men who collect the shell. Scrapings

of the shell are used during rain-making ceremonies, which practice probably

accounts for the small size of examples collected in South Australia (see also H,

fig. 5; B, fig. 6; and as previously noted G, fig. 3).

By the courtesy of the Australian Museum, rubbings of J, fig. 3, as well as

many others, were made available for study. This, in common with A, B, and D,

fig. 2, was obtained from Sunday Island. The triple meandering lines, particu-

larly on the upper right-hand side, resemble the almost obliterated design on H,

fig. 5.

The long oval shell pictured on A, fig. 4, comes from Derby, north-west Aus-

tralia, and had been cut from a shell already engraved with the angular meander.

This example was attached to several long strings of shells, and had been used as

a neck pendant. Similar, but unengraved, plates, attached to shell necklets, are

in the South Australian Museum.

(2) In Central Australia, similar unengrayed ornaments, called Lonka lonka, are worn by men,

especially during ceremonies (Spencer and Gillen, 1899, p. 544).

124 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ae

WOE

Fig. 5. Decorated Pearl Shell. A, C, and J; Maratuna Tribe, Western Australia. B

and D; Lake White, Northern Territory. E; Central Australia.

Northern Territory. H; Koonibba, South Australia.

F and G; Timber Creek,

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 125

B, fig. 4, is from Roebuck Bay. The zig-zag lines predominate in the decora-

tion of this shell; the concentric rhomboid is also present. This motif is unusual

on this class of ornament, although common on other forms of aboriginal mobile

art (Davidson, 1937, p. 119).

C, fig, 4, is a pendant from Cygnet Bay engraved with a meandering desivn,

and like A, fig. 4, it was attached to a necklet of shells. E, fig, 5, from Central Aus-

tralia, bears an identical but almost obliterated design.

D, K, and F, fig. 4, were collected by Dr. D. 8. Davidson (1937, fig. 44) from

Bernice Bay, and Kimberley Coast, respectively. These are figured on account of

the unusual lattiee pattern on D, the uig-zagz and leaf-like forms of F, and the

striking representation of a crocodile on ER. The distortion of the crocodile to fit

into the available space is a common feature of the bark drawings of Arnhem Land.

A, C, and J, fig. 5, were photographed at the Leiden Museum by Mr. N, B.

Tindale, The pattern on all three examples is unlike any other in the series, with

the possible exception of the faint lines on B, fig. 6. These ornaments were made

from the smaller pearl shell (M, margaritifera), by the Maratunia Tribe. The

locality of the above tribe could not be traced, but the fact that neither the larger

nor the smaller pearl shell occurs any further south than Hamelin Pool, on the

West Coast of Australia, suggests that the tribe is north of this place.

B, D, F, and G, fig. 5, were collected by Dr, C, J. Hackett while on medical

research in the Northern Territory, B and D (from Lake White), and G, from

Timber Oreek, are scratched with lattice patterns similar to those on D, fig. 4. A

decorative fern leaf design occupies the lower edge of F (Timber Creek).

E, fig. 5, comes from Central Australia. From the point of design this

specimen is of unusual interest. The parallel lines and star motif, which is con-

fined to the centre of the continent (fig. 7) had been scratched on the surface of

this pearl ornament. In addition, three faint meandering lines, reminiscent of

those on C, fig. 4, from Cygnet Bay, proclaim, so to speak, the place of its birth.

1t would appear that this shell was engraved on the north-west coast, and, by the

process of trade, found its way into Central Australia. Deve it was again. en-

graved, but this time with stars aud parallel lines. Another such example is illus.

trated on D, pl, ix. A baler shell ornament bearing the same design is shown

beside i for comparison.

I, fig. 4, is a fragment of the large pearl shell which, according to Mr, N. B.

Tindale, had been traded to the natives of the Koonibba Station from Kalgoorlie.

This shell has several scarcely discernible meandering lines on its inner surface, a

remnant, no doubt, of the original engraving, This, as pointed out earlier, re-

sentbles the upper right-hand side of J, fig. 3.

126 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

B, fig. 6, a specimen from Penong, is also a fragment, chipped to its present

size from a much larger shell. On this ornament a series of very fine lines forms a

ladder-like pattern.

Pearl shell ornaments, called Mukuli, of which no specimens have been collec-

ted, were used by the Ngadjuri tribe of the middle-north of South Australia in

their circumcision ceremonies. C, fig. 6, illustrates the method of wearing.

D

Fig. 6. Pearl and Baler Shell ornaments. A; Decorated Baler Shell, Coopers Creek, South

Australia. B; Decorated Pearl Shell, Penong, South Australia. OC; Method of carrying Pearl

Shell ornaments by the Ngadjuri Tribe, South Australia. D; Decorated Baler Shell ornament,

South Australia.

D, pl. viii, is the top of a fruit tin lid collected by the Canning Stock Route

expedition. When obtained it was in use as a pubic ornament.

It is easy to imagine that the native, finding a lid when new, would see in it a

striking resemblance to the shining pearl shell, and would wear it as such.

A, pl. viii, figures a plain pearl shell from Neweastle Waters, which illustrates

the custom of repairing these shells, which have considerable value in this area.

B, pl. viii, is a shell bearing a modified maze design in which two bird tracks

are incorporated. Both A and B, pl. viii, are attached to belts of hair string.

BALER SHELL ORNAMENTS.

MANUFACTURE.

The method of production of the baler-shell ornaments for spear-throwers at

Princess Charlotte Bay is described by Hale and Tindale (1934, p. 99) : ‘‘Two

pieces of shell are roughly chipped to shape, and are then ground to an oval form

on stones, sand and water assisting the operation; next the convex outer face is

polished on a smooth rock, using finer sand as an abrasive, until it is pure white.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 127

The shells are then placed, one on each side and with the concave or inside faces

opposed, at the ‘grip’ end of the throwing-stick and fastened with beeswax, which

fills the gap between them. A charm is frequently concealed within the adhesive

between the two shells.’’ G, pl. ix, pictures the haft of a spear-thrower from this

area.

USAGE.

The use to which this ornament is put varies with the different: localities; it

may be used for ornamental or ceremonial purposes. Among the tribes of north-

west-central Queensland it appears to be solely ornamental, being found as an

article of personal adornment and as a decoration on the haft of spear-throwers.

In the former case, Roth (1897, p. 112) states that as a chest ornament it is worn

suspended on a hair string, and that it is occasionally but irregularly worn as a

forehead ornament. He also gives the following description of its use as a spear-

thrower (1897, p. 149) ; ‘*This (spear-thrower) has a sort of haft to prevent the

hand slipping off; this, projecting at an angle from the same edge as the peg, is

composed of a flattened ovate piece of beef-wood gum, about three inches or more

in its greater diameter; a white piece of shell . . . . with convex side outwards,

is fixed to both sides of it.’’

Hale and Tindale (1934, p. 99), also found the baler shell used as a decoration

for spear-throwers. Among the Dieri people of the far north-east of South Aus-

tralia the shell ornament has a great magical value, and is closely connected with

the circumcision ceremony in which it is worn by the initiate as a chest ornament.

Gason (1874, p. 18) refers to its use in the above ceremony, and states that,

as soou as a boy shows signs of advancing manhood, the older men select a woman

whose duty it is to suspend a ‘‘mussei’’ shell around the boy’s neck, which she does

at the appointed time, while engaging him in conversation.

Mr. T, Vogelsang, who spent many years among the Dieri people, related in a

personal interview that the youths wear them immediately before, and just after,

the circumcision ceremony, One of the tribal elders (the man who seized the youth

chosen for initiation) also wore a plain baler shell around his neck, which gave

him considerable authority and magical power.

Further south, the Urubunna and Wongkanguru tribes of the Peake district

use this shell ornament in connection with initiation ceremonies in a way similar

to the Dieri. In the manuscript notes by Mr. E. C. Kempe, on the Aborigines of

the Peake District, the following reference is made to the initiation of a young

man: ‘‘A certain rare shell is used in this ceremony. It is considered particularly

precious by these blacks, and is handed down from operator to operator. When a

young man is to be operated upon, he is, on a given signal, suddenly seized in camp

128 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

by two blacks, his mouth covered to prevent outcry, and the shell ornament hung

round his neck by a string.”’

In the Anjamatana tribe in the Northern Flinders Range, these ornaments

have the same ceremonial uses. A string of these shells, makili, is suspended

round the neck of the youth during the initiation ceremonies after they have been

handled by certain women relatives.

These shells are the objects of greatest value in the tribe, and are placed under

the care of one of the old men, who informed one of us that if they had been lost

or broken in the olden days he would have been killed for his carelessness (F, pl.

aR

Macic.

The only tribe known in which the Baler shells are used as objects of evil

magic is the Dieri. Among the members of this tribe they serve the same purpose

as the ‘‘pointing bone’’ of Central Australia, and have similar lethal qualities.

MytTHoLoey.

These ornaments are used by the Anjamatana tribe of the Northern Flinders,

who, not knowing their source, suppose them to have a mythical origin. Two such

legends are known to these people. One tells of a great ‘‘whale’’ (Kukurt) who

lived in the springs, but is now in the sea; from the back of his neck come the shells

that make up the necklace worn by a youth in the first initiation ceremonies. At

one phase in the above ceremony, the youth, placing his hand under the shells,

rattles them as he runs around the ground (#).

In a variant of the foregoing legend, baler shells were ‘‘tick’’ on the neck of

snakes. An Anjamatana native told one of the authors that he had heard that a

mythical snake died in John Creek, and, on searching the locality, found an un-

drilled baler shell in a swamp near Wertaloona. This shell is one of the string

still used by that tribe.

DESCRIPTION.

The baler shell ornament has a fairly uniform appearance; it is an ovate piece

of white Melo shell varying in length from two and a half to five inches, and has

either a hole or a piece of resin gum to which the suspensory hair-string is attached.

There are two types, one of which is plain, and the other engraved on the concave

face (see E, pl. ix). In both, the inner face is smooth and white, and in most cases

shows signs of having been coloured with red ochre, which makes the pattern stand

(8) This rattling of the shells was a feature in a similar ceremony of the more southerly tribe,

the Ngadjuri (see C, fig. 6).

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 129

out clearly. In the plain forms, however, this colouring has almost disappeared,

due no doubt to continual use.

Twenty-nine ornaments made from Baler shells (Melo diadema) are available

for study, and of these seven are shown as text figures. They have been selected

to illustrate types and designs. D, in fig. 3, collected at Daly Waters, exhibits the

arrangement of stars anl parallel lines so characteristic of the Central Australian

area (fig. 7). The lines of the design are about 0-5 mm. in width, engraved on the

Baler Shells

Plain ©

Engraved x

Fig. 7. Distribution of engraved and plain Baler Shell ornaments in Australia.

coneave face, and coloured with red ochre rubbed into the cuts. The topmost por-

tion of the shell, above the hole through which the string is threaded, has been

broken, and later repaired with gum made from Poreupine Grass (Triodia) resin.

¥F, also in fig. 3, is a variation of the above motif in which engraved stars pre-

dominate. The shell is smooth and white, but red ochre has been rubbed into the

design. This specimen, collected in Central Australia by F. J. Gillen, has not been

fully localized.

A, fig. 6, is from Cooper’s Creek. A large lump of gum has been attached to

130 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the top of the ornament, probably to fix the hair-string. Two parallel lines in a

loop design have been lightly seratched at each side of the shell; this was the only

specimen of baler shell which bore any sign of the meander motif so frequently

found engraved on pearl shells, especially on those from the north-west coast.

(See E and H, fig. 5, and C, fig. 2.)

D, in the same text figure, is an unlocalized baler shell collected by Mr. R. T.

Maurice. This specimen is one of two varying from the usual ovate form; it bears

an uncommon design composed of sets of dots and parallel lines. B, pl. ix, is a

typical example of the plain baler shell. (The convex face has been photo-

graphed). The specimen—ealled Kuripikirit by the Mikari tribe—was collected

at Minnie Downs, North-Eastern South Australia, by Mr. L. Reese. The smooth,

white and glossy concave face was not engraved, but showed signs of having been

coloured with red ochre, which remains as a faint trace in scratches on the face.

Human hair string suspends the ornament through a hole in the top portion of

the shell.

B, pl. ix, is a shell from Daly Waters bearing the characteristic line and star

design on the concave face. Here again the engraved design was coloured with

red ochre. <A pearl shell (D, pl. ix) from Barrow Creek, three hundred and fifty

miles south, is included for comparison on the same plate.

A, pl. ix, shows an unlocalized copy in bone of the plain baler shell ornament.

Spencer and Gillen (1904, p. 446) in the legend of the two Oruntja men, tell of

how one of them killed Induda, an opossum man, and from his shoulder-blade

made a Lonka-lonka, which he wore as a forehead decoration.

CG, pl. ix, shows the convex face of a ‘‘shell’’ ornament from Cooper’s Creek,

made from kaolin. This specimen was pale pink in colour, had acquired a surface

gloss, and was made as a substitute for the true baler shell ornament. The latter

is rare and of great value in this area.

F, pl. ix, is a photograph of a youth of the Anjamatana tribe of the northern

Flinders wearing the baler shell ornament while undergoing initiation. This shell

is eailed makali by these people (*#).

DesigN AND DisTRIBUTION.

The engraved patterns of the ornaments described in this paper can be classi-

fied into two main groups:

(1) Geometric.

(2) Naturalistic.

(4) The name is similar to that given to the pear! shell ornament (see C, fig. 6) of the Ngulgura

tribe who live in the area bounded by Wilpena Pound to the north, the western Flinders to the

west, and Gawler in the south.

MouNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 137

The former, which predominates, can again be subdivided into :

(a)

(b)

(¢)

The angular meander or maze designs.

Meandering and zig-zag lines.

Lattice and ladder designs.

(d) Parallel lines and stars.

Geometric.

¢

(b)

(e)

(a) The angular meander or maze design (see A, B, D, and H, fig.2; Gand H,

fig. 3; and A, fig. 4), originates on the north-west coast of Western Aus-

tralia, whence all but four of these examples were obtained. The remain-

ing ornaments, 7.e. those collected on the Canning Stock Route, Western

Australia, at Barrow Creek, Central Australia, sketched by Mr. Tindale

at Ooldea (C, pl. vili, and G and H, fig. 3) and that seen by one of the

authors in the Warburton Range of Western Australia, undoubtedly

reached their present position by various native trade routes.

The meandering and zig-zag pattern is largely confined to the far north-

west. Fourteen pearl shells and one baler shell bearing this pattern were

examined, and on the only three collected outside of this area (Ji, fig. 5,

from Central Australia, A, fig. 6, and H, fig. 5, from the Great Australian

Bight), the designs were hardly distinguishable, due no doubt to age and

attrition. When, however, one considers how long it must have taken

for such an ornament to have been traded from its source to the Great

Australian Bight, it is not surprising that the engravings were almost

obliterated and the shell much reduced in size, particularly in view of the

custom mentioned in connection with H, fig. 3.

The lattice and ladder motifs (C, fig. 2; B, fig. 8; D, fig. 4; B, D, C, -J,

fig. 5; and B, fig. 6) are, without exception, cut into the surface of the

shell with a sharp tool. In general, these designs originate on the north-

west coast, although B, fig. 3, was collected on the Katherine River,

Northern Territory, and B, fig. 6 from the Great Australian Bight. The

lines on the latter are so fine that a magnifying glass was necessary to

distinguish them. A, C, and J, fig. 5, were decorated with lightly-incised

lines. The latter were unlocalized, and unlike any other examples in the

series.

(d) Twelve of the shell ornaments were engraved with the stars and parallel

lines motif. Three of these were made of pearl shell. One, D, pl. ix, is

compared with a baler shell, E, pl. ix, both from Central Australia. This

132 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

method of marking is confined entirely to the centre of the continent, and

is more commonly seen on the baler shells of this area (see fig. 7).

(2) Naturalistie.

With the exception of the single example from south-western Northern Terri-

tory (F, fig. 5) all naturalistic designs originated in the north-west. Some are

decidedly decorative, 7.e. F, fig. 2; A, C, and H, fig. 3, and E and F, fig. 4.

A comparison of the patterns engraved on pearl-shell and those on tjurungas

of Central Australia show few, if any, points of resemblance. In fact, except for

the tracks on D, fig. 2, the concentric circles on B, fig. 2 and C, fig. 3, and the zig-zag

lines and conecentri¢e rhomboids on B, fig. 4, none of the engravings on the shells

ot the north-west area appear on the tjurungas or the crayon drawings of the

central tribes. The latter were collected by one of the authors,

it would seem that the art of the pear|-shell ornament is confined to the north-

west, with the exception of the parallel lines and star motif, which is only found

on both baler and pearl! shells in the centre of the continent (fig. 7). It is note-

worthy that the ornaments tend to become engraved with the typical design of the

area in which they are used. Thus, a pearl shell from Barrow Creek (GQ, fig. 5), to

which reference has already been made, has the typical design of the ‘‘centre’’

superimposed on an almost obliterated meander design of the north.

From the information already obtained, the southerly diffusion of these orna-

ments is a noteworthy feature. They originate in two well-defined areas, the pearl-

shell in north-western Australia, with King’s Sound as an approximate centre,

and the baler shell in the Cape York area of Northern Queensland. Both types

can be traced through Central Australia to South Australia (fig. 1).

Numerous references in literature support this evidence. Campbell, 1914,

p. 86, noticed pearl shells in the Gascoyne districts similarly marked to those at

Sunday Island. He concluded that they had been carried southward by barter,

as the shells indigenous to the Gascoyne districts were much smaller and belong

to a different species (probably M. margaritifera).

Roth, 1897, p. 163, when studying the aborigines of south-western Queensland,

found that the pearl shell ornaments were traded to those districts from the north-

west. Similarly, the same author, in p. 112, mentioned that the baler shell orna-

ments reached the same districts by the north or north-easterly trade routes,

originating in the Gulf of Carpentaria. He traces these routes in considerable

detail.

Hale and Tindale (1934, p. 99) when at Princess Charlotte Bay, ascertained

the direction of their diffusion ; they write: ‘‘The area over which these baler shell

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 133

ornaments are made is limited to Cape York, but the shell discs are articles of trade

to southern inland people.’

Mr. T. Vogelsang, in a personal communication, said that trade in these orna-

ments, as well as pituri and other articles, took place among the Dieri along the

present Queensland stock route, which runs in a somewhat north-easterly direction,

An examination of the distribution and uses of these ornaments reveals an

interesting fact. In plaves where the articles originate they have, in general, an

utilitarian purpose, particularly in the ease of the baler shell. As these are traded

further from their source they assume the function of ornament, and in the most

distant localities are associated only with the ceremonial aspect of the tribe. Tu

other words, they tend to take on a more secret character as they travel further

from their source. The two types meet in South Australia, the Anjamatana tribe,

to the east, using the baler shell, and the Ngadjuri tribe, the adjacent tribe to the

west, the pearl shell.

REPLACEMENT,

The high value placed upon these shell ornaments in the mland districts is

Ulusirated by the fact that numerous replacements ov substitutes of both types of

shell ornaments have been found, and that such replacements have oceurred where

the shells have magical or ceremonial value. Thus the kaolin specimen (C, pl. ix),

collected at Cooper’s Creek, was made by tribes amony whom, as before observed,

the baler shell ornaments are of value both as magical objects and factors in initia-

tion rituals.

The bone example (A, pl. ix) is unfortunately unlocalized, but the legend of

the two Oruntja men, collected by Spencer and Gillen in Central Australia, in

which a Lonku-lonku was made from a shoulder-blade, shows that bone replacements

are known in Central Australia. Roth (1897, p. 112) records that at Roxburgh,

in north-west Queensland, and south of that station (which is well within the area

wherein the shells are used as ornaments at Boulia) the shell ornament is copied

by grinding down pieces of broken chinaware,

Another interesting replacement is that collected on the Canning Stock route

of Western Australia, where a fruit tin lid had been used in place of a pearl shell

ornament (D, pl. viii). C, pl. vii, figured as a comparison, is a pearl shell pen-

dant, also collected on the Canning Stock route,

Usr by Women.

In general these shell ornaments are for male use only, and this is a fact to

which any observers have drawn attention, Tt appears, however, that in certain

134 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

circumstances women are associated, as is shown by Gason’s description of the

circumcision ceremony, to which reference has been made earlier in this paper

(Gason, 1874, p. 18). Also in the Anjamatana tribe of the Northern Flinders

certain female relatives handle the baler shell necklace before it is placed round

the neck of the initiate. Sir Edward Stirling, in a note on shell ornaments in a

ease in the South Australian Museum, also mentions their use ‘‘in certain cireum-

stances’? by women. Hale and Tindale obtained specimens of baler shell orna-

ments at Princess Charlotte Bay from both men and women.

SUMMARY.

This paper describes the aboriginal shell ornaments of Australia. A selected

number are figured and described, and their method of manufacture, use, magical

value, mythology, design, and distribution are discussed.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

The authors wish to acknowledge the help received from both the Australian

Museum of Sydney and Miss D. Cowan of Western Australia.

LITERATURE,

Campbell, W. D. (1914) : Trans. Roy. Soc., W. Aust., 1.

Davidson, D. 8S. (1987) : Mem. Amer. Phil. Soc., LX.

Elkin, A. P. in F. D. McCarthy (1938) : Australian Aboriginal Art.

Gason, Samuel (1874) : The Dieyerie tribe of South Australian Aborigines, 1874.

Hale and Tindale (1934) : Rec. S. Aust. Mus.

Love, J. R. B. (1915) : Trans. Roy. Soc., 8S. Aust., XL.

Martin and Panter (1863) : Journals and reports of two voyages to the Glenelg

River and North-Western Australia.

Mountford, C. P. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc., 8S. Aust., LXI,

Roth, Walter E. (1897) : Ethnological Studies among the North-Western Central

Queensland Aborigines.

Spencer and Gillen (1899) : Native Tribes of Central Australia.

Spencer and Gillen (1904) : Northern Tribes of Central Australia.

UO D>

MoUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SHELL ORNAMENTS 135

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate viii.

Repaired plain Pearl Shell ornament, Central Australia.

Engraved Pearl Shell ornament, Western Australia.

Engraved Pearl Shell ornament, Canning Stock Route, Western Australia.

Fruit tin lid used in place of Pearl Shell ornament, Canning Stock Route,

Western Australia.

and F. Method of wearing Pearl Shell ornaments, Sunday Island, north-

western Australia.

Plate ix.

Plain bone ornament, locality unknown.

Plain Baler Shell ornament, Minnie Downs, South Australia.

Plain Kaolin ornament, Cooper’s Creek, South Australia.

Decorated Pearl Shell ornament, Barrow Creek, Central Australia.

Decorated Baler Shell ornament, Daly Waters, Northern Territory.

Initiate wearing Baler Shell ornament, Anjamatana Tribe, South Australia.

Baler Shell on spear-thrower, Princess Charlotte Bay, Northern Queensland.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE VIII.

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. VI, PLATE IX.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF STONE MONUMENTS

OF THE WORORA

By J. R. B. LOVE

Summary

Attention has been called to the presence in Australia of arranged stones, presumably

evidence of a stone-cult of the aboriginals, but concerning which there has been little

recorded at first-hand from aboriginal informants.

Professor F. Wood Jones (1925) has drawn attention to some interesting arrangements

of stones in South Australia, and he also notes references by Brough Smyth (1978) to

arranged stones in Victoria.

ILLUSTRATIONS or STONE MONUMENTS

oF THE WORORA

By J. R. B. LOVE.

Plates x—xiv.

ATTENTION has been called to the presence in Australia of arranged stones, pre-

sumably evidence of a stone cult of the aboriginals, but concerning which there has

been little recorded at first-hand from aboriginal informants.

Professor F. Wood Jones (1925) has drawn attention to some interesting

arrangements of stones in South Australia, and he also notes references by Brough

Smyth (1878) to arranged stones in Victoria.

The territory of the Worora tribe, which lies between the Glenelg and Prince

Regent Rivers, in North-Western Australia, is plentifully besprinkled with stone

monuments which still oeeupy an important place in the mythology, as also in

the everyday talk, of the people.

The Worora stone monuments are of two different classes, viz. those which are

natural rock formations and to which a mythological origin has been attributed

by the Worora, and, secondly, those which are patently of human arranging. This

second class is again to be divided into two groups, those to which the Worora

attribute a supernatural origin, and those which are admittedly of human arrange-

ment or erection.

Arranged stones, if heavy enough to withstand the levelling tendencies of rain

and wind, remain as permanent memorials to the activities of the men who ar-

ranged them, even though, as must be the case in many parts of Australia, the

people who knew their meaning have long been dead. But, whether arranged or

natural formations, the stories associated with these rocks and stones can be ob-

tained only from men to whom they have a meaning and value.

Fortunately, in the Worora tribe we have a surviving people who retain their

traditional lore; this lore the elder men willingly impart to a trusted enquirer.

The Worora believe in a class of supernatural beings, named Wondjuna.

Each local horde of the tribe has its own particular Wondjuna, with his own

proper name. The Wondjuna have been elsewhere described by the writer (Love,

1929, p. 6-15) and by Professor A. P. Elkin of Sydney (1930, p. 256-269). Many

of the natural features of the land, and also the arranged stones, represent in the

Worora mythology, the scenes of exploits of one or many of the Wondjuna.

138 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Animals, birds, and insects are also credited with human attributes in the

times past, and many of the natural or arranged rocks and stones represent ex-

ploits of various of these creatures. The Wondjwna, and no less the lower creatures

featured in Worora mythology, are represented in story as having travelled about

the land, hunting for food and performing ceremonies in much the same way as

the present generation of Worora people, and have left the land dotted with monu-

ments to their experiences.

Most of these places, whether naturally or artificially marked, play an impor-

tant part in the Worora theory of conception and birth. The Worora belief is that

a man conceives the spirit of his child, either in a dream or by catching it in a

lightning flash, at some spot where the spirits of children are present, waiting to

be conceived by the father. When a child is born, the father thinks back to where

he imagines he may have camped and conceived the spirit of the child. When the

child can sit up, the father gives it the name of the place where he believes he con-

ceived it. This place is called wungguru. A normal child, boy or girl, claims a

certain spot as his or her wungguru, the place from which his spirit emerged, and

where other spirits are waiting to be conceived by man and born as children.

Some of the rock monuments, natural or arranged, are just described as

wungguru, without any special incident in the mythical past being allotted to

them. There does not seem to be any difference in efficacy or fertility between

those wungguru which have an incident attached to them and those which have

none.

In the illustrations to this paper it will be seen that the monuments may be

(1) Remarkable natural features;

(2) Monoliths, not heavier than one or two men could erect;

(3) Groups of elongated or peculiar-looking stones ;

(4) Elaborate arrangements of stones, such as circles, parallel lines, ovals, or

more intricate designs ;

(5) Cairns.

Among monuments which have no mythological story are single stones erected

to commemorate some striking incident, such as the killing of a big kangaroo, the

place where a man had a narrow escape (e.g. from snakebite or fall from a horse).

Also, a stone placed in a prominent position to draw attention to a sacred place,

or even to a spot where a hunter might hope to find a kangaroo resting behind a

rock, On one oceasion when the writer shot a ‘‘plain turkey’’ his aboriginal eom-

panion marked the place with a stone. Such spots could become legendary, and,

with repeated exaggerations in the telling, even mythical in time.

Im ascribing natural features to the activities of mythical ancestors, the ob-

LOVE—ABORIGINAL STONE MONUMENTS 139

jects represented are enormously magnified by their monuments. Thus a parcel

of cooked fruit is represented by a rock more than one hundred feet long (A, pl. x) ;

the digging of an edible root is shown by a cleft in the rock many feet wide and

many yards long, and the head of a Wondjuna is two feet in diameter. Cairns have

quite different meanings in different localities. Thus, in the illustrations given, a

cairn represents the place where a Wondjuna lay down and died (so Sir George

Grey was not so far out in his assumption that the cairns he saw near the Prince

Regent River were tombs) ; again, a big stone on a cairn represents a mass of

cooked food (D, pl. xiv) ; and a group of cairns are ‘‘sneezing places’’ (C, pl. x).

It may be remarked that, with the one exception of the stone that represents a

subineision (B, pl. xiv), none of the long or cylindrical stones has any phallic

significance.

A further type of stone arrangement is that left after death and burial cere-

monies. On the first night after the death of a man the body, with thumbs tied

together and big toes tied together, is doubled wp, laid on its side on the ground,

and surrounded by an oval of stones set in the earth. Next day the body is placed

on a platform of branches, to await the drying and bleaching of the bones. The

oval of stones remains, and is often to be found where the name of the man who

died has long been forgotten. This oval looks like a grave, but no body remains

are there (C, pl. xiii). The burial platform is laid across poles supported by four

corner posts, which are in turn supported by small piles of stones. When the

platform has decayed, or been burnt by a bush fire, these corner supports remain,

as four little heaps of stones. When the body is placed on the platform the custom

is, or was, to put a long line, or else a circle, of large stones near, or surrounding,

the body on the platform. Each stone represented aman. After a day or two, the

elder men, particularly the banmandja, or wizard, examined this line or cirele of

stones. Should one of them be marked by a splash of the fluid dripping from the

decomposing corpse on the platform it was taken as proof that the man represented

by that stone was the guilty one, responsible for the death, and the suspected in-

dividual was speared by men detailed for the purpose. This line or cirele of stones

remains when the bones have been removed for placing in the appropriate cave.

LITERATURE.

Brough Smyth, R. (1878) : Aborigines of Victoria.

Elkin, A. P. (1930) : Oceania, i, No. 3, pp. 258-269.

Love, J. R. B. (1929) : Trans. Roy. Soc., W. Aust., xvi, pp. 15-16.

Mountford, C. P. (1938) : Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Aust., Ixii.

Wood Jones, F. (1925) : Journ, Roy. Anthro. Inst., lv.

140 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate x.

A. Sandstone rock on the sea coast. The larger rock above the cliff represents ‘a

wallet of paper-bark, such as is used for carrying food. The smaller rock on

top is a mass of cooked ‘‘mandjawora’’, a small black berry that is roasted,

pounded into a mass, and then carried to the main camp to be shared. These

masses may weigh five pounds. The rock is named ‘‘Tjimbalert’’, which

means the bark dish (1).

27

B. The wungguru of the ‘‘white-fish’’, a hollow circle of stones. This is the re-

productive centre for this species of fish.

C. Dindjin kart, meaning ‘‘Sneezing-things’’. Cairns of stones near Sale River.

Seven cairns can be seen in the picture. The explanation is that a man who

might pass that way on his hunting must deposit a spear or a stick on one of

these heaps. Should he fail to do this, he would be troubled by sneezing for

the rest of the day.

D. Wiarinja, a stingray. This is a rock that has fallen across a stream, several

miles from the sea shore. It represents a stingray that swam from the sea to

this place, but could go no further.

Plate xi.

A. Kulorubada. The large round stone projecting from the earth represents the

head of Kulorubada. It isa red stone. The name Kulorubada means ‘‘ He-

having-the-tranquil-dove’’. The white stone set on the head represents the

dove (Geopelia tranquilla), named kulorugu. The dove is sitting on the head

of Kulorubada. The little stones round the head are chicks of the dove.

B. Kunggurum, the wungguru of the kunggurum, a palm with an edible fruit.

C. Ilaidja, a yellow, cylindrical stone, set in a cave that contains the pictures of the

Wondjuna named Kulorubada. Ilaidja is the edible root of a lily. The root

is cooked in ashes, then pounded and rolled into a more or less cylindrical

shape, really very like this stone in shape and colour. Beside the wadja stone

is part of a human thigh bone, from a long-forgotten cave burial.

D. Stone set to mark the proximity of a store-house of sacra (‘‘bull-roarers’’).

(1) Mountford, 1938, fig. 12, p. 252, figures an aboriginal crayon drawing from the Warburton

Ranges of Western Australia that illustrates the wooden dish, resting on the lower grinding

stone, which was left behind by the mythical Kunkarunkara women. These are now a large hill

near Meitika water hole.

LoveE—-ABORIGINAL STONE MONUMENTS 141

Plate xii.

A, Rangqudj ingganung, meaning, ‘‘ Where-the-heart-is’’, This is a heart-shaped

stone, representing the heart of a kangaroo killed here by a group of Wond-

juna,

RB. Burot kenga, weaning ‘‘ He-wrestled’’. This is the scene of a great wrestling

that took place among kangaroo ancestors. The stones set upright represent

kangaroos that wrestled ; stones lying on the ground those thrown down in the

struggle,

C. Ranggudj-inggaunung. The heap of stones on a boulder is the spot where the

Wondjuna eooked the kangaroo, whose heart they put on another stone,

D, Kanawei, a great man of the Worora, once lay asleep near a tree. He was

awakened, or said that he was awakened, by a black snake passing over his

thighs, fle rose and set wp this stone to mark the place, and is here seen with

his hand resting on his kawanja (black snake) stone.

Plate xiii.

A. Kulorubada, a cairn at the foot of a ‘‘bottle tree’’ (Adansonia gregorti). This

marks the spot where the Wondjuna named Aulorubadu lay down and died.

B. Ngo:-go. This group of stones is on the brow of a hill overlooking an arm of

the sea. According to the story the sea once threatened to overflow the earth.

As the tide rose in the yalley below, a boobook owl, seeing the danger, flew to

the brow of the hill. He seated himself on this spot, looked down on the sea,

and uttered his awe-inspiring ery, ‘‘Ngo:k-nge:k! Nqo:k-ongo:k!l’’ Seeing

the big eyes of the owl, and hearing his terrifying voice, the sea receded. These

stones arose spontaneously to mark the place where maununggota, the boobook

owl, saved the land from being overwhelmed by the sea.

C, Stones at the scene of a burial platform, The remnants of the bleaching plat-

form can be seen, four poles supported by stones. The line of big stones

passing across the picture is the row of ‘‘inquest’’ stones, At the right ean

be seen the oval of stones where the corpse lay for the first night, before being

placed upon the platform.

D. Men at the store of sacra, One man stooping to remove a ‘‘ Bull-roarer’’ from

the cleft where they are stored.

Plate xiv.

A. Tjakarara-tjari-kadjirim, a double row of stones that represents the root of a

wild grape extending under the surface, In the centre foreground, at the end

142 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the double row, is a stone with a hole in it. This represents the kuworw, or

butt-of-the-stem, the part where the stem of the grape vine emerges from the

soil.

B. Njanggaltja, subincision. This stone resembles a subincised penis, and has been

set up because of its resemblance.

C. Tjakarara-tjari-kadjirim, which means ‘‘ Where-they-dug-tjakarara’’, the root

of the wild grape. This is an inlet of the sea, which is said to have been made

by some Wondjuna digging out roots of the wild grape.

D. Tjakarara-tjari-kadjirim. The large stone set on the cairn represents the mass

of cooked and pounded grape vine root. This cooked mass is called nuguwa.

VoL. VI, PLATE X.

kec. S.A. MusEuM

Rec. $,A. MusEuMmM VoL. VI, PLaTe NI.

Rec. S.A. MuseEuM VoL. VI, PLATE XII.

Rec. S.A. MUSEUM VoL. VI, PLATE NITI.

Rec. S.A. MusrEuM VoL. VI, PLaTE XIV.

SOME AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC

SKULLS

By FRANK J. FENNER, HONORARY CRANIOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN

MUSEUM

Summary

The term scaphocephaly has been used in two ways in anthropological literature.

Firstly, to describe long narrow normal skulls, like those of the Australian and the

Eskimo, which are distinguished by a flattening of the paramedian parts of the frontal

and parietal bones, and by the development of a sagittal crest of the parietal and

sometimes also of the frontal bone.

Secondly, the term is used in connection with a very long narrow type of skull in

which there is invariably a premature, probably foetal, synostosis of the sagittal

suture. These skulls are rare, and occur in many races of man, European, Egyptians,

Negroes, Australians, etc. In this paper, in accordance with Poirier (1931) the term

scaphocephaly is used to describe the second type of skull, i.e. the pathological type.

Some AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC

SKULLS

By FRANK J, FENNER, Honorary Cranio.ocisr, Sourn Ausrratian Museum.

Plate xv and Text-fig. 1-8.

INTRODUCTION.

THE term scaphocephaly has been used in two ways in anthropological literature.

Firstly, to describe long narrow normal skulls, like those of the Australian and the

Eskimo, which are distinguished by a flattening of the paramedian parts of the

frontal and parietal bones, and by the development of a sagittal crest of the parie-

tal and sometimes also of the frontal bone.

Secondly, the term is used in connection with a very long narrow type of skull

in which there is invariably a premature, probably foetal, synostosis of the sagittal

suture. These skulls are rare, and occur in many races of man, Europeans, Egyp-

tians, Negroes, Australians, ete. In this paper, in accordance with Poirier (1931)

the term scaphocephaly is used to describe the second type of skull, 7.e. the patho-

logical type.

It may be noted here that premature closure of the sagittal suture may occur

without any trace of scaphocephaly, e.g. skull A999 (South Australian Muesum,

Adelaide), that of a youth of 14 years, shows complete synostosis of the posterior

half of the sagittal suture without any deformation of the skull. Davis (1867)

deseribes a similar skull, that of an Australian female about 17 years old with

premature obliteration of the sagittal suture, but no seaphocephaly. Hamy (1874)

also describes skulls with premature sagittal synostosis but no seaphocephaly, and

suggests that in these the fusion begins at some later (postnatal) period, when the

ossification of the parietals is well advanced. In scaphocephalie skulls the synos-

tosis commences during intranterine life.

PREVIOUS LITERATURE.

The only references which I can find to scaphocephaly in the Australian abo-

riginal are those of Davis (1867). He describes scaphocephalic skulls from Me-

Leay River, New South Wales, and Victoria Tribe, Australia.

N. de Miklouko-Maclay (1883) published a short description of skull B1, de-

seribed later in this paper, but did not recognize it as being scaphocephalic,

144 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SOURCE OF MATERIAL.

During an examination of over 2,000 Australian aboriginal skulls in the

museums of Adelaide, Melbourne, Sydney, and Canberra, five scaphocephalic

skulls were seen. Particulars of these skulls may be given:

REFERENCE

No. LOCALITY. AGE. SEX. MUSEUM.

A.248 Wellington, R. Murray, c.6yrs. —— S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

South Australia

A.16520 Teatree Gully, South Australia Adult J 8.A. Museum, Adelaide.

B.1 Rockhampton, Queensland Adult rol Australian Museum,

Sydney.

31837 Riverina District, N.S.W. Adult roe National Museum,

Melbourne.

38586 Riverina District, N.S.W. e.4-5 yrs. —— National Museum,

Melbourne.

OBSERVATIONS MADE.

All five scaphocephalic skulls were measured and examined. Circumstances

prevented a fuller examination of the two specimens from the National Museum,

Melbourne. A search for a comprehensive series of measurements with which to

compare those of the abnormal skulls proved fruitless, and the figures given in

Table 1 are from several sources. The reference numbers of the measurements cor-

respond with those in Martin (1928), whose technique has been followed in all

cases.

(a) Measurements 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 18, 20, 22a, 25, 26, 27, 28(1), 29, 30, 31(1),

32(1), 32(5), 33(1), 33(4), 38, 48, 44, 45, 46, 48, 50, 51, 52, 54, 55, 72, 73, 74, 75,

and 75(1) were made from the reconstructed normae of Wood Jones (1929).

(b) Measurements 5, 17, 28, 31, 40 are the averages of the measurements of

the first 50 skulls of Berry and Robertson’s series (1914), from which Wood

Jones’s normae were constructed.

(c) Measurements 7, 11, 12, 23, 24, 57, 57(1) were made on a series of fifty

adult crania (unsexed) from Swanport, S.A., which are housed in the South Aus-

tralian Museum.

(d) Measurements 62, 63 are from Campbell (1925).

No measurements of juvenile Australian aboriginal crania were available for

comparison. For this reason five normal aboriginal children’s skulls of about six

years of age were measured. The skulls are from the collection in the South Aus-

tralian Museum.

The measurements are set out in Table 1, and the indices derived therefrom in

Table 2. Where a figure is preceded by a question mark, the measurement is ap-

proximate owing to indefinite measuring points.

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 145

TABLE I.

Scaphocephalic Skulls.

Normal Juvenile Skulls, Juvenile. Adult.

Ox Normal pee ees

Bub es * Adult is

Measurement. £ : mM S at oo Skull. oo D & a

2 & S&S 8 8S Baverge £ 8B 8 | &

aa <a <q a < <q figures. <q 8 o8 feat <q

Greatest skull length 1 171 173 180 167 175 185 197 196 213 203 200

Glabella-Inion length 2 131 159 164 155 162 179 177 156 204 202 189

Glabella-Lambda 3 163 161 172 164 167 180 187 2195 7208 197 189

length

Skull base length 5 88 89 87 85 87 98 86 84 114 101 _

Length and width of 7 933 35 36 37 38 36 31 31 36 937 _

foramen magnum 30 27 28 32 31 31 30 26 30 32 —

Greatest skull breadth 8 131 121 129 126 125 130 122 134 123+ 121 113

Smallest frontal , 9 90 89 90 91 89 94 93 95 101 90 88

breadth

Greatest frontal 10 103 103 109 105 103 107 104 122 104 104 98

breadth

Biauricular breadth 11 105 99 105 104 106 119 100 93 115 108 _

Greatest occipital 12 100 99 91 105 98 111 100 106 2108 106 102

breadth

Mastoid breadth 13 85 89 107 90 91 99 85 74 103 100 —

Basion-Bregma height 17 ?114 119 119 119 116 130 1124-9137 149 134 —_—

Ear-Bregma height 20 107 104 114 108 107 110 108 7131 128 118 110

Highest point of skull 22a 95 90 95 98 93 94 101 130 116 101 98

from Glabello-

Tnion line

Horizontal cireumfer- 23 480 471 495 471 478 535 505 536 560 545 527

ence on Glabello-

Opisthion line

Transverse arefrom 24 267 265 284 276 270 293 267 3345 310 262 7260

porion to porion

Median sagittal are 25 341 342 357 343 345 360 392 458 420 408

Median sagittal 26 113 120 117 115 120 120 142 7188 138 1386 136

frontal are

Median sagittal 27 115 108 127 118 128 128 137-7140 2160 152 99127

parietal are

Median sagittal 28 113 114 110 109 109 112 113 = 7130 #122 2120 seo

occipital are "

Median sagittal 28(1) 75 75 67 69 69 56 75 295 65 50 72

supra-occipital are

Median sagittal 29 97 102 103 99 102 111 110 92137 121 103 114

frontal chord

Median sagittal 30 105 101 114 105 107 115 126 9134 150 135 9121

parietal chord

Median sagittal 31 92 91 88 94 87 93 82 2102 298 96 _—

occipital chord

Median sagittal 31(1) 65 65 57 64 61 52 65 985 959 48 64

supra-occipital

chord

Frontal angle 32(1) 68° 62° 63° 63° 60° 57° 66° 70° 66° 57° 59°

(Bregma-Nasion-

Tnion)

Angle of frontal Saya is He LST PIS ee EBB eelgae ld te yap? 126° 129°

convexity

Angle of Lambda- 33(1) 157° 103° —_ — 104° 94° 114° 118° 104° 92° %97°

Inion line with

Frankfurt Hori-

zontal

146 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TapuE I (continued).

Scaphocephalic Skulls.

Normal Juvenile Skulls. Juvenile. Adult.

O's Normal

WV ; 5 hy is} oo Sku © bY aS

Leasurement s 5 S & x Ea Se Average 4 % 3 r B

: aa < a <q < figures. <4 8 0 fq <

Occipital angle 83(4) 129° 122° 122° 129° 120° Tet 104s to? LSS lig? 3982

(Lambda-Inion-

Opisthion)

Cubic capacity of 38 1,090 1,040 1,230 1,140 1,070 1,290 41,160 — 1,400 1,270 _

skull (in ¢.es.)

Face length 40 284 92 92 85 86 99 287 83 105 — —_

Upper facial breadth 43 92 93 96 96 92 109 92 997 119 <= —_

Biorbital breadth 44 86 85 88 88 86 99 85 —_— 106 —_ —_

Bizygomatic breadth 45 297 105 116 ©2107 110 128 99 — 144 —_ oo

Middle facial breadth 46 ise 79 87 77 76 93 80 —_— 299 —- —

Upper facialheight 48 53 58 59 52 54 65 950 44 68 — —_

Anterior interorbital 50 17 20 23 20 18 21 20 — 25 24 —_—

breadth

Orbital breadth from 51 R.36 R.34 R33 B.36 R35 39 R.34 R.— R44 R420 —

maxillo-frontal L.36 1.34 1.34 1.36 L. 34 L.34 L.34 L.44 L.— —

suture

Orbital height 52 R.28 R.33 R.32 B.30 R32 34 R31 RB.— R33 R32 —

L.28 0.31 £L.32 1.29 1.32 L.31 L.28 L31 L— —

Nasal breadth 54 20 20 21 20 21 26 21 — 30 — —_

Nasal height 55 36 45 43 40 40 47 236 — 53 —_ —

Smallest breadth of 57 5 8 11 8 5 10 8 _ 13 — —_

nasal bone

Greatest breadth of | 57(1) 12 16 16 14 14 17 14 ay 221 —< —

nasal bone

Palatal length 62 36 46 44 43 40 51:5 40 — 54 _— —_

Palatal breadth 63 29 28 27 25 30 39 31 —_ 35 — —

Profile angle 72 84° 76° 78° 83° 80° 89° 91° 85° 87° —

Nasal profile angle 73 87° 79° 83° 86° 84° 92° 999° 87° 92° — —

Alveolar profile angle 74 78° 68° 62° = 64° 68° 73° = 81° 66° — _—

Profile angle of nasal 75 82° 69° 67° 76° 76° 66° 99° — 76° — —_—

roof

Angle ofnasalroof 75(1) 2° pe i ae 4° 13° —8° —_ 4 BST — —

with profile line

* These refer to the definitions given by Martin (1928). + 130 between supra = meatal crests.

DESCRIPTION OF SKULLS.

(1) A 248, child of approximately six years, Wellington, South Australia.

The accompanying figures (fig. 1, 4, and 5) show the remarkable shape of

this skull. There is no trace whatever of a sagittal suture. The posterior third of

the right and the posterior two-thirds of the left squamous sutures are also com-

pletely fused. All other sutures are normal for the age.

Accompanying this synostosis is a great forward bulging of the frontal bone,

with a strongly orthognathie face, an elongation of the parietal bone, and down-

ward projection of the occipital bone behind. There is a well-developed keel along

the median sagittal plane of the frontal bone extending from glabella to just

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 147

behind bregma, where it is replaced by the flattening of a post-coronal depression,

The parietals themselves are very slightly keeled about. half-way back. From here

the bone slopes away rapidly to the occipital bone. There is no sign of a parietal

tuberosity on either side.

Tasie IT,

Scaphocephalie Skulls.

Normal Juvenile Skulls, Juvenile, Adult.

Se oe —Io1—<—. =_eeeses oo

a € Adult Stull Pa

Ya 2 & 5 8 @ “Averge 2 B 8 e

Q Dal et to iS 2 ol we ra nd cal

<q <q < <q 4 Figures. <4 oF en ise) 4

Leugth—Breadth 76:6 70-0 70-2 Ti-4 71-4 70-4 61-9 68-4 57-7 59-6 56-5

Longth—Teight 66-7 68-8 66-1 71-3 66-0 70-3 56-8 69-4 70-0 66-0 —

Breadth—Height 87-0 98-3 2-4 94-4 92-8 100-0 91-8 102+2 121-1 117-4 —

Length—Anricular height 62-6 60-1 63-3 G4-7 61-1 59-5 54:8 66-8 60-1 58:1 —

Skull Height 72+5 56-7 57-9 63-2 61-2 o2-5 57-1 83-3 56-8 50-0 —

Transverse Frontal 87-3 86-6 82-6 86-7 86-4 90-+ 884 77-8 96-1 86-5 89-8

Transverse Fronto-parietal 68-7 73-6 69-8 72-2 71-2 72-3 76-2 70-9 88-1 74-4 77-9

Sagittal Pronto-parietal 101-8 90-0 108-5 100-3 93-8 106-7 96-5 74-5 116-0 108-8 93-4

Sagittal Frontal 85-8 85-0 88-3 86-1 85-0 2-5 77-5 G28 87-7 75-7 83-8

Sagittal Parietal 91-3 93-5 89-7 89-0 Sd-4 89-8 93:0 99-7 94-8 SS-8 95-3

Sagittal Oecipital 81-4 80-0 80:0 86-2 79-8 83-0 72-6 78-5 80-0 80-0 ae

Convexity IndexofSupra- 86-7 86-7 85-8 92-7 88-4 93-0 86-7 89-5 90-8 96-0 88-9

oceipital

Upper Face 54-6 55-2 50-9 48-6 49-1 a0-8 55-6 — 64-8 = —

Orbital 77-8 97-1 97-0 88-3 91-4 87-2 91-1 83-3 R.75-0 76-2 —

L. 70-5

Interorbital 19-8 23-5 26-1 22-7 29.3 21-2 93-5 = 25-5 _ —

Nasal 55-6 44-4 48-8 50-0 50-3 55-3 A+B — 466 — —_—

Palatal 80-6 60-9 61-4 78-2 75-0 76-0 77-5 — 4-8 -— —_

Transverse Cranio-facial 74-0 86-8 89-9 84-9 88-0 98-5 Bla — 117-0 — —

Fronto-biorbital 97-8 95-7 93-7 94-8 96-7 90-4 101-0 98-0 84-9 — —

Jugo-frontal 92-8 84-8 77-6 85-1 80-9 7a-4 94-0 — 70-0 — =

Transverse Nasal Bone 41:7 50-0 68+8 57-1 35-7 58-8 57-1 — fi2-0 = —

A study of the measurements shows that the frontal and parietal bones have

been considerably lengthened in a sagittal direction. The occipital bone has under-

gone no lengthening, but it bulges down because of the lower position of lambda.

In spite of the great longitudinal extension of the bones of the vault, the

breadth measurements of the skull are only shehthy reduced. This is due, in the

case of the greatest width measurement, to a lateral bulging of the squamous

temporal bone, a condition probably associated with the partial fusion of the

squamous sutures. In spite of the great length and normal width of the skull, the

eranial contents are approximately normal, This is due to the pronounced lateral

flattening of the parietal bones.

As the photograph (pl. xy, fig. 1) shows, there is a greater degree of local

bulging in this skull than is usually seen, here are bulges in front of the spheno-

parietal grooves, and the occipital bone consists of a large supraoccipital protuber-

ance and two smaller symmetrical bulges on the nuchal plane of the bone.

148 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The basis eranii is of normal dimensions, though somewhat curved with its

concavity downwards.

The face shows strong orthognathism, probably caused by the great bulging

of the frontal bone, and accentuated by the flatness of the nasal bones.

— A248. ----"A56. 9-1 Zem.

Fig. 1. Diopterographic tracings of norma. lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull A248

(Wellington, S.A.), compared with a normal aboriginal skull of a child about the same age (A56).

(B = bregma, L = lambda of A248) (B’ = bregma, L’ = lambda of A56).

There is no trace of the sagittal beak of Turner. The bone of the whole of the

vault is considerably thinner than normal, and the juga cerebralia are particularly

well marked. A skiagram of this skull (pl. xv, fig. 2) shows the ‘‘beaten-silver”’

effect in the bones of the vault.

The surface of the parietals shows no trace of the radiations and etching of the

bone on which Hamy comments, but this condition is evident on the frontal bone

just above glabella. The outer table of the parietal bone is beset with many tiny

vascular pores, some of which can be seen in figure. There are no parietal fora-

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 149

mina present, but in a series of 1,154 adult Australian skulls recently examined

(Fenner, 1938) absence of these foramina bilaterally was recorded in 36 per cent.

(2) A.16520, adult male, Teatree Gully, South Australia.

This skull, of which the face and basis eranii have been destroyed, was found

associated with a few other bones which are normal save for an exaggerated for-

ward bowing of the upper third of both femora.

Al6S20. 2° 1

Fig. 2. Diopteragraphic tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull A16520

(Teatree Gully, S.A.).

There is no trace of a sagittal suture. The skull is that of an old man, and

the coronal suture is obliterated save for pars complicata. The pars lambdoidea

of the lamboid suture is completely fused. The other sutures are open.

The general shape of the skull can be seen in the diagrams (fig. 2, 4, and 5).

There are no parietal tuberosities present, and there is a moderately well-developed

sagittal keel of the frontal and anterior half of the parietal bones. It has an excep-

tionally long, narrow skull, and there is no bulging of the temporal bone as was

noted in A.248.

The bone of the vault is very much thinner and lighter than in a normal adult

aboriginal skull. The surface of the bone has been somewhat injured by exposure,

150 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

but there are many tiny vascular pores over the parietal bones, especially near

the midline. There is a parietal foramen on the right side in its ordinary position,

and another small emissary foramen just above and to the right of lambda.

(3) B1, adult male, Rockhampton, Queensland.

This skull is imperfectly preserved, and most of the face is missing. There is:

no trace of a sagittal suture. All other sutures are normal and not synostosed at

all. Fig. 3, 4, and 5 show the shape of this specimen.

Fig. 8. Diopterographic tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalie skull Bl (Rock-

hampton, Q.).

The features in which this skull differs from A.16520 are in part those in

which distinct differences are found between Queensland and South Australian

skulls (Fenner, 1938), 7.¢. it is broader and higher, the temporal fossae are better

filled, and the occiput is somewhat more steeply planed than A.16520.

The sagittal keel is well developed, and extends along the whole of the frontal

and the anterior half of the parietal bones. The parietal tuberosities are better de-

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 151

veloped than in the other scaphocephalic skulls, but would be classed as small.

The surface of the parietal bones between the parietal tuberosities and the sagittal

erest is quite flat. The transverse occipital torus and the mastoid processes are well

developed, and the glenoid fossae deep. The basis cranii is of the usual aboriginal

type. Beyond the fact that the bone of the vault is not excessively thinned, it is

not possible to state whether there is any evidence of past disease of the bones.

A248. —-—Al6520. -----Bl.

O 1 22cm. .

Fig. 4. Diopterographic tracings of norma verticalis of the three scaphocephalic skulls

A248, A16520 and Bl. (Oriented about a common point N = nasion).

152 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(4) 31837, adult male, Parish of Nyang, Southern Riverina, New South

Wales.

This is a well preserved skull, rather highly impregnated with lime. There

is no trace of a sagittal suture. The coronal suture is almost completely fused,

whilst the pars asterica of the lambdoid is the only part of that suture not fused.

The internasal suture is fused in the greater part of its extent.

— A248. —-—-—Al6520. —---BI.

© 1 2cm.

Fig. 5. Diopterographic tracings of norma occipitalis of the three scaphocephalic skulls

A248, A16520 and Bl. (Oriented about a common Frankfurt horizontal).

It corresponds rather closely with the other adult Australian scaphocephalie

skulls (see fig. 6 and 7). It is greatly elongated, narrow, and high, and the

frontal bone is more bulging than usual. There is no sign of a parietal tuberosity

on either side; the sagittal crest of the parietal bones is fairly well developed, and

the bregmatie eminence of Klaatsch (1908) is strongly developed.

In its other features this skull is typical of the adult male Australian, with a

pronounced transverse occipital torus, well developed superorbital ridges and

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 153

supramastoid crests, deep nasion, wide nasal aperture, subnasal prognathism,

shallow guttered nasal margins, ete. There are no parietal foramina. The tem-

poral lines are very high and well marked.

The glenoid fossae show advanced arthritic changes. The suture between the

squamous temporal bone and the great wing of the sphenoid is raised up on a

prominent crest, and in front of this there is a well marked spheno-parietal groove.

Fig. 6. Diopterographie tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull 31837 (River-

ina District, N.S.W.).

(5) 38586, child ¢. 4-5 years old, near Moulamein, Southern Riverina, New

South Wales.

Although included here as a scaphocephalic skull, early closure of the sagittal

154 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

suture probably played only a part in the development of its remarkable shape.

It is fairly heavily mineralized and encrusted with carbonate of lime. The bones

constituting the right side of the face are missing.

Fig. 7. Diopterographic tracing of norma facialis of the scaphocephalic skull 31837 (Riverina

District, N.S.W.).

The sagittal, coronal, lambdoid, and greater part of both squamous sutures

appear to be fused. In general contour it resembles A.248 somewhat, with a very

protruberant forehead ; flattened, backwardly projecting parietal bones with no

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC: SKULLS 155

definite parietal tuberosities and no parietal foramina; and a rather bulbous occi-

pital bone.

It has several features which distinguish it from the South Australian skull.

Firstly, the extensive and general obliteration of sutures. Secondly, the large

knob-like bulge of the sagittal part of the bones of the vault, in the neighbourhood

of bregma. Also it is very heavy, and its great weight is due to the enormous

thickness of the bone. The greater part of the vault of this skull appears to be up

to 10 mm. in thickness, and the specimen weighs more than 34 lb.

Fig. 8. Diopterographic tracing of norma lateralis of the scaphocephalic skull 38586 (River-

ina District, N.S.W.).

There is a deep erosion just to the right of where lambda would probably lie.

It has irregular edges and does not penetrate the bone completely. The surface

of the bone has a curious pitted appearance over the greater part of the vault.

This skull merits a detailed study, and this short description is intended to do

no more than bring the skull under scientific notice.

156 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION.

Hamy (1874), in his review of the subject, comes to the conclusion that

scaphocephaly is the result of the synostosis of the two parietal bones, that this

synostosis is the result of a pathological process, probably inflammatory, and that

the deformation occurs only when the fusion begins during intranterine life at a

time close to the commencement of ossification of the cranial vault.

The evidence provided by these skulls supports this hypothesis. In two of

these skulls and in the McLeay River specimen described by Davis (1867) the sur-

face of the bone was covered with fine vascular pores—evidence of the pathological

condition of the bone. The other three skulls are not sufficiently well preserved

to determine the condition of their bone.

Hamy describes a scaphocephalic skull in which the posterior third of the

squamous suture is synostosed, and mentions that he considers this synostosis to

be of quite a different origin from the sagittal fusion, namely secondary to growth

changes in the underlying brain.

In skull A.248 of this series there is a synostosis of the posterior parts of the

squamous suture bilaterally ; skull 38586 shows but a trace of the squamous suture,

and Davis’s McLeay River specimen had a completely obliterated right squamous

suture. Only three out of 1,200 normal aboriginal skulls recently examined showed

fusion of the squamous sutures, and these were all the skulls of aged individuals.

Thus it seems likely that the squamous synostosis in the skulls we are considering

is definitely related to the sagittal synostosis, and there is no reason to doubt that

it is a further result of the same underlying pathological process which was re-

sponsible for the early fusion of the sagittal suture. What this pathological pro-

cess was, other than that it was probably inflammatory, is not known.

Hauschild (1921) said that seaphocephalic skulls showed a heavy layer of

osseous tissue on the tabula interna beneath the obliterated sagittal suture. The

vault of the skulls described here was not cut open, but there did not appear to be

any great thickening of bone beneath the obliterated sagittal suture as far as could

be ascertained.

SUMMARY.

Five scaphocephalic Australian aboriginal skulls have been measured and

deseribed, and their measurements compared with those of series of normal abo-

riginal skulls.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

I am indebted to Professor F. Wood Jones for the diopterographic tracings

of skulls 31837 and 38586, and for his help in the preparation of the paper. I have

FENNER—ABORIGINAL SCAPHOCEPHALIC SKULLS 157

to thank Mr. D. J. Mahony, Director of the National Museum, Melbourne; Dr. C.

Anderson, Direetor of the Australian Museum, Sydney; and the Director, Mr. H.

M. Ilale, and Board of Governors of the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, tor

their kindness in allowing me to examine the skulls in their care. Mr. C. IH. Mar-

shall, of the Adelaide Hospital, kindly prepared the skiagram reproduced in

pl. xv, fig, 2.

REFERENCES.

Berry, R. J. A. and Robertson, A. W. D. (1914): Diopterographie Tracings in

Three Normue of Ninety Australian Aboriginal Crania. Trans. Roy. Soc.,

Vict., vi.

Campbell, T. D. (1925) : ‘* The Dentition and Palate of the Australian Aborigine.”’

University of Adelaide Pub., No. 1.

Davis, J. Barnard (1867) : Thesaurus Craniorum, London.

Fenner, F. J. (19388) : The Australian Aboriginal Skull: Its non-metrical morpho-

logical characters (in manuscript).

Hamy, FE. T. (1874): Sur la genése de la scaphocephalie. Bull. Soc, d’Anthrop.

de Paris, Ser. 2, ix, p. 836.

Tauschild, M. W. (1921) : Verh. d. anatom. Ges., Ergzh, Anatom. Anz., liv., p. 85

(Abstr. in Am. J. Phys. Anthrop., v, p. 91).

Klaatseh, H, (1908): “The Skull of the Australian Aboriginal.’’ Reports from

the Pathological Laboratory of the Lunacy Department, N.S. Wales, i, Part 3,

p. 45.

Martin, R, (1928) ; ‘‘ Lehrbuch der Anthropologie’’, Bd. I1, Jena.

Miklouko-Maclay, N. de (1888): ‘‘On a very dolichocephalie skull of an Aus-

tralian Aboriginal.’’ Proc, Linn, Soc., N.S. Wales, viti, p. 401.

Poirire, P., Charpy, A., et Nicolas, A, (1931): Traité d’anatomie Humaine, 41h

Ed., Tome 1, Fase, 1, Paris.

Wood Jones, F. (1929) : Journal of Anatamy, Lxill, p. 352.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE xv.

Vig. 1, Photograph from norma lateralis of seaphocephalic skull A.248 (S.A.M.,

Adelaide). Note the small yasenlar foramina on the parietal bone

and the fusion of the posterior part of the temporoparietal suture.

(Photo: K. Sheard.)

Fig. 2. Skiagram from norma lateralis of scaphocephalic skull A.248. Note the

thinning of the lateral parts of the vault due to the pressure of the

vrowing brain, Photo: C. H. Marshall.)

Rec. S.A. MusEUM VoL. VI, PLATE XV.

A NEW STROMATEIFORM FISH FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By GILBERT P. WHITLEY, F.R.Z.S., ICHTHYOLOGIST,

THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, SYDNEY

(Contribution from The Australian Museum, )

Summary

A most interesting fish has been submitted to me for identification by the Director of

the South Australian Museum. It belongs to the Series Stromateiformes, family

Nomeidae, and represents a new genus and species, quite unlike any hitherto

described.

It is hoped that efforts will be made to obtain further specimens of this fish, since the

study of its oesophagus, to ascertain whether teeth are present there, its

branchiostegals, gill-arches, and vertebrae is very desirable, and cannot be carried out

on the unique type-specimen.

A NEW STROMATEIFORM FISH rrom SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By GILBERT P. WHITLEY, F.R.Z.S., [cHTHyoLocist, THe Ausrratian Museum,

SYDNEY.

(ConTRIBUTION FROM THE AusrRALIAN Museum. )

Plate xvi.

A most interesting fish has heen submitted to me for identification by the Director

of the South Australian Museum. It belongs to the Series Stromateiformes, family

Nomeidae, and represents a new genus and species, quite unlike any hitherto

deseribed.

It is hoped that efforts will be made to obtain further specimens of this fish,

since the study of its oesophagus, to ascertain whether teeth are present there, its

branchiostegals, gill-arches, and vertebrae is very desirable, and cannot be carried

out on the unique type-specimen,

Famity NOME IDAE

Genus Criporsa gen, nov.

Orthotype CrIpoRSA MOONTA sp. nov.

A genus of small Stromateiform fishes with the body deep, form not elongate,

flesh firm. Eye large, without adipose lids. Jaws with cusped incisors in front

and small canines at the side. First dorsal fin well developed, with twelve spines.

Soft dorsal and anal fins with about twelve rays. Pectoral fins small. Ventral

fins well developed. Seales etenoid. Coloration patterned.

In some respects this genus may represent a form ancestral to the more highly

specialized Stromateiformes.

CRIDORSA MOONTA $p. Nov.

D. xi/12; A. iii/12; P. 18; V. 1/5; C. 17,

L.lat.53. L.tr.8/1/20 from first dorsal spine, to 5/1/5 on caudal pedunele.

Head (15 mm.) 3, depth of body (21 mm.) 2-1 in standard length (45 mm.).

Kye (5 mm.) 3, interorbital (6 mm.), 2-5 in head. General facies as shown in pl.

xvi. Head very scaly, except anteriorly, where there are many large pores, the

160 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

latter mingling with scales on the broad, weakly convex interorbital. Two large

nostrils on each side. Eyes large, with supraorbital ciliary processes. Jaws equal

anteriorly, deflected downwards laterally, Premaxillary well developed, reaching

back under the scaly maxillary.

A single outer row of erect incisor teeth in each jaw, each one compressed and

with several eusps. Behind these is a series of inconspicuous villiform teeth, and

there are small spaced canines at sides of jaws. Apparently there are no teeth on

vomer or palatines.

Tongue free, tip broadly rounded. Velum maxillare present. Margins of

preorbital and of upper limb of preoperculum serrated. Lower limb of preoper-

culum weakly serrated. The interoperculum, suboperculum, and branchiostegals

are covered by strong ctenoid scales. Opercular margin free, entire. A small

opereular spine. Gill openings wide, the membranes slightly overlapping across

the narrow isthmus.

Risk of damaging the unique specimen prevents me from examining the

branchiostegals, gill-arches and oesophagus. Chin and breast scaly. The broadest

part of the fish is just behind the eyes. Body compressed, deep oval, and entirely

covered with imbricate, thin but strong, markedly ctenoid scales, which extend

over the bases of the fins.

About forty predorsal scales.

Lateral line complete, not very conspicuous, subparallel to the dorsal outline,

each scale with a short tube.

Vent small, with a papilla, a little in advance of anal fin.

Caudal peduncle constricted.

First dorsal fin well developed, of eleven spines of which the middle ones are

longest. Soft dorsal base shorter than that of spinous dorsal, and invested with

geales. Anal fin commencing below notch between dorsal fins. It has three stout

spines (middle one longest), and the soft fin terminates before the end of the soft

dorsal. Twelve dorsal and anal rays, the last ones divided to their bases. Pectorals

small, rounded, upper rays longest. Ventrais well developed, not reaching anal

when adpressed, but only as far as vent. Caudal damaged in this specimen but

probably originally emarginate.

Colour. A water-colour painting of the fresh fish shows the eround-colour as

dull brownish on the back, becoming red to orange on the flanks, and dirty yel-

lowish on the belly.

The sides of the head, body, and caudal peduncle are well-endowed with

about sixty large white oval spots which break the eround-colour into a network.

There is a subhorizontal white stripe below the eye.

The pupil of the eye is blackish, the iris is reddish to white, and the orbital

WHITLEY—A NEW FISH FROM SOUTH’ AUSTRALIA 161

margin grey. The fins are similar in ground-colour to the adjacent parts of the

body.. There is a good deal of white on the proximal half of the spinous dorsal,

towards the rear of the soft dorsal, and over the caudal fin. The rays of the fins

are largely greyish.

In spirit, the specimen is brownish-grey with the white spots now much duller.

The fins are largely infuscated and the eye is blue. On the nape and belly the spots

tend to fuse with their fellows of the other side to form cross-bars.

Described and figured from the unique holotype of the species, a specimen

45 mm. in standard length or about 24% inches overall.

Loc. South Australia: Spencer Gulf, Moonta Bay (H. Kemp, Mar. 1938).

Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. F. 2023.

162

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATE xvi.

Cridorsa moonta sp. nov. (xX 4).

Rec. S.A. MusEUM VoL. VI, PLATE XVI,

IDOTASIA OF FIJI (COLEOPTERA, CURCULIONIDAE)

By ELWOOD G. ZIMMERMAN, BERNICE P. BISHOP MUSEUM,

HONOLULU, T.H.

Summary

Heretofore five species and two varieties of Idotasia have been recorded from Fiji. In

this paper I add three new species. In using the name Idotasia Pascoe in place of

Trigonopterus Fauvel, I follow Hustache (Coleopterorum Catalogus, part 151, p. 264,

1937).

Through the kindness of the South Australian Museum I have been able to examine

the types of Lea’s Fijian species and varieties (Trans. Roy. Sco. S. Aust., 11, 1928,

pp. 156-157). I have not seen specimens of Fairmaire’s three species described as

Trigonopterus anthrax, T. semicribosus, and T. merophysioides (Ann. Ent. Soc.

France, 1881, pp. 314-316). Dr. P. Lesne, of the National Museum at Paris, kindly

compared several of our specimens with the types of T. anthrax and T. semicribosus,

and found that none of them was the same. The type of T. merophysioides could not

be located. I have been unable to glean enough information from Fairmaire’s original

descriptions to feel safe in placing them in the key.

IDOTASIA or FIJI (COLEOPTERA, CURC ULIONIDAE)

By ELWOOD G, ZIMMERMAN, Bernice P, Bishop Museum, Honotuxu, T.H.

Fig. 1.

Hererorore five species and two varieties of Idotasia have been recorded from

Fiji, In this paper I add three new species. In using the name [dotasia Pascoe

in place ot Trigonopterus Fauvel, I follow Ilustache (Coleopterorum Catalogus,

part 151, p. 264, 1937).

Through the kindness of The South Australian Museum I have been able to

examine the types of Lea’s Fijian species and varieties (Trans. Roy. Soe., S. Aust.,

lii, 1928, pp. 156-157). 1 have not seen specimens of Fairmaire’s three species

deseribed as Trigonopterus anthrax, T. semrcribosus, and 1’, meroplysioides (Ann.

Ent. Soc. France, 1881, pp. 314-316). Dr. P. Lesne, of the National Museum at

Paris, kindly compared several of our specimens with the types of 7. anthrax and

7’. semicribosus, and found that none of them was the same. The type of 7’. mero-

physioides could not be located. I have been unable to glean enough information

irom Fairmaire’s original descriptions to feel safe in placing them in the key.

Creck List.

1. Ldotasia humeralis Lea. Viti Levu.

l-a. I[dotasia humeralis var. posthwmeralis Lea, Viti Levu.

i-b. Idotasia humeralis var. immaculata Lea, Viti Levu.

2. Idotasia cribricollis Lea. Viti Levu (Colo-i-Suva).

3. Jdotasia absoleta, new species. Viti Levu (Colo-i-Suva).

4, Idotasia grandicollis, new species. Yuvutha and Ongea, Lau.

5. Idotasia dehiscens, new species. Ovalau.

6. Idotasia semicribosus (Fairmaire). Ovalan.

7. Idotasia anthrax (Fairmaire). ‘‘Fiji.’’

8. Idotasiw merophysioides (Fairmaire). ‘‘ Fiji.”’

Key 'ro rug Spectres.

(1. anthrax, I. semicribosus and I. merophysioides omitted.)

1, Punctures on the pronotum comparatively small and round, separated by

distances at least equal to, and often greater than their diameters, never

close and coarse es e4 a Le a4 23 By

164 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pronotal punctures coarse and close, often subhexagonal, separated by

distances equal to or less than their diameters, often subconfluent .. 4.

2(1). Form stout (fig. 1, b), prothorax broader than long, longitudinally convex ;

longitudinal dorsal outline of prothorax and elytra discontinuous, the ely-

tra rising above the pronotum (fig. 1, e) ; ninth elytral stria with three

abnormally large, coarse punctures at the base; fore femora with a blunt

tooth on the outer side below... a; obsoleta.

Form elongate (fig. 1, a), prothorax as long: as broad, or but slightly broader

than long, the disk slightly or distinctly “flattened ; dorsal outline of pro-

thorax and elytra subcontinuous, the elytra not rising above the pronotum

(fig. 1, f) ; ninth elytral stria without much larger Sat a at the base;

femora edentate coat . ; oe

8(2). Elytra with a large black area in the baked fourth pedanine at the base and

lateral margin .. humeralas.

Elytra with a large black spot before the middle that i is isolated from the

base, suture and lateral margin .. .. hwmeralis var. posthumeralis.

Elytra without a humeral black spot .. hwmeralis var. immaculatus.

4(3). Elytra dehiscent, separately, subtubularly produced at the apex (fig. 1, d)

dehiscens.

Elytra either jointly and broadly rounded at the apex or slightly emar gi-

nate, not dehiscent nor separately produced (fig. 1, ¢) Pv Pageie

5(4). Pronotum so strongly convex at the base that the dorsal outline of pro-

notum and elytra form a conspicuous notch; prothorax large, strongly

rounded on the sides, punctures very deep and coarse, the interstices narrow

and subcarinate .. grandicollis.

Prothorax subparallel- sided in the basal half, the ‘dorsal outline subeon-

tinuous with that of the elytra, punctures moderately coarse, their inter-

stices flat and not appearing like carinae ne .. eribricollis.

IDOTASIA OBSOLETA sp. noy. (fig. 1, b, e).

Male. Derm reddish, thorax piceous, reddish to piceous below, variable;

with a small elongate patch of white scales near the apex of each elytron between

stria four and six and along the dorsal edge of the hind femora.

Head finely reticulate and almost impunctate, with a small interocular pune-

ture at the base of the median rostral carina. Rostrum with three polished dorsal

earinae that terminate at about half-way between the antennae and apex; with

fine, erect, or slanting setae in the striae; punctuation fine and inconspicuous.

Prothorax broader than long (3-2:2-+7), and almost as broad as the elytra in the

male, broadest at about the middle, rounded on the sides and without a subapical

constriction, apex gently areuate and about half as broad as the base; the longi-

tudinal dorsal outline evenly convex, slightly, but distinctly discontinuous with

that of the elytra; the dorsal punctures round, medium-sized, separated by dis-

tances equal to or greater than their diameters; with a row of impressed punctures

at the base; the punctures normally bearing short, fine setae. Hlytra subcuniform,

ZIMMERMAN—COLEOPTERA FROM FIJI 165

broadest near the base, thence rapidly narrowing to the broadly rounded apex;

striae obsolete, marked by series of small, shallow, inconspicuous oval punctures ;

with three large punctures at the base of row nine; intervals plain. Legs with the

fore femora with a blunt tooth on the anterior ventral margin slightly beyond the

middle that marks the termination of the outer ventral flange, the other femora

+

Fig. 1. Outlines of Fijian Idotasia: a, Idotasia humeralis; b, I. obsoleta; ¢, I. grandicollis;

e, I. dehiscens; e and f, dorsal outlines of I. obsoleta and I. hwmeralis,

edentate, with a punctate groove along the outer lower margin, and several irregu-

lar rows of punctures in the distal half; the tibiae without a median carina on the

outer side, with an almost obsolete, hardly discernible tooth at the base of the uncus

on the hind pair. Sternwm with the mesosternal receptacle impressed on each side

of the median line at the base only, with large round punctures; metasternum con-

eave, with coarse punctures on the sides and apex. Venter with the first two ven-

trites rather deeply and narrowly caniculate down the middle, with coarse punc-

tures bearing rather long, fine, erect setae on the sides, but impunctate in the

middle; ventrites three and four with two or three setiferous punctures on each

side; ventrite five concave, densely set with small setiferous punctures. Length,

3 mm.; breadth, 1-4 mm.

166 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

Fiji, Viti Levu. Holotype male in Bernice P. Bishop Museum, collected by

Mr. E. H. Bryan, Jr., at Colo-i-Suva, 29th June, 1924.

This species is closely allied to J. cribricollis Lea, but the prothorax is less

coarsely and densely punctate, and the fore femora are not edentate as in that

species.

IDOTASIA GRANDICOLLIS sp. nov. (fig. 1, ¢).

Derm shiny, thorax, usually the head, rostrum and venter black, antennae

and legs reddish, elytra reddish, black at the apex; with an elongate patch of white

seales at the apex of each elytron between the third and sixth striae and white

scaling along the dorsal edges of the hind femora.

Head almost impunctate on the crown, the front flattened and very coarsely

and confiuently punctate; with numerous fine, reenmbent setae. Rostrwm coarsely

tricarinate to the apical fourth or near the apex in the male, less coarsely so and

only in the basal half in the female; coarsely punctate throughout. Prothorax

about as broad as the elytra in the female and slightly broader in the male, some-

what broader than long in the female (3-8: 2-8), and distinetly broader than long

in the male (3°8:3:2) ; rather straightly and slightly expanded on the sides from

the base to the apical third, and thence rapidly narrowing to the apex; base sub-

truneate ; dorsum strongly convex, very coarsely and densely punctate throughout ;

the punctures large and subhexagonal, the interspaces very narrow. Elytra two-

fifths longer than the prothorax, broadest near the base, thence rather rapidly nar-

rowing to before the apex which is somewhat produced and rounded; striae im-

pressed only at the base and apex, otherwise marked by small, well separated,

elongate-oval punctures, the outer stria deeply impressed, its punctures very

coarse in the basal third ; intervals flat, the outer one raised in the basal third ; apex

coarsely punctate, with a dense, elongate patch of white scales in an impression

between the second and sixth stria, inflexed at the sides. Legs with the femora

edentate, the anterior pair serrate on the outer ventral edge in the basal two-thirds ;

rather densely, longitudinally punctate, with a sulcus along the outer ventral mar-

gin, the posterior pair with a dense dorsal patch of white scales in the distal half,

otherwise with erect or prostrate scales or setae; tibiae with a dorsal, median and

ventral carina on the outer surface, with a small, obtuse tooth at the outer side

above the base of the uncus on the hind pair. Sternwm with the mesosternal re-

ceptacle slanting forward from the middle of the mid coxae to the posterior edge

of the fore coxae, impressed on either side of the raised median line; metasternum

set with coarse, setiferous punctures. Venter with the first two ventrites deeply

and broadly concave in the male, shallowly concave in the female, rather closely

and evenly set with large, coarse setiferous punctures; third and fourth ventrites

impunctate; fifth ventrite somewhat concave, with numerous punctures bearing

ZIMMERMAN—COLEOPTERA FROM FIJI 167

sharp erect setae; the intercoxal process forming a broad angle. Length, 2-6—3-2

mm.; breadth, 1-2-1-5 mm.

Fiji. Holotype male, allotype female, in Bernice B. Bishop Museum, and six

paratypes from Yuvutha, Lau, August 11, 1924, from ‘‘Yangasa Cluster’’, and

one paratype from Ongea, Lau, July 30, 1924, all collected by Mr. HE. H. Bryan, Jr.

This species is allied to Z. cr¢bricollis Lea, but the thorax is broader and much

more densely and coarsely punctured, and with the dorsal contour of the prothorax

and eiytra strongly discontinuous. The squamose area at the apex of the elytra

is distinctly impressed, and the intervals at the sides of the squamose area form a

round subcostaform area which overhangs the side margin of the elytra.

[DOTASIA DEHISCENS sp. nov. (fig. 1, d).

Male. Derm-variable in colour, dark reddish to piceous; with but a few white

squamiform setae near the apex of each elytron, and without a dense white patch;

with dense white scaling on the dorsal edge of the hind femora.

Head with the front flattened and coarsely, closely, and irregularly punctate ;

finely punctate above. Rostrum somewhat dilated near the base, and there with

five dorsal cariae, the lateral one on each side fine, the three median carinae rather

irregular and continued nearly to the apex; striae between the carinae coarse and

with fine erect setae. Prothorax somewhat subquadrate, slightly narrower than the

elytra, distinctly broader than long (3-3: 2-8), almost straight on the sides in the

basal two-thirds, and thence abruptly narrowed to the truncate apex, which is half

as broad as the base; the longitudinal dorsal outline gently convex, almost con-

tinuous with that of the elytra; coarsely and densely punctate throughout, the

punctures separated by distances equal to about one-half of their diameters, each

puncture bearing a fine recumbent seta. Hlytra subcuniform, base slightly sinu-

ous; broadest behind the base and thence sharply and almost straightly narrowed

to near the apex which is produced, and the elytra separated, each elytron pro-

duced into a subconical process; strial grooves wanting on the disk, but the pune-

tures elongate, close and conspicuous throughout, the ninth stria very coarsely

punctate to above the hind coxa, and the seventh and eighth striae with large punc-

tures near the base; punctures large and coarse at the apex, and bearing fine re-

cumbent setae, those near the apex of stria three bearing a few white, squamiform

setae; the first interval with a complete row of small punctures. Legs with the

femora edentate, the fore pair minutely serrate in the basal half of the anterior

ventral edge; with numerous setigerous punctures, coarser and more abundant on

the fore pair; fore tibiae with two fine carinae between the dorsal and ventral

carinae on the outer face, mid and hind tibiae with one median carina, that of the

hind tibiae nearer the ventral than the dorsal carina; hind tibiae with a small put

168 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

distinct sharp tooth on the outer edge at the base of the uncus; all the tibiae with

rows of fine, erect, or slanting setae between the carinae. Sternum with a large,

foveaform impression on either side of the middle of the base of the mesosternal

receptacle ; metasternum transversally impressed near the base. Venter with the

first two ventrites broadly and shallowly concave, with rather small punctures

separated by distances about equal to twice their diameters; the second ventrite

with a narrow vertical face behind; ventrites three and four impunctate; ventrite

five concave, densely set at the edges and apex with small setiferous punctures.

Length, 3-5 mm.; breadth, 1-4 mm.

Fiji, Ovalau. Holotype male, collected by Mr. M. Greenwood, June 4, 1922,

to be deposited in the British Museum from whence it was sent by Sir Guy A. K.

Marshall for study.

This species may be easily distinguished from all of the other known Fijian

species by its dehiscent and conically produced elytral apices.

THE AMPHIPOD GENERA EUONYX, SYNDEXAMINE

AND PARADEXAMINE

By KEITH SHEARD, HONORARY ASSISTANT IN ZOOLOGY,

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The specimens treated below have been selected in order to revise the genera

concerned. They were taken from tow nettings and dredgings made on the patrol boat

of the Department of Fisheries and Game, during March, 1938, in Spencer Gulf,

South Australia; these collections were made possible by the co-operation of the

Chief Inspector of Fisheries and Game (Mr. F. W. Moorhouse).

Acknowledgements are due to the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research and

to the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum, and Art Gallery of South

Australia for their assistance; to Professor E. Percival, of the Canterbury University

College, New Zealand, for the loan of New Zealand type material for comparison and

revision; to Professor G. E. Nicholls, of the University of Western Australia, for

literature; and to Dr. R. C. Bassett, of Adelaide, for the use of his apparatus in the

preparation of the drawings.

Tue AMPHIPOD GENERA EUONYX, SYNDEXAMINE

AND PARADEXAMINE

By KEITH SHEARD, Honorary Assisrant 1n ZooLocy, SourH Ausrratian Museum.

Fig. 1-9.

THE specimens treated below have been selected in order to revise the genera con-

cerned. They were taken from tow nettings and dredgings made on the patrol

boat of the Department of Fisheries and Game, during March, 1938, in Spencer

Gulf, South Australia; these collections were made possible by the co-operation

of the Chief Inspector of Fisheries and Game (Mr. F. W. Moorhouse).

Acknowledgments are due to the Council for Scientific and Industrial Re-

search and to the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum, and Art

Gallery of South Australia for their assistance; to Professor EK. Percival, of the

Canterbury University College, New Zealand, for the loan of New Zealand type

material for comparison and revision; to Professor G. E. Nicholls, of the Univer-

sity of Western Australia, for literature; and to Dr. R. C. Bassett, of Adelaide,

for the use of his apparatus in the preparation of the drawings.

The species dealt with in this paper are only a fraction of those obtained. The

remainder cannot be described until the revision of Haswell’s types of Australian

Gammaridea, now in progress, has been completed.

A curious feature of the material collected was the very great predominance

of Gammaridea in both tow-nettings (using Marine Biological Association stan-

dard nets) and dredgings. Copepoda, Euphausiacea and Mysidae were very

scarce, Hyperiidea were absent, while fish eggs were only present in one tow-

netting—and then in very small numbers. Nebalia and Sagittae as yet undeter-

mined were moderately plentiful. This balance was constant from near the head

waters of the Gulf up to and ineluding the open sea near Kangaroo Island.

There would appear to be some connection between the abundance of destrue-

tive forms and the relative scarcity of fish and oysters, but since this is the first

time tow-nettings have been made in these waters, any conclusions are premature.

Famity LYSIANASSIDAE

Evonyx Norman, 1867.

Stebbing, 1906, p.19 (key) ; Chevreux, 1908, p. 1 (fig.), and 1919, p. 576; Barnard,

1916, p. 110; Chilton, 1921, p. 52 (fig.) ; Stephensen, 1923, p. 41; Schellen-

berg, 1926, p. 200; Pirlot, 1933, p. 120 (fig. and key) ; Sheard, 1937, p. 19.

170 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EVUONYX PIRLOTI sp. nov.

Euonyx norman (nec Stebbing) ; Chilton, 1921, p. 52; Pirlot, 1933, p. 120; Sheard,

1937, p. 19.

Chilton ascribed his specimen ( 4) to Huonyx normani Stebbing (1888, p.

669, pl. xix), and from manuscript notes in my possession, was considerably in-

Fig. 1. Huonysx pirloti: A, lateral view (9); B, detail of head and epistome; C, peduncle

first antenna (9); D, peduncle first antenna (Chilton’s ¢), refigured; E, attachment of antenna

(2); F-I, details of urosome and uropoda (9); L—K, telson (2). (K.S. del.)

fluenced in this by the fact that Stebbing’s species was a (2) with the ( é) yet

to be discovered. Pirlot (loc cit. p. 120) in his key separates the two, while Sheard

(loc. cit., p. 19) states that Chilton’s specimen is probably not the ( ¢ ) of Steb-

bing’s species.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 171

Specimens obtained by Mr. F. W. Moorhouse off Kangaroo Island led me to

search carefully through the unnamed material in the Museum collection, with the

result that along series has been found (? 2, 6 é ) which, on examination, proved

to be cospecifie with Chilton’s specimen. The new species has been named in re-

cognition of the credit due to Professor J. Pirlot for his original separation.

Fig. 2. Huonysx pirloti (2): A-E, details of mandibles; F, half of lower lip; G—L, details of

first maxilla; M, second maxilla. (K.S. del.)

In a recent letter from Professor G. E. Nicholls, he remarks: ‘‘ With reference

to your remarks about Euonyx normani as identified by Chilton, I should tell you

that I tco have amongst the ‘‘Discovery’’ material a specimen (ovigerous 2 only),

which I regard as new, and probably belonging to the same species as that referred

by Chilton to Z. norman Stebbing. If you are publishing shortly, would you let

172 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

me see the typescript, so that I may refer my species to your manuscript name if

that is necessary. If, however, you are not proposing to publish immediately, I

should still be glad if you would allow me to quote you as having made that same

discovery from South Australian material.’’

Tracings of the South Australian specimen have been forwarded to Professor

Nicholls. and thanks are due to him for his courtesy.

So far specimens have been obtained in dredgings close to land and in wash-

ings from reefs. The species is a moderately common element in the faunule, at a

eursory glance quite like Waldeckia, but distinguishable therefrom by its chelate

first gnathopod.

Fig. 3. Euonysx pirloti (9): A, first gnathopod; B, detail of chela; C, second gnathopod;

D, lateral view, maxilliped. (K.S. del.)

The specimen figured (@ ), Kangaroo Island, is representative of the series,

aithough those specimens collected in St. Vincent Gulf are slightly less robust,

with gnathopods 1 and 2 slightly more slender. The specimen is fully figured so

that only the main differences from Huonyx normani Stebbing are given here.

Mandible; palp with first segment equal to third, and three-quarters length

of thesecond. (2H. normani, one-third length of second.)

Maxilliped; the second segment of the palp appears to be relatively longer

and more expanded.

Gnathopod 1; giving the basis (segment two) the value of one hundred, the

proportions of the segments are as follows:

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 7s

E. pirloti 100 90 39 55 +2 69°7 25

Segment 2 3 4 5 6 7

EK. norman 100 50 41-8 36°2 87:5 Pal

Gnathopod 2; giving the length of the basis the value of one hundred, the pro-

portions of the segments are as follows:

Segment 2 3 + 5 6 7

HE. normam 100 43-7 37 56 31 3-1

FE. pirloti 100 50 23-3 68:8 20 373

Pleon segment 3; side plate not pointed behind.

Peraeopod 5; segment 5 is slightly longer than segment 4, not shorter as in

#, normani Stebbing.

The rami of the uropods are approximately equal in length. (The outer ramus

of uropod 2 is slightly foreshortened in fig. 1 (f).) No small teeth could be seen

on the dorsal surface of the telson (¢.f. Stebbing, 1888, pl. xix).

The relatively much longer gnathopod 1 of FZ. pirloti, due to a longer segment

five, and its attachment nearer to the anterior end of segment four than in Z,

normant, readily distinguishes between them.

In passing, it may be noted that Chilton (loe cit. p. 52, fig. 5a) omitted a shal-

low groove on the anterior dorso-lateral surface of his figure of segment one of

antenna 1. This groove gives a slightly keeled effect to this segment.

Loc. Nepean Bay, Kangaroo Island (F. W. Moorhouse, May, 1938) ; Brighton,

St. Vincent Gulf (K. Sheard and B. C. Cotton, Mar., 1937) ; Sellick’s Beach, St.

Vincent Gulf (H. M. Hale, Apr., 1936) ; off | Seta Ghiors: St. Vincent Gulf (H. M.

Hale, Mar., 1924) ; Spencer Gulf (A. Zeitz, 1887) ; Ardrossan (Dr. J. C. Vereo,

Jan., 1903) ; Western Shoal, Spencer Gulf (K. Sheard and F. Moorhouse, Mar.,

1938).

Famity DEXAMINIDAE

Dexanwmidae ; Stebbing, 1906, p. 514 (lt. and syn.), and 1910, p. 602; Chilton,

1914, p. 332; Spandl, 1924, p. 56; Schellenberg, 1928, p. 655, and 1931, p. 209 ;

Barnard, 1932, p. 217.

The following key is adapted from Stebbing (1906, p. 514) to include recent

genera:

a. Maxillipeds, palp with 3 segments.

b. Lower lip, with inner lobes well developed. . a .. Dexaminella

bb. Lower lip, with inner lobes rudimentary.

ec. Peraeopods 1-5, 4th segment shorter than 5th and

6th combined ; .. Dexamine

ec. Peraeopods 1-5, 4th segment longer than 5th and 6th

combined .. .. Tritaeta

174 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

aa. Maxillipeds, palp with four segments.

d. Maxilla 1, palp with one segment.

e. Maxillipeds, inner plates short and bud-like .. Dexaminoides

ee. Maxillipeds, inner plates of moderate size.

f. Lower lip, mandibular process absent .. .. Syndexamine

ff. Lower lip, mandibular process present .. .. Paradexamine

dd. Maxilla 1 palp with two segments.

g. Maxilla 1, second segment of palp large, maxillipeds,

inner plates well developed F Polycheria

gg. Maxilla 1, second segment of palp small, maxillipeds,

inner plate rudimentary .. wt me .. Guernea

The genera discussed here are Syndexamine and Paradexamine.

Professor E. Percival, to whom I wrote for types, states :

‘“There are no types of Paradexamine pacifica (Thomson), merely tubes of

material labelled with the country of origin. You will need, I suppose, to select

suitable specimens for description therefrom. Syndexamine carinata Chilton is

represented only by two co-types.’’

Accordingly, specimens have been selected and figured as lectotypes.

In passing it is worth recording that the examination of some of Chilton’s

Amphipod material and its comparison with more modern work has convinced me

that he tended to simplify the issue a little too much. While it is quite true that

growth changes occur in the chitinous cuticle with age, that secondary sexual

characters emerge and develop, and that every specimen varies in some slight par-

ticulars from every other specimen; it is also true that growth changes tend to

follow a certain course within the species, that secondary sexual characters de-

velop in a definite manner, while the intra-specific variation bears a high degree

of relationship to the species itself. Consequently it is the business of the system-

atist to record outstanding differences and divergencies from the already known

ranges of variation and not to seek to integrate the pattern until significant data,

widely spaced along the curve of variation, is accumulated.

Full illustration of all differences is essential, an ideal often difficult of

attainment.

SYNDEXAMINE Chilton.

Syndexamine Chilton, 1914, p. 332 (fig.).

SYNDEXAMINE CARINATA Chilton.

Chilton’s generic description must be slightly emended as a large well-defined

molar area is present.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 15

Lectotype (4). As described and figured by Chilton except in the following

particulars:

A definite, large molar area is present.

An accessory plate (see fig. 4, A, B, C, D) is present.

Fig. 4. Syndexamine carinata (lectotype): A—D, mandibles; E, first maxilla; F, urosome.

(K.S. del.)

The palp of Maxilla 1 appears to be broader than in Chilton’s figure.

The small rounded protuberance in the mandibles mentioned by Chilton (loc.

cit. p. 384) appears to be the newly-developing mandibular cutting edge, previous

to moulting.

176 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The eye is slightly oval, and is situated between the two antennae at the base

of the inter-antennal angle.

PARADEXAMINE Stebbing.

Paradexamine Stebbing, 1906, p. 518 (lit. and syn.), and 1914, p. 366; Chevreux,

1906, p. 88 and 1913, p. 181; Chilton, 1909, p. 632, 1912, p. 501 and 1925, p.

179; Stephensen, 1927, p. 347; Barnard, 1930, p. 389, and 1982, p. 217;

Sheard, 1937, p. 25.

As it is difficult to find a reliable character which has been positively de-

seribed by authors for each of the seven species of this genus, the following key

which I have drawn up for their separation is even more suspect than most. It

is accurate within its limits, but must be used in conjunction with the specific

description.

a. Apex of telson with many small teeth on each lobe, inter-

antennal angle pointed.

b. Gnathopod 2, joint 5 subequal to joint6~ .. .. P. pactfica

bb. Gnathopod 2, joint 5 more than 14 times joint 6.

ec. Lower lip, with no teeth on apex of each lobe .. P. moorhousei

ee. Lower lip, with one tooth on apex of each lobe... P. barnardi

aa. Apex of telson with several small teeth together on each

lobe, then an outer spine. Inter-antennal angle convex.

d. Gnathopod 2, joint 6 longer than joint 5;

antenna. 1, first joint of peduncle longer

than second; antenna 2, peduncle stout,

subequal to peduncle of antennal .. P. flindersi

dd. Gnathopod 2, joint 6 shorter than joint 5;

antenna 1, first joint of peduncle shorter

than second; antenna 2, peduncle long

and slender, longer than peduncle of

antenna 1 . P.frinsdorfi

aaa. Apex of telson with two teeth separated by ¢ a strong spine,

antennal angle rounded (? P. nana).

e. Maxilla 11, setae on distal third of inner

edge of inner plate “a .. P.sexdentata

ee. Maxilla 11, setae confined to end of inner

plate a . P.nana

aaaa. Apex of telson without teeth, antennal angle rounded ;

lower lip, a tooth on inner margin of outer lobes;

maxilla 11, seta on inner edge of inner plate .. .. P. fissicauda

PARADEXAMINE PACIFICA (Thomson).

Stebbing, 1906, p. 518 (lit. and syn.) ; Chilton, 1909, p. 632; Stephensen, 1927,

p. 347 (fig.) and 1938, p. 246; Schellenberg, 1931, p. 209; nec Barnard, 1930,

p. 389, fig.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 177

The specimens sent to me from the Chilton collection include some originally

collected and named by Thomson, but the only locality given is New Zealand. As

might be expected, there is a slight variation existing between the specimens in

minor characters, but the complex is itself so clearly marked off from any other

Fig. 5. Paradexamine pacifica (lectotype J, 2): A, lateral view (3); B, peduncle first

antenna (¢') ; C, peduncle second antenna (3); D, portion of lower lip (3s); E, mandible (¢);

F, first maxilla (3) ; G, second maxilla ($) ; H, head (9); I, first maxilla (2); J, second maxilla

(2); K, tip of telson (9). (K.S. del.).

species of the genus that there would be nothing gained by making further new

species or subspecies. When material is to hand with the localities definitely

marked, splitting is to some extent justified. The characters which present some

degree of variation are as follows:

178 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1. The armature of the peraeopods.

2. The presence in varying numbers of setae on the margins of the palp of

maxilla 1.

3. The presence in varying numbers of scattered setae on the outer edge of

the outer plate of maxilla 2.

4, The finger of the palp of the maxilliped varying from slightly swollen and

blunt (type) to slender. In no ease is it at all large.

5. The eye colour (spirit specimens) varies from very faded to very bright

red.

Among the constant characters connecting all the specimens are the following :

. The pointed inter-antennal angle of the head.

. The slightly swollen first joint of antenna 1.

. The relative proportions of the joints of the gnathopods and peraeopods.

. The slightly greater length of peraeopod 4 as compared with peraeopods

3 and 5.

5. The presence of two spines on each side of the dorsal surface of the last

urosome segment.

Ee wD eH

The last part of Thomson’s statement, ‘‘Peraeopoda slender, thickly setose,

all having the dactylos directed posteriorly, except the last pair, which are also

much the longest’’ (Trans. N.Z. Inst., XI, 1878, p. 238), is incorrect in one par-

ticular. On account of the way in which the peraeopoda are carried it is very easy

to consider the longest to be peraeopod 5; actually it is peraeopod 4.

Two specimens (¢ and ¢) have been erected as lectotypes. Their salient

points have been figured. For the rest, while I am not quite satisfied that Stephen-

sen (loc. cit. p. 345) was dealing with the same species, I can see no difference in

the appendages named below, and since Thomson’s specimens are somewhat dam-

aged by long storage, while Stephensen’s figures of the peraeopods and uropods

are taken from comparatively fresh material, I see no necessity for duplicating

his work. In the type selected the pleon side plates are slightly damaged. In

other specimens they are as drawn by Stephensen (loe. cit. p. 345).

Distribution: New Zealand; East Coast of Australia (7).

PARADEXAMINE BARNARDI Sp. nov.

PARADEXAMINE PACIFICA (nec Stebbing) Barnard, 1930, p. 389, fig.

At the request of Dr. H. K. Barnard, of the South African Museum, some

specimens of this ‘‘Terra Nova’’ species were sent to me by Dr. Isabella Gordon,

of the British Museum.

As is usually the case with such expeditions, the specimens had obviously

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 179

Fig. 6. A-R, Paradexamine barnardi (type g) : A, peduncle, first antenna; B, sensory setae;

C, cephalon; D, lower lip; EH, upper lip; F, mandible; G, first maxilla; H-I, second maxilla;

J-M, details of maxilliped; N first gnathopod; O, second gnathopod; P, hand, first gnathopod;

Q, urosome; R, apex, telson; 8S, Paradexamine moorehousei: hand, first gnathopod; T, Para-

dexamine frinsdorfi: hand, first gnathopod. (K.S. del.).

180 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

been for a considerable time in formalin before their transfer to spirit: This has

had the usual effect of making the chitin very brittle, resulting in reticulations of

the surface and false joints, very difficult to distinguish from true ones in the

antennae, unless the underlying muscle fibres are made visible by appropriate

staining.

Direct comparison with type specimens of P. pacifica (Thomson) and with

other Paradexamine species shows that the ‘‘Terra Nova’’ specimens are distinct

from, but fairly closely allied to, P. pactfica, and I regret that the time of going

to press of this paper will not permit me to follow the course of returning them to

their original author for fuller description.

The general facies, with the exceptions noted by Barnard, show a close resem-

blance to the P. pacifica group. The lower lip with its toothed apex resembles P.

fissicauda, while the large outer plate of the maxilliped is somewhat like P. flindersi.

However, unless the species concept is enlarged beyond the point when it will

be of use in taxonomy, these are all distinct species.

The species is as described by Barnard (loc cit., p. 389) with the exception of

the second joint of the peduncle of antenna 2 (fig. 9, A) and the addition of the

following details.

Upper lip; slightly lobed on its upper marign.

Lower lip ; with a tooth on the inner margin of the apex of each outer lobe.

Maxilla; with two hairs on the inner plate.

Maxilliped ; outer plate slightly longer than palp. Finger of palp very

small,

Gnathopod 1; long and slender, joint five longer than joint six.

Gnathopod 2; long and slender, joint five about one-and-a-half times

joint six.

The row of transverse fringed spines on the hands of the gnathopods vary

much as in P. pactfica; in P. moorhousei and P. frinsdorfi the number

is less, but there is a slight variation.

Pleopods; long and slender.

There appears to be only one long spine on each side of the dorsal surface

ot the last urosome segment near the telson.

Branchiae ; pleated.

The fascicules of setae on the peduncle of the antennae are distinctive.

Loc. Off Three Kings Island, north of New Zealand.

PARADEXAMINE MOORHOUSEI Sp. nov.

Very lke Paradexamine pacifica (Thomson) but smaller and much more

lightly spined.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 181

The resemblances lie mainly in the pointed inter-antennal angle, the lower

lip, the proportions of the peraeopods (peraeopod 5 excepted) the type of carina-

tion, the dentation of the apex of the telson, and in the general facies.

Fig. 7. A-L, Paradexamine moorhousei (type 9): A, head and antennae; B, upper lip;

C, mandible; D, first maxilla; E, second maxilla; F, half of maxilliped; G, first gnathopod; H,

second gnathopod; I, urosome; L, basis peraeopod 5. (K.S. del.). J-K, Paradexamine sexdentata

(after Schellenberg): J, first gnathopod; K, dorsal outline of pleon.

The main differences are:

Antenna 1; no tooth on the lower margin of the first joint of the peduncle,

but instead rows of single setae.

Antenna 2; instead of spines the fourth joint of the peduncle bears a fringe

of single setae.

Eyes; relatively larger, filling most of the side of the head and present as

prominent black spots in spirit material.

182 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Maxilla 1; relatively feeble, a single spine on the inner plate, four long hairs

on the apex of the single-pointed palp; the eleven spine teeth on the outer plate

are weak.

Maxilla 2; feeble, and with sparse hairs present on the apices of the plates

only.

Maxilliped ; the teeth on the outer plate are small, and the plate itself does not

reach much above the second joint of the palp, of which the finger is slender and

weak.

Gnathopod 1; much less setose than P. pacifica, and its greater slenderness

is due to the more elongate and slender joint five.

Gnathopod 2; very little setose with joint five twice as long as joint six.

Peraeopod 5; the basis (fig. 6, 1) is more rounded than in P. pacifica, and is

only lightly spined.

The last urosome segment bears no spines,

The side plates are of moderate size, the first, second, third, and fourth with

the margins very finely serrate.

This species was present in countless numbers in the waters of Spencer Gulf.

The specimens collected varied in size between 3 and 5 mm. In life they are nearly

transparent with prominent black eye-spots. Associated with them are many

Nototropis homochir Haswell with the smaller specimens of which they are easily

confused in the collecting dish.

Loc. Spencer Gulf, South Australia (K. Sheard and F. Moorhouse, March,

1938).

The species is named in recognition of the indispensable assistance given by

Mr. F. W. Moorhouse (Chief Inspector of Fisheries and Game), particularly in

the securing of tow-net material.

PARADEXAMINE FRINSDORFI sp. nov.

Head; rostrum acute, inter-antennal angle convex. Antenna 1; peduncle

shorter than that of antenna 2; first joint shorter than second, third very slender

and shore; antenna 2, peduncle slender, joints 4 and 5 long and slender. Flagella

in each case moderately long.

Carination of body ; commencing from second last peraeon segment, accessory

dentation from the last peraeon segment.

Lower lip; inner lobes long and slender, outer lobes with no tooth on inner

margins, mandibular processes only slightly upturned.

Mandible; cutting edge complexly dentate, accessory cutting edge dentate,

two spines on spine row, molar fairly prominent, the space between the spine row

and the molar is occupied by a ridge with rounded teeth.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 183

Maxilla 1; inner lobe with no end bristles, outer plate with 10-11 toothed

spines, single-jointed palp with six long hairs.

Maxilla 2; inner plate with strong setae, 3 to 5 on outer edge, 6 to 8 on apex,

outer plate with the distal half fringed with scattered setae.

Fig. 8. A-L, Paradexamine frinsdorfi (type ¢): A-C, first gnathopod; D—F, second gnat-

hopod; G—K, peraeopods; L, half maxilliped; M, Paradexamine pacifica (lectotype #) half of

maxilliped. (K.S. del.)

Maxilliped; inner plate small, outer plate not reaching much above second

joint of palp, teeth small, finger of palp moderately strong.

Gnathopod 1; joint five slightly longer than six.

184 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gnathopod 2; joint five longer than joint six. Side plates of both, minutely

dentate with short hairs growing between the teeth.

Peraeopods 1 to 5, comparable with P. flinderst.

Fig. 9. Paradexamine frinsdorfi (type 3): A, outline of body; B, margin of pleon side plate

three; C, urosome; D, plan of head; E, plan of urosome; F, upper lip; G, lower lip; H, mandible;

I-J, first maxilla; K, second maxilla; L, apex of telson. (K.S. del.)

Pleopods; strong.

Uropods; comparable with P. fisstcauda.

Telson; cleft to base, each lobe bearing six teeth on its outer margin, the apex

of each lobe is produced to a small point at the outer side, then follows a strong

spine, then several very small teeth with no intermediary setule.

SHEARD—THREE AMPHIPOD GENERA 185

Branchiae; pleated.

Eyes; large, oval and prominent (see fig. 7, d). Their colour varies from

faded red to dark red in spirit.

Length; 6-8 mm.

Although not nearly as numerous as P. moorhouset, the species is quite com-

mon, and together with the first named, provided the bulk of the free Amphipodan

fauna of the Gulf waters at the date of the collections.

In life, with its predominating colour of scarlet, eyes of reddish sapphire, and

with prominent sapphire colour-spots on the side plates, it is at once recognizable

in a collecting dish. In the darkness it is faintly phosphorescent.

Although the specimen described is probably an intersex (see rudimentary

marsupial plate, fig. 7, J), it is characteristic of the species and neither ( ¢ ) nor

(@) appear to exhibit any marked variation from this form.

The species was named after Mr. A. Frinsdorf (Senior Inspector of Fisheries)

to whose knowledge of the Gulf waters and conditions our useful collections were

largely due.

Loc. Off St. Francis Island, Great Australian Bight (Dr. J. C. Vereo, 1907) ;

Spencer Gulf (K. Sheard and F. W. Moorhouse, March, 1938).

The literature and synonomy of the other species admitted in the Genus (of

which FP’. pacifica is the genotype) are as follows:

PARADEXAMINE FISSICAUDA Chevreux.

Paradexamine fissicauda Chevreux, 1906, p. 88 (fig.) and 1913, p. 181; ? Chilton,

1912, p. 501 and ? 1925, p. 178; Schellenberg, 1931, p. 210; Barnard, 1932,

p. 217; Stephensen, 1938, p. 240.

PARADEXAMINE FLINDERSI (Stebbing).

Dexamine flindersi Stebbing, 1888, p. 146.

Guernea flinderst Stebbing, 1906, p. 522.

Paradexamine flindersi Stebbing, 1910, p. 103, plate 1ii.

PARADEXAMINE NANA Stebbing.

Paradexamine nana Stebbing, 1914, p. 366; Schellenberg, 1931, p. 210.

PARADEXAMINE SEXDENTATA Schellenberg.

Paradexamine sexdentata Schellenberg, 1931, p. 211, fig. 106.

186 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSUEM

LITERATURE.

Barnard, K. H. (1916) : Ann. 8. Afr. Mus., xv, part 3.

Barnard, K. H. (1980) : Brit. Ant. (‘Terra Nova’’) Exped., 1910, Zool. viii, No. 4.

Barnard, K. H. (1932) : Discovery Reports, v.

Chevreux, E. (1906) : Haped. Ant. Franc. (1903-05), ‘‘ Amphipodes’’.

Chevreux, BE. (1913) : Deux. Exped. Franc. (1908-10), ‘‘ Amphipodes’’.

Chevreux, HE. (1919) : Bull. Mus. Franc., xxv.

Chilton, C. (1909) : Sub. Ant. Is. N.Z., Article xxvi.

Chilton, C. (1912) : Trans. Roy. Soc., Edinburgh, xviii, part 2.

Chilton, C. (1921) : Biol. Res. ‘‘Endeavour’’, Sydney, v, part 2.

Chilton, C. (1925) : Com. Mus. Nac. Hist. Nat. Buenos Aires, ii.

Pirlot, J. (1933) : Siboga Exped., Mono, exxxiii, livr. exx.

Schellenberg, A. (1926): Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped. (1901-03), xviii, zool., x.

Schellenberg, A. (1928) : Trans. Zool. Soc., xxii, part 35.

Schellenberg (1931) : Swed. Ant. Exped., Further Zool. Res., xi, No. 6.

Sheard, K. (1937) : Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Aust., 1xi.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1888) : Challenger Reports, Zool., xxix.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1906) : Das Trerretch, xxi.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1910) : Mem. Aust. Mus., iv, part 2.

Stebbing, T. R. R. (1914) : Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond.

Stephensen, K. (1923) : Danish Ingolf-Exped., iii, part 8 (Amphipoda 1).

Stephensen, K. (1927) : Medd. fra. Dansk. foren., \xxxili.

Stephensen, K. (1938) : Sond. Senckenbergiana, Bd. 20, No. 3/4.

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN MARSUPIALS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND P. M. MAWSON

Summary

The present paper is the third of the series relating to nematode parasites of our

marsupials. The first (1938a) dealt with Filariidae, and the second (1938b) with

Strongylidae (Trichoneminae), chiefly from Central Australian kangaroos and

wallabies. We now give an account of a number of nematodes from various

Queensland localities extending from the Gulf of Carpentaria to the coastal region

adjacent to the New South Wales border. The species are distributed amongst the

Filariidae, Spiruridae, Oxyuridae, and Trichostrongylidae.

Some NEMATODES rrom AUSTRALIAN MARSUPIALS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON anv P. M. MAWSON.

THE present paper is the third of the series relating to nematode parasites of our

marsupials. The first (1938a) dealt with Filariidae, and the second (1938b) with

Strongylidae (Trichoneminae), chiefly from Central Australian kangaroos and

wallabies. We now give an account of a number of nematodes from various

Queensiand localities extending from the Gulf of Carpentaria to the coastal region

adjacent to the New South Wales border. The species are distributed amongst

the Filariidae, Spiruridae, Oxyuridae, and Trichostrongylidae.

This series of studies has been made possible by a Commonwealth grant to

the University of Adelaide.

Oxyurids had not been recorded as occurring in Australian marsupials, but

no less than four species, probably belonging to as many distinct genera, are de-

scribed in this paper. Three of these were found in the preserved viscera (ileum

and caecum) of a flying opossum, Petawroides volans var. minor collected by H. H.

Finlayson on the Fitzroy River, Central Queensland, and forwarded to the South

Australian Museum. Unfortunately this interesting assemblage of parasites is

in a poor state of preservation. One of the forms has been assigned to a new genus,

Austrozyuris. The fourth species was found in the common opossum, T'richosurus

vulpecula, from South-eastern Queensland.

Only the female of the Spirurid, Protospirura marsuptalis, was known pre-

viously. One of the two species of Filariids from the Gulf of Carpentaria is re-

garded as new, while the other, which was represented by immature females, is

probably the female of one of our recently described species. The two Tricho-

strongylids belong to genera previously known from Australian marsupials, a

second species being added to Austrostrongylus and Filarinema, which were

monotypic, and described from material collected in zoological gardens in the

United States and Pretoria respectively.

We are indebted for material to H. H. Finlayson, Honorary Curator of

Mammais, South Australian Museum; Dr. F. H. 8S. Roberts, Parasitologist, De-

partment of Stock, Brisbane; the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft and his daughter, Dr.

J. M. Mackerras, formerly of Hidsvyold, Burnett River. The types of the new

species have been deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

188 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hosts AND PARASITES REFERRED TO IN THIS REPORT.

Macropus robustus Gould Dipetalonema robertsi sp. nov.

Macropus sp. Dipetalonema annulipapillatum

Johnston and Mawson

Macropus dorsalis Gray Austrostrongylus minutus sp. nov.

Trichosurus vulpecula (Kerr) Protospirura marsupialis Baylis

Syphacia trichosurt sp. nov.

Petauroides volans (Kerr) var. minor Austroxyuris finlaysom gen. et. sp. nov.

Collett

Passalurus parvus sp. nov.

Oxyuris (s.1.) acuticaudata sp. nov.

Tsoodon obesulus (Shaw) Filarinema peramelis sp. nov.

Famity FILARIIDAE

DIPETALONEMA ROBERTSI sp. nov.

(Fig. 1-5.)

From the body eavity of Macropus robustus, from Normanton, North Queens-

land.

Male. 6-5 em. long, 0:23 mm. in maximum breadth; female, represented by

fragments of two specimens, one fragment being 11 em. long with a maximum

width 0:45 mm. Anterior end dome-shaped with papillae arranged in two rows,

each with four large and two small (probably lateral) papillae. The cuticle pos-

sesses fine transverse striations which are not obvious except in the lateral lines,

since they are masked elsewhere by deeper longitudinal markings. The lateral

regions have each two irregular rows of ‘‘gland cells’’ or ‘‘pores’’. Mouth small,

leading into a short vestibule, 6 long, with its base supported by a chitinous ring.

Oesophagus about 2 mm. long in both sexes; with narrower anterior portion, 0°55

mm. in female. Nerve ring at about 0-28 mm. from anterior end.

Male. Testis tube extends as far forwards as the posterior end of the oeso-

phagus. Tail 0°48 mm. long, with rounded tip which is apparently without

papillae. Larger spicule 0-24 mm. long, cylindrical proximally but tapering to a

fine point; shorter spicule 0-12 mm. long, broad, ending in a rounded tip. Three

pairs of preanal papillae, somewhat irregularly arranged, one pair immediately

postanal, and another pair some distance behind the latter and not quite symmet-

rically placed.

Female. Tail 0-4 mm. long, with two very small subterminal papillae. Uter-

JOHNSTON AND MAwsoN—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 189

ine tubes extend posteriorly to within 1:7 mm. from the anus; the two tubes unite

just behind the vulvar region, the single uterus passing forward to within 1] mm.

from the oesophagus before turning posteriorly as the vagina the latter forming

a loop before entering a small muscular pyriform bulb at the vulva which lies at

6:5 mm. from the anterior end of the worm.

+02 mm

0-2 =m

Fig. 1-5. Dipetalonema roberts. 1. Cloacal region of male, lateral view; 2. head; 3. posterior

end of female; 4. tip of female tail, ventral; 5. cuticle at lateral line. Fig. 6-7. D. annulipapil-

latum. 6. posterior end of female; 7. anterior end of female. Fig. 1 and 4 to same scale; 5 and 6

to same scale.

Explanation of lettering: a. anus; dr. dorsal ray; dt. dorsal tooth; edr. externo-dorsal ray ;

elr, externo-lateral ray; ep. excretory pore; g. gubernaculum; i. intestine; ic. inflated cuticle;

nr. nerve ring; plr. postero-lateral ray; s. spicule; ut. uterus; v. vulva; vd. vas deferens.

D. robertsi differs from other species of the genus in the number and arrange-

ment of the head papillae. The female system resembles that of D. tenue J ohnston

and Mawson 1938. The specific name is given in recognition of the excellent work

now being carried out by its collector, Dr. F. H. 8. Roberts. Parasitologist, Depart-

ment of Stock, Queensland.

DIPETALONEMA ANNULIPAPILLATUM Johnston and Mawson 1938.

(Fig. 6-7.)

The material consists of two female specimens, both immature, taken from

the dorsal aorta of Macropus sp., at Inverleigh, near the Flinders River, Gulf of

190 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Carpentaria, North Queensland, by Dr. F. S. Roberts. The larger is 9-5 em. long,

0-07 mm. wide at the head, 0-4 mm. in maximum breadth, and 0-12 mm. broad

at the anus. The anterior portion of the head of each worm is damaged, but one

can distinguish a chitinous ring around the mouth, and there appears to be out-

growths of the hypodermis into the cuticle resembling those occurring in D. annuli-

papillatum, of which species only the male has been described. The oesophagus

is 2-6 mm. long, with an anterior narrower portion 0-6 mm. in length, and a wider

posterior part. The nerve cord is situated at 0:3 mm. from the anterior end. The

anus lies at 1-18 mm. from the tip of the tail. The uteri are not readily dis-

tinguishable because of immaturity. They pass forward to enter a muscular vagina

a short distance behind the vulva, the vagina coiling on itself once before entering

a pyriform muscular structure leading into the small vulva. The latter lies at

5:3 mm. from the anterior end. The long tail has a rounded tip on which papillae

were not detected.

The characters present suggest that the specimens may be females of D. an-

nulipapillatum, recently described by us (1938) from three species of wallabies,

two of them from the Burnett River, Central Queensland, and one from coastal

New South Wales. The main differences are the presence of a chitinous ring

around the buccal region, and the differentiation of the oesophagus into a narrower

and a wider region.

Famity SPIRURIDAE

PROTOSPIRURA MARSUPIALIS Baylis.

(Fig. 8.)

Baylis (1927) described only the female. Since our material contained both

sexes, an account of the male can now be given. The host was the opossum, T'richo-

surus vulpecula, from Kidsvold, Burnett River, Central Queensland (collected by

the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft and Dr. M. J. Mackerras) and from Brisbane.

The head and general features of the body have already been described by

Baylis.

Male. About 3:5 em. long, shorter and thinner than the female, and with

two or three close coils at the posterior end. The distance from the anterior end of

the head to the posterior end of the oesophagus is 4:05 mm. The thick-walled

vestibule is 0-25 mm. long, with an internal diameter 0-07 mm. The nerve cord

lies at 0:34-0:35 mm. from the anterior end, and just in front of the excretory

pore. The tail has long alae, 0-22 mm. wide, narrowing near the tip, slightly

beyond the end of which they project. The spicules are subequal in length, but

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 191

the left is thinner than the right, to which the vas deferens is attached. In one

specimen the right spicule measured 1-15 mm. and the left 1-2 mm.; in another

they were 1-3 and 1:1 respectively. A gubernaculum is present. The cloaca is

slit-like, slightly elongated transversely, and lies at 0-7 mm. from tail end.

There are four pairs of pedunculate preanal papillae, and a similar pair about

mid-way between the cloaca and the tip of the tail. There is a pair immediately

postanal, as well as two or three pairs of very small papillae close to the end of the

tail. The alae are ornamented with longitudinal striations, and similar markings

form a very narrow zone across the ventral surface of the body in the immediate

vicinity of the cloaca.

Famity OX YURIDAE

AUSTROXYURIS FINLAYSONI gen. et sp. nov.

(Fig. 9-12.)

This tiny species was present in great numbers in the caecum and intestine of

Petauroides volans var. minor, obtained by H. H. Finlayson in the Fitzroy River

District, Central Queensland. The viscera in which the parasites were found were

forwarded by the South Australian Museum. The state of preservation was poor.

Worms short, straight ; male 1-7-1-8 mm. long; female about 2mm. Cuticle

with fine transverse striations. Maximum diameter of male 0-11 mm. of female

0-15 mm., occurring at the level of the posterior end of the oesophagus, the body

then tapering to the tail.

Head end rounded, with cuticle not regularly inflated. Mouth cireular, diree-

ted forwards, with its margin supported by a continuation of the chitinous wall

of the bueeal capsule. One pair of lateral papillae. Buccal capsule 0-01 mm. in

diameter and 5» long in the female, with a projection outwardly from the middle

of its wall. Oesophagus 0:3-0-4 mm. long in the male (1:4+5-5:6 of body

length) ; narrow, slightly constricted in front of the rounded bulb, the latter 0-035

mm. in diameter, and provided with valves. Anterior end of intestine swollen.

Nerve ring at the end of the first third of the tubular portion of the oesophagus,

and about 0-12 mm. from the head end. Excretory pore just behind the oesopha-

geal bulb.

Male. A pair of symmetrical caudal alae with maximum width (each 0-01

mm.) at cloacal level, length 0-2 mm. Body narrowed suddenly just in front of

the posterior end of the alae, continuing as a very thin tail 0-06 mm. long. <A pair

of adanal papillae; a median papilla immediately postanal; three lateral papillae

just behind the anal region, arising close together, supported by long peduncles,

one pair of these papillae being located at the widest part of the alae, the others

192 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

arising more ventrally. No papillae could be detected at the posterior end of the

alae. Spicule single, short, cylindrical, 0-05-0-08 mm. long, not strongly chiti-

nized except at its proximal end, where it joins the vas deferens and has a well-

chitinized ring. Gubernaculum absent.

Fig. 8. Protospirura marsupialis. Posterior end of male. Fig, 9-12. Austroxyuris finlay-

sont. 9. posterior end of male; 10. ditto, lateral view; 11. head, lateral; 12. oesophageal region,

lateral. Fig. 13-14. Passalurus parvus. 13. head; 14. posterior end of male, lateral. Fig. 15-16.

Oxyuris acuticaudata. 15. oesophageal region; 16. head. Fig. 17-18. Syphacia trichosuri.

17. head; 18. oesophageal region. Fig. 9, 10, 14 and 17 to same scale; 11, 13 and 16 to same scale.

Female. Tail very long, 0:29 mm. in length, tapering to a fine point. Vulva

large, round, dividing the body antero-posteriorly in the ratio 1:1-8. Uteri very

indifferently preserved, but appear to be divergent. Eggs not observed.

The species belongs obviously to Oxyurinae, near Passalurus, from which it

differs chiefly in the characters of the vestibule, in the absence of a prebulbar

swelling on the oesophagus, and in the absence of narrow cuticular flanges at the

anterior end. Some of the features suggest those of Protozoophaga. A new genus

Austroxyurts is proposed for it, and is diagnosed as follows:

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 193

Oxyurinae. Mouth simple with two papillae; cuticle without cephalic ex-

pansions; vestibule short, without teeth. Oesophagus with distinet bulb but with-

out marked prebulbar swelling; excretory pore behind bulb. Male with alae, a

pair of sessile adanal papillae, a median postanal, and three pairs of pedunculate

postanal papillae; spicule, single, weakly chitinized, short ; gubernaculum absent ;

tail short, resembling a spike. Female with very long tail, tapering to a fine point ;

vulva in anterior third. Type A. finlaysont.

The species is dedicated to H. H. Finlayson, Honorary Curator of Mammals,

South Australian Museum. In company with it were found the two Oxyurids,

whose descriptions follow this account.

PASSALURUS PARVUS sp. nov.

(Fig. 13-14.)

Found in company with other oxyurids in Petawroides volans var. minor,

Fitzroy River, Central Queensland.

Short worms, females 3-3-5 mm. long; single male found, 1-12 mm. long.

Cuticle deeply annulate, finely striated longitudinally. Anterior end rounded.

Mouth small, terminal, with three lips supported by chitinous prolongation from

the buccal capsule. Two (perhaps four) small papillae at anterior end. Buecal

capsule very large, 0:02 mm. long, 0-023 mm. wide at its base, with thin outwardly

concave walls; three semi-circular teeth, 7. long, arising from the anterior end of

the oesophagus. Oesophagus 0-52 mm. long in male, 0-63 mm. in female; with a

constriction between the tubular portion and the spherical bulb. Nerve cord and

excretory pore not observed.

The posterior end of the only male available is in an unsatisfactory state.

The single spicule is 0-06 mm. long, more strongly chitinized at its proximal end.

There is a short spine-like tail. The papillary arrangement was not recognizable.

The female has a narrow tapering posterior end, the tail being 0:42 mm. long

and markedly ringed. Position of vulva not determined. Eggs thick-shelled,

0-03 by 0-01 mm., mostly with a thickening of the shell at one pole; embryos

present.

The species belongs to a genus closely related to Passalurus. In view of the

indifferent condition of the specimens, a satisfactory examination could not be

made, and it has been considered advisable to place the species provisionally under

that genus.

194 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Oxyvris (s.1) ACUTICAUDATA sp. nov.

(Fig. 15-16.)

From caecum and intestine of Petauroides volans var. minor, Fitzroy River,

Centrai Queensland. Only females were found. They were 6-8 mm. long, tapering

gradually towards posterior end, with very finely-pointed tail, 1-4 mm. long.

Cephalic cuticle inflated; body narrowed suddenly in the anterior 0:25 mm.;

cuticle at extreme anterior end forming a collar 0-015 mm. in depth, surrounding

oral aperture. Six minute papillae pass up through the collar and project about

1-5y, a pair of larger papillae behind these. Buccal capsule wide, shallow, 0-016

by 0-007 mm. Oesophagus 0:7 mm. long, with wide lumen which narrows at the

end of the anterior tubular portion, expanding again in the bulb; the latter wider

than long. Nerve ring just in front of mid-oesophagus. Exeretory pore in the

vicinity of junction of first and second thirds of tubular part of oesophagus. Vulva

strongly chitinized, lying at end of first quarter of the body length. Eggs 0-034

by 0-017 mm.

On account of the absence of males we prefer to assign the species to Oxyuris

(s.1). Itis certainly not a member of Oxyuris (s.str.).

SYPHACIA TRICHOSURI Sp. nov.

(Fig. 17-18.)

From the intestine of Trichosurus vulpecula, West Burleigh, South-eastern

Queensland. Only females present ; 5 mm. long; with cervical cuticle inflated for

0-12 mm. from the anterior end, the body being narrowed in this region. Tail

long, 0-8 mm. in length, tapering to a point. Vestibule small, 0-015 mm. long,

0-02 mm. wide, chitinized, with three small rounded teeth at its base. Oesophagus

0-6 mm. long, with a constriction between the tubular portion and the spherical

bulb which is about 0-1 mm. in diameter. Nerve ring at 0:3 mm. from the anterior

end and at about mid-length of the tubular portion of the oesophagus. Vulva at

about midlength ; vagina muscular ; uterus long, single. Two ovaries. Eggs 0:05

by 0-025 mm., with very thick shells.

In most features the species agrees with those of Syphacia, but differs in

possessing a definite vestibule and in having the vagina at mid-body. On account

of the absence of males it is considered preferable to assign the parasite to Syphu-

cia, all of whose previously described species occur in rodents,

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 195

Famiry TRICHOSTRONGYLIDAE

AUSTROSTRONGYLUS MINUTUS Sp. Nov.

(Fig. 19-21.)

From the intestine of Macropus dorsalis, Kidsvold, Burnett River, Queens-

land. Male 2:9-3-1 mm., female 3-2 mm., all specimens probably immature; red-

dish when collected. These small thin worms were coiled in alcohol. There are

six longitudinal ridges on the body, a ventral and a dorsal pair, in addition to a

very wide lateral pair, Hach of the latter is about 0-035 mm. wide, and the others

each about 0-012 mm, They extend from the region just behind the inflated area

almost to the end of the body, and in the case of the female reach to the anus. The

lateral lines are longest. The transverse striae are about 1-6u apart. Cuticle at

head end inflated, but not striated, for a distance of 0:46 mm. Mouth small, cir-

eular. Buceal capsule dome-shaped anteriorly and funnel-like at its base, its

chitinous walls being continued back into the oesophagus. Projecting into the

base of the capsule is a relatively large dorsal tooth 8, long in the male, 10» in

the female. There are also a smaller ventral and two small lateral teeth. The

capsule is 7-8» long and 13-144 wide in the male, 104 long and 18» wide in the

femaie, The oesophagus is 0-20 mm. long in the male (about one-sixteenth of body

length) and 0-25 mm. in the female (one-thirteenth of body length), widening

posteriorly. The excretory pore lies at about 0-16 mm. from the head end, and in

the vicinity of the junction of the third and fourth quarters of the oesophagus.

Male. Bursa expanded laterally and nearly symmetrical; ventral lobes

slightly separated from the laterals; small dorsal lobe. Ventral rays widely separ-

ated and subequal, the ventro-ventral curving antero-ventrally, the latero-ventral

extending directly laterally. Externo- and medio-lateral rays stout, close to each

other and parallel ; postero-lateral ray much narrower than the other laterals. All

ventral and lateral rays reach almost to the bursal edge, as also does each long nar-

row externo-dorsal which arises separately. Dorsal ray rather short, giving off

two narrow curved branches at about half its length and then continuing a short

distance before bifureating into the short terminations. Spicules equal, 0-35-0-4

mm. long, about one-eighth of body length, narrow, cylindrical, curved at the distal

end to meet each other at a blunt point. <A long narrow chitinization of the dorsal

wall of the spicule sheath probably represents a gubernaculum.,

Female. The tail ends in long spine-like portion. Anus at 0-09 mm. from

the posterior end. Vagina very short; ovejectors stout, relatively long; eggs not

present; vulva at 0°31-0-35 mm. from tip of the tail, the distance being about

one-ninth of body length.

196 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A, minutus differs from the other known species, A. macropodis Chandler

1924, in the following features: smaller size, presence of lateral teeth in the buccal

capsule, smaller dorsal tooth, rather shorter oesophagus, more posteriorly situated

vulva, longer spicules, bursa much less markedly asymmetrical and of different

shape, most of the bursal rays relatively stouter, and the different arrangement. of

the branches of the dorsal ray.

FILARINEMA PERAMELIS sp. nov.

(Fig. 22-25.)

From the intestine of a bandicoot, Isoodon obesulus, from West Burleigh,

South-eastern Queensland. Male, 4:6-4-9 mm. long with a maximum diameter of

0-07 mm.; female, 5-8-6 mm. Head very small, and its parts are difficult to deter-

mine accurately. Head end with a very narrow cuticular inflation extending back

for about 0:05-0:06 mm., the underlying region being somewhat narrower than

the succeeding portion. There appear to be six minute lips. Longitudinal cuti-

cular striations are present. There is no buccal cavity, the oesophagus reaching

the anterior end. A tooth could not be recognized, though in a few specimens a

tooth-like structure seemed to be protruding from the end of the oesophagus

through the mouth. Oesophagus 0-35-0-38 mm. long, thin, widening slightly to-

wards its base. Intestine narrow. Nerve cord and cervical papillae not observed.

Excretory pore quite distinct and lying in the vicinity of the mid-oesophagus,

about 0:22 mm. from the head end.

Male. Bursa large, consisting of two large lateral lobes and a dorsal lobe,

laterals with lower edges inturned. Ventral and lateral rays more or less equal

in length and thickness, and all extending practically to the bursal edge; all of

them arise together from a common stem, diverging in their distal third. Ven-

trals separate; ventro-laterals curved ventrally ; postero-laterals slightly curved ;

externo-laterals nearly straight; medio- and postero-laterals bending rather dor-

sally. Dorsal ray stout and long, the externo-dorsals arising as stout curved rays

from the end of its proximal third; the main stem continues a short distance and

then gives off two short thin lateral branches, the main portion proceeding back-

wards to divide ultimately into two small bidigitate rays almost reaching the bursal

edge. Spicules 0-14—0-15 mm. long; anterior part cylindrical, 0-015 mm. in dia-

meter; widest near middle; eventually subdividing to form three pointed pro-

cesses, two shorter laterals, and a longer median. The lateral structures are com-

parable with the whip-like processes described by Ménnig for Filarinema flagrtfer.

The gubernaculum is spindle-shaped. There are two minute prebursal papillae.

Female. Tail 0:08-0:09 mm. long, tapering to terminate in a median ventral

JOHNSTON AND MAWSON—NEMATODES FROM MARSUPIALS 197

and two latero-dorsal conical processes, the ventral cone bearing on its dorsal

surface a spine-like process 0:012 mm. long. Vulva 1-13 mm. from the posterior

end and protected by a thin flap arising in front of it. Vagina short; ovejectors

muscular ; uteri divergent.

Fig. 19-21. Austrostrongylus minutus. 19. head, ventral; 20. head, lateral; 21. bursa, dorsal.

Fig. 22-25. Filarinema peramelis. 22, bursa, ventral; 23. head end; 24. spicule, lateral; 25.

spicule, subventral.

Fig. 19, 20, and 23 are drawn to scale adjacent to fig. 23; 21, 22, 24, and 25, to scale beside

fig. 22.

The specific name is derived from Perameles, the generic name under which

most Australian bandicoots were formerly placed. J’. peramelis approaches most

closely to F. flagrifer Monnig 1929, from Macropus rufus, but differs in size; the

presence of cuticular cephalic inflations and longitudinal striations; the form of

the spicules; and the characters of the dorsal ray. The difference regarding the

branching of the dorsal ray may be of generic value, but we prefer to place the

species under Moénnig’s genus because of the similarity of most of the other

characters.

LITERATURE.

Baylis, H. A. (1927) : Some new parasite nematodes from Australia. Ann. Mag.

Nat. Hist. (9), 20, 1927, 214-225.

Chandler, A. C. (1924): A new genus of Trichostrongylid worms from the kan-

garoo. Parasitol, 16, 1924, 160-163.

198 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Johnston, T. H. and Mawson, P. M. (1938) : An account of some filarial parasites

of Australian marsupials, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. 62 (1), 1938, 107-121.

Johnston, T. H. (1938) and Mawson, P. M.: Strongyle nematodes from Central

Australian kangaroos and wallabies. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust. 62 (2), 1938,

263-286.

Ménnig, H. O. (1929) : Filarinema flagrifer n.gen. n.sp., a Trichostrongylid para-

site of the kangaroo. Rep. Dir. Vet. Serv. Pretoria, 15, 1929, 311-316.

NEW SPECIES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, CONCHOLOGIST AND

FRANK K. GODFREY, HON. ASSISTANT CONCHOLOGIST,

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

In preparing a list of South Australian Gastropoda we found that some new species

awaited description, and that a few names required emendation. The more obvious are

here dealt with. Holotypes are in the South Australian Museum, and their registration

numbers are quoted herein.

Scissurella Cyprina sp. nov.

Scissurella ornata Cotton and Godfrey (nec May), S. Aust. Nat., Xv, Nov. 30, 1938, p.

21, pl. i. Fig. 8.

NEW SPECIES or SOUTH AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, Concuotocisr, ann

FRANK K. GODFREY, Hon. Assistant ConcHoutocist, Sourn Ausrratian Museum.

Plate xvii.

Ln preparing a list of South Australian Gastropoda we found that some new

species awaited description, and that a few names required emendation. The

more obvious are here dealt with. Holotypes are in the South Australian Museum,

and their registration numbers are quoted herein.

SCISSURELLA CYPRINA sp. nov.

Scissurella ornata Cotton and Godfrey (nec May), 8. Aust. Nat., XV, Nov. 30,

1938, p. 21, pl. i, fig. 8.

Minute, discoidal, somewhat oblique; colour yellowish-white; protoconch of

one-and-a-half turns, squared by a beaded ridge, and sunken below the level of the

two rounded adult whorls, which are somewhat angled by the canal; canal, a deep

furrow, about mid-way between the suture and the periphery, has sharp, raised

edges, and the whole is surmounted on a distinet ridge surrounding the shell;

radial ribs, sixteen, raised, curved, interrupted by the furrow, extend from the

suture to the small, deep umbilicus; numerous spirals, smaller than the ribs, do

not pass over those ribs which are between the canal and the suture, but pass over

the lower ribs and develop a crested appearance; aperture defined by a continuous

narrow margin; slit open, deep, moderately wide. Holotype, height 1:5 mm.,

diameter 2 mm., Venus Bay, 8S. Aust. (Reg. No. D 9674). Distribution: Cape

Borda, 8. Aust., Venus Bay, beach.

From Scissurella ornata May, the species is larger, the spirals stronger and

radials weaker. South Australian examples have been formerly labelled ornaia

jm error.

ZEIDORA LEGRAND! Tate, 1894.

Zeidora tasmamca Cotton and Godfrey (nec Beddome), S. Aust. Nat., XV, March

27, 1934, p. 53, pl. i, fig. 12.

This is separable from Zeidora tasmanica Beddome in the position of the

protoconch, which does not quite reach to the posterior margin, whereas in the

Tasmanian species it sometimes overhangs. Furthermore the South Australian

shell is twice as large as the Tasmanian. Holotype, length 9-5 mm., breadth 6 mm.,

200 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

height 2 mm., depth of cleft 2 mm., Corny Point, 8. Aust. (D 13371). Distribu-

tion: Corny Point; Venus Bay; also dredged St. Francis Island, 35 fathoms;

Backstairs Passage, 7-20 fathoms.

CALLIOSTOMA (SALSIPOTENS) CALLIOPE sp. nov.

Calliostoma (Salsipotens) ciliare Cotton and Godfrey (nec Menke), 8S. Aust. Nat.,

XVI, April 10, 1935, p. 19, pl. i, fig. 9.

Pyramidal, broadly depressed, thin, imperforate; colour yellowish, red-

spotted along the suture; sometimes the adult whorls have a spiral line articulated

brown and white like a twisted cord, below which are crescents of brown, open

forwards, also with axial flames of brown growing wider as they descend to the

periphery, beyond which they extend for a short distance across the base; sculp-

ture obsolete, transversely striate, and decussated by very fine axial striae; whorls

six, flat, margined below; suture linear ; base flat; aperture obliquely ovate, outer

lip margin callous within. Holotype, height 23 mm., diameter, 830 mm., Gulf St.

Vincent, S. Aust., 13-17 fathoms (D 13611). Distribution: Gulf St. Vincent;

Investigator Straits; Backstairs Passage; 13-17 fathoms; also W. Aust., Swan

River ; Esperance Bay; on beach. Formerly misidentified as Calliostoma ciliare

Menke, from North-west Australia, which is different in shape, sculpture, and

eolour.

ETHMINOLIA ELVERI sp. nov.

Trochoid, depressed, widely umbilicate, thin; whorls medially angulate, and

subanguiate above; colour extremely variable; base colour white or rose, axially

flecked and blotched ; protoconch minute, depressed, white, smooth, of one-and-a-

half whorls; sculpture of regular microscopic spiral lirae cut by fine, regular,

accremental striae; umbilicus profound and narrow, spirally obsoletely ribbed;

aperture subquadrate, outer lip thin; columella simple, very slightly convex at

the lower half. Holotype, height 7 mm., diameter 10 mm., Gulf St. Vincent, 8.

Aust., 7 fathoms (D. 13388). Distribution: Beach, not common, Hardwicke Bay,

Spencer Gulf; dredged, Gulf St. Vincent; Investigator Straits; Backstairs Pas-

sage; Cape Jaffa; 7-130 fathoms. Also King George Sound, W. Aust., on beach

and dredged to 28 fathoms. South Australian Museum specimens have been lab-

elled angulata Adams, prodictus Fischer, and later probabilts Iredale. The species

is larger, higher, less shouldered, and less acutely angulate than the Peronian

probabilis Iredale.

ETHMINOLIA CINCTA sp. nov.

Conical, elevated, umbilicate, spirally ribbed ; colour, creamy-white with duli

red interrupted zig-zags, except the first three whorls which are yellow; spiral

COTTON AND GODFREY—NEW SPECIES OF GASTROPODA 201

striae, very fine, crowded, present on the base and in the umbilicus; well marked

axial wrinkles in the infrasutural excavation; spire rather high, scalar; proto-

conch small, blunt; adult whorls about five-and-a-half, convex medially, with a

noduled shelf below the suture, angulated, and ribbed at about one-fifth of their

breadth, and flatly rounded from the angulation to the suture; last whorl bluntly

angulated at the edge of the rounded base; suture well defined; aperture slightly

oblique, round ; outer lip thin, sharp; inner lip thin, sharp, slightly spreading on

the columella; interior iridescent ; umbilicus wide, deep, much impressed at the

suture, which is spirally continuous to the apex. Holotype, height 4-5 mm., major

diameter 6-5 mm., minor diameter 5-5 mm., Leven’s Beach, Spencer Gulf, 8. Aust.,

shallow water (Cotton) (D. 3389). Distribution: Beachport, to Hardwicke Bay,

Spencer Gulf, to 200 fathoms.

Related to the Peronian shell, Ethminolia pulcherrima Angas (Minolia), but

our shell has the sculpture more valid, though the base is almost smooth; the

coloration is different from the bright dotting of the N.S. Wales shell. The

deeper water form from 200 fathoms off Beachport is less validly sculptured, with

whorls more rounded and smaller, with higher spire, recalling Ethminolia pul-

cherrima emendata Iredale, the Peronian deep-water form.

SPECTAMEN MARSUS sp. nov,

Conoidal, umbilicate, thin ; colour, protoconch white, consisting of one-and-a-

half whorls, then five adult whorls of saffron yellow, gradually fading out into

very light yellow or dull grey; adult whorls and base have rather broad, equi-

distant, radiating, somewhat flexuous, rosy streaks which are disconnected at the

periphery ; spiral striae very crowded; spire elevated; whorls six, convex, de-

pressed—canaliculate below the suture, gradate; last whorl carinate; aperture

subquadrate ; outer lip thin; columella scarcely arcuate, narrow, forming an angle

with the basal margin; umbilicus funnel-shaped with two spiral carinae within,

which are granulate; the angulate margin has about twenty tubercules, due to

axial wrinkles in the umbilicus, which end just outside the border. Holotype,

height 5°2 mm., major diameter 7 mm., minor diameter 6+5 mm., Beachport, 8.

Aust., 40 fathoms (D. 13390). Distribution: Dredged, Beachport to 120 miles

west of Hucla, Great Australian Bight, 40-300 fathoms.

Differs from Spectamen philippensis Watson, in being smaller, thinner, and

less elate; it is somewhat less canaliculate at the suture, and the spiral lineations

are more crowded ; it is yellowish instead of white; the rosy axial colour markings

are fewer, and are present on the base; also there are two or three spirals in the

umbilicus. In all these characters, except the colour, our shells show some varia-

202 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

tion, a few having been misidentified as Spectamen bellulus Angas, but they are

not that species, and are merely variants of Spectamen marsus.

BASILISSA BOMBAX sp. nov.

Basilissa radialis var. bilia Verco (nec Hedley), Trans. Roy. Soc., 8S. Aust., XXX,

1906, p. 218, pl. x, fig. 1, 2, 3.

Depressedly conical, umbilicate; protoconch homostrophe, smooth, of one-

and-a-quarter whorls; adult whorls six; spire somewhat gradate; one marked

spiral rib in the first whorl and two in the others, becoming gradually more valid

and distant ; a secondary threadlet appears between the two ribs in the third whorl ;

another threadlet arises in the fourth, two in the fifth, and still another spiral rib

in the body-whorl; the last rib forms the periphery and the suture, and, separated

from its fellow by a furrow, gives an apparent canaliculate suture; sutures well

marked; base flatly rounded with eight, equidistant, nearly equal, concentric

rounded spiral lirae, as wide as their interspaces; shell surface cancellated by

crowded narrow erect lamellae, crossing the spirals, and sinuous, but not follow-

ing exactly the outline of the labrum, and ending at the outer basal lira; crowded

radial striae cancellate and granulate the base; aperture obliquely quadrate, with

a large posterior sinus in the outer lip, rather deeper than wide ;a second sinus at

the baso-iabral junction, about as deep and rather wider, and a third shallow and

wide at the baso-columellar angle; columella oblique, concave, expanded towards

the umbilicus, truneate anteriorly; inner lip thin, smooth; interior of aperture

smooth; umbilicus deep, small, margined with oblique plicate tubercles. Holo-

type, height 3-6 mm.; diameter 3-4 mm., Cape Jaffa, 8. Aust., 130 fathoms (D.

13397). Also dredged from 300 fathoms off Cape Jaffa.

Formerly recorded as Buasilissa radialis var. bilix Hedley, a Peronian shell,

noticeably different in the validity of sculpture and the shape of the whorls. The

species is well figured by Verco loc. cit.

PELLAX GABINIANA sp. nov.

Subglobose, thin, imperforate, smooth; ground colour whitish, beautifully

closely lined or speckled with rose—which colour predominates ; protoconch white ;

columella white; spire depressed, of three whorls; subangled at the lower portion

of the body-whorl, where there is a white maculated band; aperture oval, simple.

Holotype, height 6 mm., diameter 4-5 mm., Royston Head, Yorke Peninsula, 5.

Aust. (D. 13414). Distribution: Corny Point, and generally along the west coast

of Yorke Peninsula, to Albany, W. Aust. This distinctive species has been in-

correctly listed as Phasianella kocht Philippi.

COTTON AND GODFREY—NEW SPECIES OF GASTROPODA 203

Scaua (MazEgcaLA) BEACHPORTENSIS sp. nov.

Squat, imperforate; sculpture of thin, erect lamellae, forming a right-angled

shoulder on the upper portion of each whorl; lamellae numbering seventeen on the

body-whorl; interstices crossed by obscure spiral incisions; protoconch of four

whorls, smooth, polished, sharp; aperture oval, free. Holotype, height 9 mm.,

diameter 4 mm., Beachport, S. Aust., 110 fathoms (D. 18302). The holotype is

unique.

From Scala heloris Iredale, the species differs in being smaller, more nume-

rously but less prominently variced, and in lacking the basal rib. From Scala belli-

cosa Hedley, it differs in being spirally sculptured and stouter.

ScauA (NARVALISCALA) FLINDERSI sp. nov.

Elongate, acuminate, imperforate, variced at about every one-and-a-quarter

whorls; sculpture of longitudinal rounded ribs, about twenty-five on the body-

whorl, crossed by about six spiral threadlets; protoconch smooth, sharp, incon-

spicuous; adult whorls, fourteen, rounded; suture impressed; base smooth, de-

fined by a fine basal rib; aperture circular. Holotype, height 24 mm., diameter

7mm., 120 miles west of Eucla, Great Australian Bight, 300 fathoms (D. 13303).

The holotype has the varices mostly on the dorsum, therefore only those at the

upper quarter and the last one on the body-whorl, are seen in the figure.

Compared with Scala dorysa Iredale, the present species is separable by the

greater height of the individual whorls, and their roundness. The last three

whorls of Scala flinderst together, form more than half the length of the shell,

whereas in Scala dorysa they form less than half.

Scaua (NopiIscaLA) SUBCRASSA sp. NOV.

Narrow, thick, imperforate; longitudinally sculptured with thick, low ribs,

angled at the upper third, and obsolete at the rather deep suture, crossed by spiral

threads; protoconch, fairly blunt, of two smooth whorls; adult whorls nine, flat-

tened ; basal keel indistinct; aperture oval, not separate from the body-whorl, a

thick varix forming the outer lip; a further thick varix is situated in the middle

back of the penultimate whorl. Holotype, height 13 mm. diameter 4 mm., Gulf St.

Vineent, S. Aust., 22 fathoms (D. 1383801). Allied to Scala apostolorum Iredale,

but is larger, and also differs in that the basal rib is obsolete; the general appear-

ance too is different.

The present species was formerly classed in error as Scala crassilabrum

Sowerby, from the Philippines and Central America.

204 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

RETICUNASSA FLINDERSI sp. nov.

Thin, white, sculptured with twenty obsolete, axial riblets, crossed by about

eight spiral riblets, producing rather depressed tubercles at the intersections ; base

with five sharp, spiral riblets; protoconch of four depressed whorls, smooth, pol-

ished, horn coloured, with microscopic axial accremental striae only ; adult whorls

four, a little convex, sharply shelved at the suture. There is no abrupt cessation

of sculpture at the commencement of the adult shell as in Reticwnassa dipsacoides

Hedley, but a very gradual formation of sculpture, leaving no definite axial indi-

cation as to the finish of the protoconch and the start of the adult shell; the basal

keel of the protoconch is only just discernible at the junction. Holotype, height

9mm., diameter 5 mm., Cape Jaffa, 8. Aust., 300 fathoms (D. 13298).

Distinguished from Reticunassa dipsacoides Hedley, by the less developed

sculpture, the different basal sculpture, the protoconch features, and the relative

height and diameter.

SEGNITILA gen. nov.

Shell dextral, discoid, keeled, somewhat flattened beneath, last whorl com-

paratively rather large, spire small and sunken, umbilicus narrow, aperture

acutely angled, no internal laminae. Genotype, Segmentina victoriae BH. A. Smith,

1881.

This genus is introduced for that species, in describing which Smith stated:

‘‘Tt appears inconsistent to place a shell in Segmentina, lacking the essential char-

acters of internal laminae.’’

ATAXOCERITHIUM BEASLEYI Sp. nov.

Protoconch, blunt, of three convex whorls, the first smooth, the second and

third with distant, valid, axial, sigmoid, round cords. Spire whorls with close

spirals, rounded, wider than the interspaces, five in the penultimate whorl, the

lowest two more prominent throughout, the upper three diminishing in number

towards the apex where there is but one; periphery roundly angular; base nearly

flat with six spirals; axial, obsolete, round costae, nearly as wide as the interspaces,

fourteen in the penultimate whorl; mouth roundly rhomboid; outer lip slightly

expanded, sharp, crenulated ; inner lip erect and free; canal short, nearly closed

at front of point of contact of inner and outer lip, reflected ; collumella curved and

forming an obtuse angle at the canal. Shell colour of holotype white. Holotype

height 8 mm., diameter 2-9 mm., Cape Borda, 8. Aust., 55 fathoms (D. 13435).

Distribution : 81 miles west of Eucla, 4 fathoms; Gulf St. Vincent, ? depth, seven

specimens larger and more solid than the type, four are uniformly brown, another

has the protoconch white and the rest of the shell brown, two are nearly white ; 45

COTTON AND GODFREY—NEW SPECIES OF GASTROPODA 205

fathoms east of north of the Neptune Islands; Beachport, 100-150 fathoms, one

specimen brown; Gulf St. Vincent, 10 fathoms; 50 miles west of Eucla, W. Aust.,

80 fathoms.

This species differs from A. serotinwm in having valid spirals of obsolete

axials. In A. serotinwm the axials are more prominent than the spirals.

EPIDEIRA FLINDERSI Sp. nov.

Fairly solid, acuminate, last whorl longer than the spire; colour, cream,

blotched with light brown just below the sutures; sculpture of spiral lirae crossed

by numerous, fine, axial plicae, which have each two small nodules arranged ver-

tically, one at and one just below the suture; below the lower nodule is a narrow

area in which the axial plicae are obsolete, there another nodule tops the longer

plica of the whorls; plicae are somewhat cut by the axials but not sufficient to form

distinet tuberculose sculpture; protoconch bulbous, of two smooth, turbinate

whorls, set obliquely on the adult shell; adult whorls seven. Holotype, height 21

mm., diameter 8 mm., 80 miles west of Eucla, Great Australian Bight, 75 fathoms

(D. 13645).

The species is readily distinguished from others of the genus, the only one

bearing the remotest resemblance is Epideira striata Gray, from New South Wales,

which, however, has a coarser sculpture of a very different pattern.

EPIpEIRA BEACHPORTENSIS sp. nov.

Very solid, acuminate, last whorl longer than the spire; colour cream, with

distant lines of elongate, small, brown spots; sculpture of fine, regular, spiral

riblets, with slightly wider interspaces, the whole crossed by weak, irregular

axials; protoconch bulbous, of two smooth, turbinate whorls, set obliquely on the

adult shell; adult whorls six; columella bearing a heavy callus; notch broad and

shallow; outer lip not inflected; canal very short. Holotype, height 31 mm., dia-

meter 11 mm., Beachport, 8. Aust., 150 fathoms (D. 13644).

This species appears quite distinct from all its congeners.

ONUSTUS FLINDERSI sp. nov.

Onustus peromanus Cotton and Godfrey, nec Iredale, S.A. Nat., XIII, 1982, p. 38,

pl. i, fig. 4.

Trochiform, medium size; white or yellowish, the basal ridges yellowish-

brown; growth lines strong, irregular, oblique, crossed by flexuous, curved, ob-

lique striae; base with numerous, sharp-ridged, curved, granose ribs, with fine

thread lines between, crossed by distinet spiral ribs; spire conical, slightly convex;

206 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

protoconch conic, whorls few, convex, smooth, polished, white, with marks where

very small fragments have formerly adhered; adult whorls nine, the last keeled;

base flat; aperture low, broad, interior porcellanous; outer lip produced above;

inner lip reflexed, forming a thick, white, shining callus; juveniles narrowly um-

bilieate, adult shells without umbilicus; operculum squarish. Holotype, height

9 mm., diameter 18 mm., Petrel Bay, St. Francis Island, 8. Aust., 15-20 fathoms

(D. 13615).

The upper surface is almost or quite hidden by the agglutinated shells. Com-

pared with Onustus peronianus Iredale, the species is smaller and differently

sculptured, and has the usual South Australian mollusean shells attached.

GUNDLACHIA EREMIA sp. nov.

Limpet-like, subpellucid, thin, oval, obliquely conical, in two distinct tiers;

the juvenile portion above, long and narrow, one-third overlapping the margin of

the adult; viewed laterally the juvenile is set obliquely on the adult, but follows

the median line when viewed dorsally ; internal shelf well produced. Holotype,

total length 3-5 mm., breadth 1-8 mm., juvenile, length 2 mm., breadth 0:9 mm.,

Mount Lofty, 8. Aust., in creek (D. 13613). Distribution: Mount Lofty; Aldgate;

Reed Beds, River Torrens, near Henley Beach.

From Gundlachia petterdi Johnston, the species is smaller, thinner, smoother,

and has the juvenile portion set along the median line and not obliquely to it, also

the internal shelf almost reaches to the middle of the adult shell. It is compar-

atively rare in South Australia.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE xvii.

Fig. 1. Hpidewra flinderst sp. nov. ( 2:4).

Fig. 2. Gundlachia eremia sp. nov., dorsal view (>< 12).

Fig. 3. Gundilachia erenua sp. nov., ventral view (x 12).

Fig. 4. Epidewa beachportensis sp. nov. (< 1-6).

Fig. 5. Scala (Mazescala) beachportensis sp. nov. (< 7:6).

Fig. 6. Ataxocerithium beasleyi sp. nov. (X 6).

Fig. 7. Scala (Narvaliscala) flindersi sp. nov. (* 1:8).

Fig. 8. Reticunassa flinderst sp. nov. (X 4).

Fig. 9. Hthminolia cincta sp. nov. ( 5:6).

Fig.10. Hthnwnolia elvert sp. nov. (X 4).

Fig.11. Spectamen marsus sp. nov. (X 6).

Fig. 12. Pellax gabiniana sp. nov. (> 6).

Fig.13. Scala (Nodiscala) subcrassa sp. nov. (X 4).

REc. OF S.A. MUSEUM VoL, VI, PLATE XVII.

PUBLIC LIBRARY, MUSEUM, AND. ART GALLERY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Vol VI,_No. 3

“® Published by the: Board of Governors, and edited by the: Museum: Director

. “(Herbert M. Hale) .

ADELAIDE, DECEMBER 16TH, 1939.

PRINTED AT: THE: HASSELL- PRESS» 104 CURRIE STREET

A NEW ASTROCONUS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. LYMAN CLARK, MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,

CAMBRIDGE, Mass., U.S.A.

Summary

Thanks to the kindness of the Director of the South Australian Museum, I have had

the privilege of studying a very remarkable “basket star” (Gorgonocephalid) of the

genus Astroconus. The specimen is exceptionally well preserved and very

handsomely coloured, and hence quite different in appearance from any other

specimen of the genus I have ever seen.

Astroconus Pulcher sp. nov.

Disk 35mm. in diamter, with five arms, exceeding 125 mm. in length, forking at least

seven or eight times; width of arms at base 10 mm., height 6 mm., disk distorted by

drying; in life it was undoubtedly more or less swollen with the radial and interradial

areas about equal ; in its dry condition the radial ridges are elevated, the interradial

areas much sunken; radial shields distally widely separated from each other, space

between considerably depressed.

A NEW ASTROCONUS rrom SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. LYMAN CLARK, Muszeum or ComParativE Zoorocy, Camnripcs, Mass, U.S.A,

Plate xviii.

THANKS to the kindness of the Director of the South Australian Museum, IT have

had the privilege of studying a very remarkable ‘‘basket star’? (Gorgonocephalid)

of the genus Astroconus. The specimen is exceptionally well preserved and very

handsomely coloured, and hence quite different in appearance from any other

specimen of the genus [ have ever seen.

ASTROCONUS PULCHER sp, noy,

Disk 35 mm. in diameter, with five arms, exceeding 125 mm. in length, forking

at least seven or eight times; width of arms at base 10 mm,, height 6 mm.; disk

distorted by drying; in life it was undoubtedly more or Jess swollen with the

radial and interradial areas about equal; in its dry condition the radial ridges are

elevated, the interradial areas much sunken; radial shields distally widely separ-

ated from each other, space between considerably depressed, The shrinkage of

the disk causes the immer ends of the radial ridges to overlap in an irregular man-

ner laterally, making it impossible to see the actual centre of the disk, Relatively

large wrinkled, conieal tubercles, 1 to 2 mm. high and nearly as thick at base, are

scattered sparsely over the disk, chiefly at the distal ends of the radial shields. The

covering of the disk is made up of crowded granules and plates as in typical Astra-

conus. Beginning at the very base, the arms are covered by tubereled transverse

ridges all the way from the radial shields to the tips, the ridges separated from

each other by slightly depressed areas without tubercles; if it were not for their

distinctive colouration they would be much less defined and difficult to make out.

Covering of arms, ridges, and valleys similar, made up of granules and small

smooth plates as on disk. Each ridge to the third or fourth fork of the arm carries

blunt, conical tubercles like those on the disk but distinctly smaller ; occasionally

there may be only one on a ridge, or very rarely none, usually two, three, or four,

very rarely five, On the outer branches of the arms tubercles are wanting,

Entire lower surface eoyered by a fine granular coat, coarsest in the inter-

radial areas, Tentacle spores small. but the first pair well within the disk and

lacking any tentacle seale, appear to open at the tip of a more or less ealeified pap-

illa whieh has shrunken on drying into a minute shapeless heap. Hach sueceeding

208 REcoRDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

spore more or less concealed by a slight ridge on the adoral side, which earries three,

four, five, or even six short, thick, slightly flattened spines, terminating in a cluster

of 3-5 short but sharp glassy thorns ; the ridges themselves merge into the tubercled

ridges of the sides and upper surfaces of the arms. Each mouth angle carries a

large number of teeth and oral papillae of diverse sizes, arranged irregularly on

the sides und angle of the jaw. Genital slits conspicuous, 5 mm. lone, placed near

the arm but distinctly separated from it. Madreporie plate single, well defined,

close to the mouth frame in one interradial area,

Colour: above, a light ashy-grey with a purplish tinge; disk with numerous

spots and irregular slender brownish-blaek lines; arms with the ridges light ashy-

grey, the depressed areas between brownish-black in sharp contrast; the large

tubercles are ashy, but many have the tips more or less dusky. ‘The annulation of

the small branches of the arms is very handsome. Lower surface pale-buff or

eream colour; on the interradial areas are numerous irregular lines and spots of

brownish-black ; the mouth-frame and the lower surface of the arms is prettily

marked with numerous spots and small blotches of brownish-black. Arm spines

lemon-yellow in marked contrast. Oral papillae and teeth pale orange.

Holotype. South Australian Museum Coll. No, 1.561.

This very handsome, anc at present unique, specimen was taken in a crayfish

pot, in 20 fathoms of water, at Cape Dutton, South Anstralia, by Mr. 1K. Mattson.

Aside from its colouration there is little to distinguish it from australis, but the

reeular ‘‘ringing’’ of the arms is unlike amy specimen of that species which I have

seen (71linall). Itis hard to say, however, how tmuch the validity of this character

is affected by its close association with colour in the new species. Only observation

of a good series of living or well-preserved specimens Git determine the true status

of puilcher, Comparison with specimens of australis, of which no two specimens

seem to be exactly alike, showed that it was very close to some specimens of that

species. It is distinguished at once from occidentalis, the only other Astraconus

as yet deseribed, by the fact that the well marked transverse ridges which encircle

the upper surface and sides of the arms carry but few tubercles (2-5), and these

are relatively large and irregularly arranged.

As regards its relationship to australis, it may be only a colour form or ex-

treme variety, but after considerable study it seems best to treat it as a distinct

species, and I therefore have ventured to deseribe it as such, giving it the name of

pulcher, because of its beauty.

Vor. VI, PLATE XVIII.

co. S.A. MUSEUM

RE

Shy Crete asset os

eet WM

iy

+

NEW FOSSIL CHITONS FROM THE MIOCENE AND

PLIOCENE OF VICTORIA

By EDWIN ASHBY AND BERNARD C. COTTON, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

At the request of Dr. Sule, of Prague, Czechoslovakia, Edwin Ashby made

arrangements with Walter Greed, of Hamilton, Victoria, to collect fossiliferous earth

from three exposures in Victoria.

By a special process, and by using millimetre and half-millimetre sieves, Dr. Sule

washed out from four four-gallon tins of this material, no fewer than fifty species, of

which 44 are new species of fossil chitons. As hitherto the number of authentic fossil

chitons known from Australia was under twenty, the present additions more than

treble the known fauna.

NEW FOSSIL CHITONS rrom THE MIOCENE anp

PLIOCENE or VICTORIA

By EDWIN ASHBY ann BERNARD C. COTTON, Sourn AusrraLtan Museum.

Plates xix—xxi,

Ar the request of Dr. Sule, of Prague, Czechoslovakia, Edwin Ashby made arrange-

ments with Walter Greed, of Iamilton, Victoria, to collect fossiliferous earth from

three exposures in Victoria.

By a special process, and by using millimetre and half-millimetre sieves, Dr.

Sule washed out from four four-gallon tins of this material, no fewer than fifty

species, of which 44 are new species of fossil chitons. As hitherto the number of

authentic fossil chitons known from Australia was under twenty, the present addi-

tions more than treble the known fauna.

Still another species, which is represented by a unique specimen found in

soil helonging to the United States National Museum and from the same exposures,

is described. This unique specimen has been presented to the South Australian

Museum.

The great increase in our knowledge of the Australian Fossil Chitons, due to

the success of Dr, Sule’s method, should stimulate interest in the Polyplagophora

(Loricata), and seems to indicate that our ideas of the ¢lass may need considerable

revision.

The beautiful figures here reproduced were prepared by Miss Varena Nottage,

and, as an aid to the identification and understanding of the species, the missing

parts of the valves have been reconstructed, the original portion being demareated

by a dark line.

Prorocutron Ashby, 1901.

Proroourron GRANULOSUS Ashby and Torr, 1901.

The taxonomic importance of the above species cannot be too strongly stressed.

Pilsbry (4) wrote: ‘‘It is commonly known that the earlier (Palaeozoic) Chitons

are without insertion plates, and belong therefore to the family Lepidopleuridae.’’

In 1900(5) he proposed his sub-order HLoplacophora for the reception of all Palaeo-

zoi¢ genera, and adds: ‘‘ None of the Palaeozoie genera are known to continue into

the Mezozoie, but are replaced by types more related to modern Chitons.’’

210 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

While the genus Lepidoplewrus (still extant) has no insertion plates, it is Te-

coenized by most students as being the progenitor of all living forms, and that the

development of the insertion plate commenced with the end valves. Ashby (3)

has shown that the genus Protochiton has no insertion plate in either of the end

valves, but has begun to form one, still incomplete, in the median valves, It seems

certain therefore that the genus Protochiten cannot have been derived through any

member of the family Lepidopleuridae; it is undoubtedly the progenitor of the

large family Acanthochitonidae. It would seem that the Acanthochitomids have

been derived from primitive (Palaeozoic) stock along a separate and parallel line

to that which produced the Lepidapleuridae. Further, the tail valve of “ Chiton

gemmatus de Koninck’’ from the Carboniferous beds of Dunfermline, Scotland,

in the peculiar character of the outward extension of the tegmentum, absence of

insertion plate, and general shape, is seemingly the prototype of the tail valve of

Protochiton granulosus Ashby and Torr, The grains in the sculpture of P. granu-

losus are hollow, with a black dot on each grain, probably a sense organ, in which

case the hollow grain may haye been filled with ‘Serve fibre’’, a feature we do not

remember to have seen in any living Chiton, We conelnde that the strange ex-

tension to the tegmentum, common to both € thiton qemmatus de Koninels and Pro-

fochiton granulosus Ashby and Torr, is a primitive survival factor, giving in-

creased surface for the girdle attachment which was later discarded in favour of

an exteusion of the articulamentum to form the insertion plate and eaves. From

the single tin (four gallons) of material from Clifton Bank (Lower Miocene) nine

valves or fragments of valves of this species were obtained ; ove being a fairly per-

fect tail valve, the others median valves, ’

? PROTOCHITON sp.

Prom the same exposure also, comes a single median valve which is Acantho-

chitonoid in character, but with hollow grains which are widely different from those

of the above species. As this is too imperfect to make a holotype, its deseription is

deferred in the hope that future work will produce a better preserved example of

what must be a very interesting species,

Arossocurron Ashby, 1925.

APOSSOCITITON SULCI sp. TOV.

Plate xx, fig. 21.

Head valve only, length 1:0 m.m., width 1°25 mm. Straw coloured. Raised,

anterior slope convex and steep. Entire surface, under X30 Zeiss binocular,

evenly covered with circular, flat-topped polished, minute grains, which, although

ASHBY AND COTTON —Fossil CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 211

crowded, appear not to touch, Five ray ribs, three central ones strongly raised,

outer ones little more than mere folds.

Articulamentum. Insertion plate extending well forward beyond tegmentum

for one-fifth of width of latter ; colour white, three central ray ribs continned right

across insertion plate, which is folded up, the fold standing out beyond the margin

of the insertion plate; no trace of a slit.

Tegmentum inside without sculpture, turned over to an unusual degree; three

dark-coloured apertures in three depressions corresponding with the three ray ribs

of the tegmmentum, and each almost corresponding with the edge of tegmentuin

above.

Holotype. McDonald's, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4340, 8.A.M.

Beautifully preserved.

We have great pleasure in naming this i Important discovery after Dr. Sule, to

whose labours we are indebted for its discovery. Because of its excellent state of

preservation, this specimen amply justifies Ashby’'s primitive genus, Afossachiton,

which has all the characters of Acanthochiton except that of slits, and can be re-

garded as a direct progenitor of Acanthochiton. The three dark-coloured aper-

fires sugvest large nerve channels connecting with the sirdle at its junetion with

the tegmentum ; exactly similar features do not occur in living Chitons.

ArossocuiTon cupMorE! Ashby, 1925

Plate xx, fig. 22.

One median valve from MeDonald’s, Miocene (Kalimnan).

TELOCHITON subg. nov.

Sculpture conforming to that of Afassochiton, but ray ribs of auteriov and

other valves continued right across insertion plate in narrow raised ribs, which (in

some cases) do not seem to be a prolongation of the tegmentum, but are built wp

out of the articulamentum, Genotype, Afossochiton (Telochiton) dendus sp. nov.

Avoss0CHITON (TELOCHITON) DENDUS sp. lov.

Plate xx, fig, 24.

Incomplete head valve only; length of piece 3 mm., width 3 mm. Teementum

occupies about one-third of valve, insertion plate very wide; sculpture of crowded

elliptical small erains with no definite arrangement, those grains surmounting the

ray ribs sometimes larger, some several times as laree, in one place apparently

fused, larger near the posterior margin; five strongly raised ray ribs, the space

212 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

concave between the two posterior and the one next to them; an unusual feature is

that each rib in the tegmentum is continued right across the broad insertion plate

in a narrow sharply-raised rib, apparently built of the lower layer of the articula-

mentum ; this appearance is not due to attrition of the tegmentum, for, in places,

the anterior edge of the tegmentum has sculpture of small erains.

Articulamentum. White; tegmentum folded over at apex of valve, continua-

tion of ray ribs across the insertion plate not by a prolongation of tegmentum but

by a building-up of the articulamentum. No slits, but insertion plate edge con-

siderably damaged.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Ifamilton, Victoria. Lower Miocene.

P. 4342.

A¥roOssocHITON (TELOCHITON) ISCUS Sp. Nov.

Plate xix, fig. 20.

Tail valve only, length 2 mm., width 3 mm., much elevated and arched, mucro

at posterior third, tegmentum behind mucro vertical, reduced to one-third only

of area of shell; dorsal area very narrow, sides parallel, not wedge-shaped, with a

narrow short groove on either side, the posterior portion of this area worn, though

a perfect specimen may have a short second groove making this area narrowly and

partially pinnatifid ; area behind mucro, small, evenly covered with closely-packed

small, rounded, ball-like grains, posterior margin with two very large grains and

a third smaller one suggesting the beginning of a very coarse broken rib; a most

unusual feature typical of this subgenus, and situated next to the girdle at the

posterior portion of the insertion plate, are three ribs traversing the insertion plate,

one in line with the dorsal area, and one on either side diverging. (Since writing

this deseription, one rib has flaked off.) These do not appear to be narrow ridges

of the tegmentum, but are rather narrow thickenings of the articulamentum. No

slits. Area anterior to mucro decorated on either side with four horizontal rows

of globular to subelliptical grains; the pattern is so regular that transverse rows

of grains are formed.

Articulamentum. White; hollow under muero unusually deep, either the

sutural laminae were weak or the larger portion is missing.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.

P. 4339, S.A.M.

A¥rossocHITON (TELOCHITON) MAGNICOSTATUS Sp. Noy.

Plate xx, fig. 23.

One median valve only, length 5 mm., width 6-5 mm., angle of divergence 90°.

Carinated, beaked, dorsal ridge longitudinally convex, side slope steep ; dorsal area

ASHBY AND CoTTON—Fossit CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 213

flaked off, evidently longitudinally curved; pleural area diagonally concave, de-

eorated with rather large elliptical grains arranged diagonally in longitudinal

rows in some places; many of grains rectangular ou the upper end, obtusely

rounded at the lower; most striking feature is an exceptionally narrow and high

diagonal rib starting from the prominent beak and reaching the girdle not far

posterior of the middle of the valve; pleural area bends wpwards at the diagonal

rib, making pleural area concave; top of rib as wide as a single large elliptical

grain; pleural area slope to top of diagonal rib gradual, but on the other side, that.

of the lateral area, the slope is vertical; consequently lateral area is depressed, and

at a considerably lower level than the pleural area: sculpture of depressed lateral

area similar to that of pleural, but grains there a little more spaced.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P.4343,8.A.M.

The narrow, much raised diagonal rib and depressed lateral area easily cis-

tinguish this Afossechilon. What appears to be an extension of the sutural lami-

hie is On One side crossed by an extension of the diagonal rib. This feature is the

sole justification for placing the species under Telochiton. That a fragile fragment

of the teymentum does, at the diagonal rib, extend across the articulamentum, is

quite certain. Any but very catitions handling of the valve will break this. There

still remains a possibility that the whole of the articulamentum showing has been

produced by the flaking off of the tegmentum, for in places pieces of grain appear

to have been removed and then to haye adhered to the articulamentum, or this

appearance may be due to sears; additional examples are required for exact deter-

mination of this point.

AcantHocTUITON Gray, 1821,

ACANTHOCHITON FORSYTHENSES Sp. NOV.

Plate xx, fig, 26,

Two mediau valves. One, length 1*25 mn., width 2 mm. (holotype), and the

other, length 3 mm., width 3-8 min, telnet pe).

Carinated, dorsal area broadly wedge-shaped and pinnatifid, beaked, surface

smooth, lateral-pleural area decorated by longitudinal rows of tri angular, spaced,

flattish grains of four complete and one half- -rows ; grains regularly placed, form-

ing rows either way ; apex of triangular grains point downwards and forwards.

Articulamentum. White; insertion plates and sutural laminae broken off,

tegumentum folded back at the beak, in centre of the valve articulamentum much

thickened from one side to the other,

Tlolotype: Forsyth’s Grange Burn, near Hamilton, V ictoria, Pliocene (Kal-

imnan), P, 4345,

214 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Paratype: Same locality, median valve.

A further specimen from Clifton Bank, median valve, length 1:5 mm., width

2 mm,

This species differs from Afossochiton cudmoret Ashby in that the triangular

grains are arranged regularly, while in cudmoret they are very irregular, dorsal

areas not pinnatifid, and the carination less sharp.

ACANTHOCHITON FORSYTHENSIS RELATUS sub.sp. nov,

One median valve. Differs from forsythensis in lateral area being indicated

by a shallow fold, grains arranged diagonally, but dorsal area and grains similar.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, V ictoria, Lower Miocene.

ACANTHOCHITON DRUNUS Sp. Noy.

Plate xx, fig, 20.

One median valve, length 1-5 mm., width 2mm. Dorsal area worn, narrower

than in forsylhensis, not pinnatifid, but suggests longitudinal striation; ridge

straight, not arched ; pleural-lateral area decorated with straight lougitudinal rows

of grains arranged on the diagonal and almost, sometimes actually, touching ;

grains elliptical, slightly rounded at apex, flattish but not actually flat; five rows

of grains, one next to girdle has three grains and one uext to dorsal has worn

orains,

Articulamentum. Sutural laminae present but worn, broad, shallow anter-

iorly, sinus between wide; insertion plates have no indication of slit, though ab-

sence may be due to wearing,

Tlolotype : MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan), P. 4348, S.A.M.

ACANTHOCIITON CASUS Sp. NOV.

Plate xx, fig. 30.

One median valve ouly ; length 1-5 mm., width 2mm, Side slope steep ; dorsal

area, ridged, curved, and arched, less broad than in Acanthochiton forsythensis

due to smaller angle of divergence, subpinnatifid, three grooves narrower than in

forsythensis, lateral area not defined ; pleu ral-lateral area slightly concave, outer

edge becoming less steep; this area decorated with six and a partial seventh row

of grains placed longitudinally; grains small, triangular, placed in rows at an

acute angle, pointing forward ; viewed transversely, rows are curved, not at right

angles as in forsythensis; difference of pattern largely due to concavity of shell.

Articulamentum, Dirty-white; sutural laminae and insertion plates broken

off.

ASHBY AND CoTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 215

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Lower Miocene. P. 4349, S.A.M.

This species may be the progenitor of Acanthochiton forsythensis, for, in

several respects, they resemble one another,

ACANTHOCHITON SABRATUS sp. Tov.

Plate xx, fig, 25.

One median valve, length 1-75 mm., width 2-25 mm. Arched, not carinated,

side slope conyex and dorsal ridge beaked ; dorsal area has sculpture worn away

(if any was present), narrowly wedge-shaped as shown by the seulpture of pleural

area at the anterior end; pleural area separated from lateral by narrow rib, but

except for this rib, lateral area is at same level as pleural area; sculpture of both

areas and of the rib itself identical ; sculpture of small grains irregularly arranged

and crowded, minute crowded round grains near the beak, across the pleural area

grains are double the size, and for a short distance are in a semi-longitudinal

arrangement, become a little longer in shape, then another change takes place, and

a few grains along anterior margin are almost cirenlar with flattish tops; briefly,

grains are nnusnally small, with little pattern, and vary in shape.

Articulamentum. Dirty white; only a small fragment of suttwral lamina pre-

sent; we judge this to have been well developed, and sinus between fairly broad ;

all insertion plates missing; tegmeutum folded over at beak.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene,

P. 4544, S.A.M.

LikaAcurron sube. noy.

Pleural area decorated with narrow, widely-spaced ribs, instead of granular

ornamentation, In the genotype, Acanthochiton (Lirachiton) inecpectus sp. nov.,

the sculpture behind muero and in area corresponding with lateral area in median

valve is formed of triangular flat grains; near the apex of each is an ocellus or

sense organ. While we have provisionally placed the subgenus Lirachiton under

Acanthochiton, it could be placed under Afossochitan with as much justifiea-

tion ; the evidence of more material is needed to settle the point.

ACANTHOUIITON (LiRACTiITON) INEXPECTUS sp. nov.

Plate xx, fig. 31.

One tail valve only ; length 2 mm., width 2-5 mm. Shell arched, not earinated,

side slope almost straight; in most of dorsal area tegmentum has broken off, but

there is a little left at the anterior edge where it is smooth; muero a little posterior

of central, slope behind muero steep and decorated with flat triangular grains,

216 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

most of which have been partially worn off, revealing that they are apparently

hollow; at the sides, an area corresponding with lateral area in median valves

where the triangular flat grains are well preserved and larger than the posterior

ones; apertures situated near but not at the apex of each triangular grain, may

be sense organs, but larger than those in hollow grains of Protochiton granulosus,

corresponding with the ocelli common in several living genera ; rest of portion an-

terior to mucro and corresponding with pleural area, traversed longitudinally by

three much raised, rounded ribs, the trough between these ribs broad, and the

ribs themselves overhanging.

Articulamentum. White; hollow under mucro wide and deep, nerve aper-

tures exceptionally developed and numerous; slits not discernable, but two or three

very shallow grooves may be connected with slits.

Holotype: MeDonald’s Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4350, S.A.M.

The nearest allied living species is, we think, Pseudotonicia cunata Suter,

from New Zealand.

ACANTHOCHITON PILSBRYOIDES Sp. NOV.

Plate xx, fig. 27.

One median valve only, length 2-25 mm., width 3 mm. Subearinate, angle of

divergence 110°. Dorsal area and small adjoining portion of pleural area eroded

on one side, and whole of sculpture eroded on the other ; major portion of sculpture

on pleural-lateral area on the one side so well preserved and ornamentations so

distinctive, that we describe it as new; sculpture of horizontal rows of grains, the

larger portion in shape of rectangular ellipse, set in rows diagonally (similar to

sculpture of the recent Acanthochiton pilsbryi Sykes), but near the dorsal area

some grains are rhomboided and one or two fusiform,

Articulamentum. Insertion plate broad, no slits visible, but this may be due

to erosion, which also accounts for bases only of the sutural laminae being left.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.

P. 4346, S.A.M.

The specific name is suggested by the similarity of sculpture with that of the

Australian recent species, Acunthochiton pilsbryi Sykes, but in the shape of the

valves and absence of bridging in the sculpture, it is quite dissimilar.

ACANTHOCHITON TRIANGULOIDES sp. nov.

Plate xx, fig. 28.

One median valve, length 2 mm., width 2-25 mm, Rather flat, arched, and

beaked, dorsal area narrow and wedge-shaped, anterior half granulosely sculp-

ASHBY AND CoTTON—FossiIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 217

tured ; much sculpture flaked off, but what remains shows rather long ovate-ellip-

tieal shallow grains, changing before the centre of area is reached to three shallow

rows of small, indistinet. grains; posterior half of this area smooth and polished ;

beak protrudes well beyond posterior margin of valve; pleural-lateral area decora-

ted with eight or nine longitudinal rows of small, spaced, slightly-raised (obtuse-

triangular) flat-topped grains; direction of rows not parallel, and in one place a

short row is intercalated; arrangement of rows a little indistinct, some angles of

lighting suggest more diagonal than longitudinal arrangement; grains evenly

spaced throughout in the rows, and exceptionally even in size; no diagonal rib or

fold, lateral area differing in that in the two outer rows at the posterior corner the

grains, eight in all, are half as large again as the rest of the area.

Articwamentum, White; insertion plate and sutural laminae are niissing,

Holotype: Forsyth’s Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan).

P. 4347, S.A.M,

The sharply-ent, small, even in size, aud subtriangular grains make this quite

a distinctive species. If, when a perfect specimen should be found, the insertion

plates are unslit, the species will then have fo be removed to Afossochiton Ashby.

The description was made while viewing the specimen under X30 Zeiss

binocular.

CrypropuaAx Blainville, 1818,

CryprorLax prrrcHarpt Hall, 1904.

Plate xix, fig. 20.

Cryptoplax gatlifi Mall (6) is a synonym of the above species. Ashby (3)

states; ‘' The holotype of C. gatliffi differs in one respect only from the majority of

specimens described as C. pritehardi Hall, in that it possesses a lobe-shaped plate

on the inside, just under the apex.’’ We now find that the “‘lobe-shaped plate’’

is common to all valves, although more marked in the three anterior valves. We

find that Hall was incorreet in believing that any of the fossil exam ples he had seen

showed the tegmentum, and we are confident that the only difference is that pritch-

ardi is the remains of an ordinary median valve, and gatlifi was one of the three

anterior valves of the same species. Ashby (3) also expressed the opinion that

“valves”? may he of *‘non-Chitonvid origin’’. Now, thanks to Dr.

Sule’s washings, we have hundreds of these Cryploplux valves, very few showing

sculpture.

We now express the following opinions:

1. Holotypes of pritchardi and gatliffi and all previously recorded examples

have uo visible tegmentum, and all sculpture has been worn off.

these worn

218 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

2. Hundreds of these worn examples might reasonably be considered one

species, because in living forms there is an equal discrepancy in the valves of a

single specimen, the first two and often the first three valves are broad, and the

rest narrow, subject to variations in the tail valve.

3. The present shape of these worn valves is often not, at all the original form,

but that as they have been ground ont of all recognition by ceaseless rolling of the

waves, a valye has often been shortened by nearly one-third,

4. Not one per cent. of the valves shows any sculpture. We offer the explana-

tion that the shape is that of an elongate roller, which lends itself to rolling over

anid over with the slightest ripple, as well as in the more violent surt.

Pleisiotype. Out of the first examples of fossil Cryptoplax to show sufficient

data for specific deseription, we select one as pleisiotype of the late Prof. Hall’s

Cryptoplax pritcharda, and we also place his Cryptoplax gathffi as a synonym,

We also deseribe and name two distinct new species of Cryptoplox in the

following pages.

Re-description trom pleisiotype.

Median valve, length 6. mm., width 2mm. Sharply raised, side slope convex,

dorsal area very narrow, straight sides, raised, a little flattish top, beak slightly

worn ; seulpture forms one area at the beak consisting of spaced, circular or spheri-

cal small grains (truly Acanthochitonoid in character), from there the two upper

ribs granulose for a third the length of valve; upper rib next the dorsal area con-

tinued parallel with the dorsal area almost to the anterior edge of the valve, and

for the last two-thirds of its length is a strong irregular rib very coarsely toothed

at its base on the upper side, the effect of the coarse teeth is to suggest a series of

pits; on one side there are two outer ribs seulptured in the same manner one over

half the length of valve, the other a little less than half, these two granulose for

half their length, then change to the coatse-toothed sculpture; on the other side,

while the two upper ribs correspond with the above deseription, there are also two

outer short ribs (probably the outer one on the other side has been broken off) ;

these two immediately beyond the granulose base near the beak become a series of

confused, irregular, highly-polished grains.

Articulamentum, Creamy-white; sutural laminae worn, insertion plate worn ;

tegmentum bent over at posterior forming a pocket, the internal plate only showing

as a hollow rise.

Paratype 1. Same locality, length 4-5 mm.; worn, whole of tegmentum pre-

sent and in proportion to size, the granulose sculpture is a little more extensive,

Paratype 2. Length 4 mm., worn. Both 1 and 2 have well defined, raised

dorsal area.

Pleisiotype and Paratypes; MeDonald’s Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan).

ASHBY AND COTTON—FOSSIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 219

CRYPTOPLAX SICUS Sp. NOV.

Plate xix, fig. 17.

Large median valve (holotype), length 6 mm., long, narrow, steeply raised,

beaked ; dorsal area colour ‘‘tawny’’ (Ridgeway) narrow, straight-sided, strongly

raised, rounded; sculpture, except at beak, composed of five dagger-like ribs on

either side, ivory-like in appearance, commencing near the beak, narrow and slen-

der, becoming swollen within a third of their length from the end, and then taper-

ing to a sharp point, longest rib next to dorsal area, ending one-fifth short of the

anterior edge of the valve; close to beak ribs show slight granulation at their sides,

and so for a very short distance, but the beak itself is partly broken away, and there

might have been a small amount of granulation had there been no breaking away.

Articulamentum. White; the damage to the valve has still left the little in-

ternal ‘‘plate’’ in perfect preservation,

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4336, 8.A.M.

Paratype: One median valve, width 3 mm., worn, but showing most of the

sculpture. Same locality as holotype.

Hypotype: Of head valve, only specimen; badly worn, but showing some

sculpture, although not sufficient to make it holotype head valve. Same locality as

holotype.

The name (from

‘

‘sa’, a dagger) is suggested by the dagger shape of the

ribs.

CRYPTOPLAX NUMICUS Sp. Noy.

Plate xix, fig, 18,

One median valve only, length 3 mm., width 1-5 mm., in perfect state of pre-

servation; wider than most species, arched, side slope less steep than usual;

not beaked, but dorsal area slopes down to shell margin posteriorly ; dorsal area

has no raised, narrow dorsal ridge as in C. pritehardi and (. sicus, but presents a

broader convex surface than either; it is possible that this area received a good

deal of erosion, but the exceptionally well preserved seulpture on other portions

of valve seem to contradict this idea; sculpture entirely granulose throughout,

consisting of fine granulose longitudinal ribs, the outer one very short, little more

than the granulose thickening of the posterior edge of the teementum; upper rib

close to edge of dorsal area, indistinet in places, possibly due to wearing, grains

small, spherical, and mostly narrowly spaced,

Articulamentum. Creamy-white; insertion plate in good state of preserva-

tion, sutural laminae well defined, but shallow, tegmentum folded over at posterior

220 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

end, making that end slipper-heel shaped, a feature characteristic of Cryptoplaz.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4337, S.A.M.

Mo.LaAcHITON gen. nov.

Dorsal area (worn in genotype) broad, smooth except for faint growth

grooves; pleural area unique, crossed longitudinally with broad irregular ribs,

composed of large grains shaped on upper side like a large molar tooth, whole series

of grains in rib fused together, centre of each grain with a funnel-like depression,

and in centre of funnel a black dot or nerve aperture; ribs near dorsal area short,

several run forward into dorsal area, but too worn to show ‘‘ocelli’’, if present ;

twelve ribs showing between dorsal area and girdle; lateral area sharply up-folded

at the posterior margin ; both raised portion, trough below, and a small part of the

adjoining outer edge of pleural area decorated with imbricating, sub-triangular

sub-convex grains.

Genotype (monotype) : Molachiton naxus sp. nov.

The unusual sculpture of the pleural areas with the sensory organ in the centre

of each molar-shaped fused grain, and the absence of insertion plate or sutural

lamina, precludes determination of the true position of the genus in the natural

taxis, so provisionally we place it in the family Lepidopleuridae.

MoLACHITON NAXUS sp. nov.

Plate xx, fig. 32.

One half median valve only, length 4 mm., width 4 mm. Strongly beaked,

dorsal area a good deal worn, broad, smooth except for faint growth grooves;

pleural area unique, crossed longitudinally by broad irregular ribs composed of

large grains in the shape of a large molar tooth; whole series in rib fused together ;

a funnel-shaped depression in centre of each grain, and in its centre a black dot

or nerve aperture (ocellus), ribs near dorsal area short, and several run forward

into that area; these are too worn to show ocelli even if present; twelve ribs show-

ing in pleural area; lateral area sharply up-folded at posterior margin; both raised

portion, the trough (hollow below) and small part of adjoining outer edge of

pleural area decorated with imbricating, subtriangular, sub-convex grains.

Articulamentum. Cream; insertion plate and sutural laminae missing.

Holotype: McDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4251, S.A.M.

BELCHITON gen. nov.

Sculpture of pleural area consists of slender longitudinal ridges surmounted

with minute spherical glossy or porcelain grains; the interspaces twice the width

ASHBY AND COTTON—FOSSIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 221

of the granular ridges and shallowly bridged below each grain; lateral area cov-

ered with closely-packed radial rows of grains similar to those of the pleural area,

the rows in places intercalated with shorter rows; lateral area not raised as a whole,

but near dorsal area and girdle are two shallow upward folds; sutural lamina in

genotype appears perfect, weak and shallow, quite characteristic of palaeozoic

forms; in common with Pratochiton granulosus Ashby and Torr, each granule has

a black dot or ‘‘sense aperiure’’ at the summit. We place this genus in the family

Lewidopleuridue.

Genotype (monotype) : Belehiton pulcherrinus sp. nov.

The seulpture is so different from any other genns of Lepidopleuridae that we

propose the above new genus.

BELCHITON PULCHERRIMUS sp. nov,

Plate xix, fig. 10.

Two fragments median valves, good condition ; larger (holotype) 3 mm. wide,

smaller 2mm. wide. Fragments almost square (reconstructed in figure) ; pleural

area crossed longitudinally by numerous extremely slender riblets, each carrying

af the top, tiny spherical glossy or porcelain-like grains: near the dorsal area,

riblets are crowded, several short ones intercalated, where this oecurs almost

touching; from there until girdle is reached, riblets are in proportion to their

width, widely separated, each turning upward on reaching lateral area; an

important feature of sculpture in the pleural area is the bridging, the transverse

sculpture, very slender and shallow, crosses from erain to grain; lateral area

closely covered with radial rows of grains of same character as those in pleural

area, which do not seem to summnount a ridge, but lie on the surface; shorter rows

intercalate in places; lateral area not raised as a whole, but near both dorsal area

and girdle a shallow upward fold; grains in both areas with a black dot or aperture

in their apices, no doubt associated with sensory organs, a primitive feature found

in the genus Protochiton Ashby.

Articnlamentum. White; sutnral lamina very small both ways (quite primi-

tive in character), and placed towards outer margin: teymentum turned over full

length of posterior margin,

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Pliocene (Kalimnan).

P, 4329, 8.A.M,

The beauty of the seulpture suggests the name, A Zeiss X30 binocular and

pocket lens X20 were used for examination,

222 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LepmorpLeurus Risso, 1826.

LermorPLEURUS NIVARUS sp. noy.

Plate xix, fig. 5.

One median valve, holotype, length 2mm., width 4-9 mm. Valve arched, not

carinated, angle of divergence 105”, side slope slightly convex, dorsal area eroded,

shell bowed forward at beak; pleural area well preserved, crossed longitudinally

by narrow granulose ribs, a few bifid, many wavy; interspaces two to three times

the width of ribs; lateral area sharply raised and closely decorated with five ray

rows which almost touch; grams small, cireular, and rounded.

Articulamentum, Probably originally white, now stained; thickened across

middle, no insertion plate.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.

P. 4324, S.A.M.

Paratypes: Two fragments median valves, same locality.

LEPIDOPLEURUS PAMPHILIUS sp. DOV.

Plate xix, fig. 2.

One median valve only, length 1-9 mm., width 3 mm., angle of divergence 90°.

Side slope straight, arched, not carinated, dorsal area beaked, broadly wedge-

shaped, striate with slender, closely packed, minutely grannlose riblets; division

between dorsal area and pleural area ill-defined because similar slender riblets to

those of dorsal area are continued for at least one-third of the pleural arca, and

from there until lateral area is reached, grains and riblets, of which they are part,

increase till two or three times their size; lateral area raised, narrow, ornamented

with closely-packed granules, which commence quite minute at the dorsal area,

increasing in size towards the girdle, but even these are not as large as the adjoining

portion of pleural area.

Articwamentum. White; the lamina on one side perfect except for small

noteh, demonstrating that laminae of this genus are weak and produced yery far

apart, a feature this genus has in common with all known forms of palaeozoic

chitons from the Primary Carboniferous Beds of Europe; no insertion plate.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miovene,

P. 4321, 8.A.M.

LeriIpoOPpLEURUS BADIOIDES sp. Ov.

Plate xix, fig. 4; xxi, 47.

Tail valye, length 1-75 mm., width 2°25 mm, Muero at anterior third, im-

mediately behind mucro shell is vertical, from there posterior area is at a steep

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossiL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 223

angle, flattening out a little near posterior margin; whole of this area posterior to

muero and including both sides of mucro clothed with closely-packed radiating

minutely granulose riblets; small area anterior to mucro evenly decorated with

proportionately widely-spaced granular riblets, while coarser than those of pos-

terior portion, still slender; this sculpture present not only at sides of the valve

but continued over anterior half of dorsal area, which seems unsculptured at

muero itself,

Articulamentum. No insertion plate, sutural laminae much reduced and far

apart,

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Bnrn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.

P, 4828, SAM. Fig. 4,

Iypotype of median valve. One well preserved, length 1-5 mm., width 3-25

mm., from Forsyth’s, Plioeene (Kalimnan), subearinated, side slope convex ; seulp-

ture similar to that of area anterior to muero in holotype, but direction of slender

riblets in lateral area radial.

Articulamentum, Cream; no insertion plate, sutural laminae missing, tegu-

mentum folded over under beak. Fig. 47. P. 4358, SAM,

Paratype 1: Tail valve, broken, length 1-25 mm., width 2 mm., posterior and

sides of muero clothed with elosely-packed radiating minutely eranulose riblets,

a good deal obscured owing to wear. Same locality,

Paratype 2; Fragment of median valve—same locality as paratype 1.

The name budioides is suggested by the similarity to the reeent badius Tledly

and Hull.

? LEPIPOPLEURUS UXELLUS sp. nov,

.

Plate xix, fie, 13.

A portion of tail valve, length 1-25 mm., width 2-25 mm. Muero well defined,

eeniral, almost vertical immediately behind the muero: from there to posterior

margin shell is very flat, deeorated with closely-packed radiating subgranulose rib-

lets; width and erowding of riblets almost identical with the similar riblets in

Lepidoplewrus badiowdes Ashby and Cotton, but in wrellus, eranulation is only

partial; posterior area ends abruptly at the mucro, not earried forward along the

sides as in L. budivides; area anterior to mucro much raised and decorated by

numerous, strong, longitudinal, peetinated ribs (not granulose), the interspaces

deep and about half the width of ribs; this sculpture carried right across dorsal

area, which is striate for its full length, the whole of the tezmentum is slate-crey.

Articulamentum. Greyish-blue; no evidence of insertion plate; a steep nar-

row ridge commencing V-shaped under muero and reaching outer anterior margin

on either side; one side incomplete (due to breaking away), but on the other side,

22+ RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ridge is perfect, and shows a deep groove commencing at virdle and ending near

centre of valve; we do not recall a similar ridge in any other chiton.

Holotype: Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4382, S.A.M.

Although we have placed this species under the genus Lepidepleurus failing

further data, the flatness of the area behind the muero, the colour of artieulamen-

tum, and to some extent the senlpture of the area anterior to the muero, are not

characteristic of the genus Lepidopleurus.

LeprInporLEURUS MAGNOGRANIFER Ashby, 1925,

Plate xix, fig. 3.

Four portions of median valves from Clifton Bank. The holotype deseribed

by Ashby (3) was picked from among fossils eolleeted by Dennant and Tate from

the general locality ‘‘ Muddy Creek’’, some of which were also cleseribed by Ashby

and Torr (1).

We now designate the holotype locality as Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Lower

Miocene, Specimen figured Pleisiotype, P. 4322, 8.A.M., has better preserved

sculpture than that of the holotype.

LEFIDOPLEURUS RELATUS sp. Noy,

Plate xix, fig. 12.

One ineomplete median valve, length 2-25 mm., width 4°5 mm., angle of diver-

gence 90°, valve arched, side slope convex, dorsal area with some inconspicuous

slender network sculpture, much confused ; pleural area near to dorsal area crossed

by crowded longitudinal ribs; from there they become widely spaced, still parallel

to each other, but becoming more and more bent upwards near the lateral area; ribs

themselves very narrow, forming narrow, rather high ridges with minute erannla-

tion near their bases, those near the girdle become nearer together with gran ulation

ou top of ridges ; lateral area much raised and closely covered with irregular pebble-

like grains, pattern conspicuously in transverse rows, grains in each row about the

same size, but a row with coarse grains may be next to one with small grains, pos-

terior edge of this area consists entirely of large, pebble-like erains, three and a

partial fourth radial grooves.

Articnlamentum. White; centre much thicker, thickening diverging on either

side, but rapidly terminating in a point; no insertion plate, and sutural laminae

broken off.

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Miocene.

P, 4331, S.A.M,

Paratypes ; Two fragments of median valves.

ASHBY AND COTTON—FossiL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 225

Although resembling Lepidopleurus magnogranifer Ashby, L. rclatus can be

easily distinguished by the narrow longitudinal ribs and minute eranulation.

LEpPiIpopLeEURUS SEPHUS sp. Nov.

Plate xix, fig. 11,

One median valve, half one side missing, complete side, length 2 mm., width

from dorsal ridge to girdle 4 mm.,, valve arehed, side slope convex, angle of diver-

gence 50°, dorsal area teementum absent, pleural area. erossed longitudinally by

rather strong parallel ribs; ribs definitely straight and parallel right to girdle,

subgranulose; most important feature is that they are mumerously and strongly

bridged across, giving the seulpture a semi-honeycomb appearance ; bridging does

not reach top of ribs or the honeyeombing would be more marked; lateral area

raised and decorated with radial ribbing; fureate in some cases; ribs coarsely sub-

eranulose, but most reeular and almost smooth ; total number of ribs and half-ribs,

seven,

Articulamentum, Cream coloured; no insertion plate; remains of sutural

lamina on one side only; lamina weak and shallow, teementum folded over along

most of posterior margin,

Holotype: Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Iamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan),

P. 48380, 8. A.M.

This species differs from both magnogranifer Ashby and relatus Ashby and

Cotton in the marked bridging of the pleural area, and in the smooth, suberanulose

ribs of the lateral area.

LEPrpOrpLEURUS SINERVUS Sp. mov,

od

Plate xix, fig, 7,

One almost complete head yalve, length 1-9 mm., width 3-75 mm., sculpture

of narrow riblets, closely-packed and smooth of surface, interspaces appearing

under X20 magnifications as mere grooves, but at the bottom of groove in places

pectinated ; under X80 magnifications, the bottoms of grooves seem to be series

of minute perforations ; at one side, a few riblets surmounted with minute granules

suggest that when newly-formed they may be minutely granular, a feature that is

quickly lost; riblets consistently twenty-three to twenty-four to the millimetre.

Articulamentum, Cream; much thickened in centre, uo insertion plate or

sutural laminae.

Holotype; Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria, Pliocene (Kalimnan).

P. 4326, S.A.M,

Paratype: Large fragment, possibly of a large head valve, same location,

226 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LEPIDOPLEURUS SINGUS sp. Tov.

Plate xix, fig. 8.

One tail valve only, length 2. mm., width 3-1 mm.; mucro not defined, shell

strongly raised, sloping sharply from the anterior edge to middle of valve, and

from there vertical to the girdle; whole shell decorated with longitudinal, mostly

parallel, riblets, those in centre more slender and more closely packed than else-

where on the valve; interspaces vary a good deal; where interspaces are wide,

ridges are bridged across; where closer together this feature is reduced to a mere

hole; thirteen riblets to the millimetre, but this count includes the central crowded

narrower riblets, so we estimate that the riblets in this species are only half the

number shown in the preceding species, L. sinervus Ashby and Cotton,

Articulamentum. Colour buff, sutural laminae seemingly complete, very

small and laterally narrow; altogether they are unusually small for even this

primitive genus.

Holotype: MceDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan). P. 4327, 8.A.M,

LEPIDOPLEURUS BABIDUS sp. nov.

Plate xix, fig. 6.

One half median valve, length 1-9 mm., width 3 mm. ; pleural area seulptured

with longitudinal granulose widely-spaced ribs, but close together near dorsal

area ; interspaces twice, sometimes thrice, the width of rib; ribs parallel until near

girdle, where they beeome irregular and weak ; interspaces in pleural area shal-

lowly bridged across; transverse shallow ridges correspond with erains which suv-

mount the ribs; ribs turn upwards at the lateral area ; lateral area mueh and irregu-

larly raised, eight growth grooves, two outer ones at a much lower level than those

above; sculpture of lateral area eomposed of numerous radiating snberanulose

riblets touching one another; while these are much broken by the growth grooves,

the general radial pattern is maintained.

Articwlamentum. White; no insertion plate, sutural laminae absent.

Holotype: MeDonald’s, Muddy Creek, Pliocene (Kalimnan), P. 4325, S.A.M,.

Paratype: Two worn fragments median valves, same locality.

This species is easily separated from any other species herein described by

the deep growth grooving in the lateral area, and from some others in the character

of the bridging.

ae I

ASHBY AND CoTTON—FossIL CHITONS FROM AUSTRALIA 22

L&EPIOPLEURUS DIVERSIGRANOSUS Sp. HOV.

Plate xix, figs. 1 and 9.

One tail valve, length 2mm., width 3mm., mucro at anterior third, area behind

mucro steep for two-thirds of area, and from there to outer margin almost flat, steep

portion sculptured with minute grains forming under X20 a decussate pattern;

outer portion of this area exhibits the start of about thirty granulose, radiating,

shallow ribs, grains occupying about same area as four of the minute grains re-

ferred to above; area anterior to mucro narrow and longitudinally erossed by

numerous, shallow, narrow, subpectinated riblets, interspaces vary from sume

width as riblets to twice that width; dorsal area wedge-shaped, small, similarly

minutely decussate as in area immediately posterior to mucro,

Articulamentum. Crean; saucer-shape, no insertion plate (Fig. 9).

Holotype: Clifton Bank, Lower Miocene. P. 4328, S,A.M.

Hypotype of median value, from same locality, width 2-75 mm.,, rather flat,

side slope straight ; part of dorsal area flaked off, what remains minutely grantlose ;

pleural area decorated with slender, rather irregular, minutely peetinated or sub-

grantilose riblets; lateral area separated from pleural by a rather coarsely yranu-

lose rib, much of this area minutely eranulose, granules double the size of those of

dorsal area, and no regular pattern; grains near girdle much larger and very irre-

gular. The hypotype value only. Fig. 1. P, 4520, S.A.M.

CALLOcHITON Gray, 1847.

CALLOCHITON MACDONALDI sp. nov.

Plate xxi, fig. 46.

One median valve, length 1:5 mm,, width 3+5 mum., shell is arched rather than

carinated, side slope straight, tegmentim of dorsal area largely missing, but was

evidently smooth and ill-defined ; pleural area smooth, without sculpture except

for four or five shallow growth grooves distinguished only by lateral lighting ;

lateral area raised aud smooth, crossed by three broad and deep growth grooves;

colour pinkish-cinnamon (Ridgeway).

Articulamentum, White; sutural laminae weak and shallow, sinus between

Lmm. wide, broad in proportion to size of valve; articulamentum not joined across

sinus, but edge of tegmentum slightly overhangs; a strong raised rib runs from

dorsal hollow almost to margin on either side. Shell arched rather than carinated,

side slope straight, anwle of divergence 100°,

Llolotype: Muddy Creek, MeDonald’s, Ilamilton, Victoria, Lower Pliocene

Z28 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(Kalimnan). P. 4368, 8.A.M. Unique example presented by the National Mus-

eum, Washington, U.S.A., to the Ashby collection in the South Australian Museum.

The valve was unfortunately broken in the washing, and was mended by Dr, Sule